Sunteți pe pagina 1din 912

Change 1

incorporated. TM 08780B-10
U.S. MARINE CORPS TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
FOR TRUCK, 8 X 8
LOGISTICS VEHICLE SYSTEM
(DIESEL)
CONSISTING OF

POWER UNIT, FRONT,


4 X 4 MK48(NSN 2320-01-177-5167)
4 X 4 MK48A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-3180)

TRAILER, POWERED,
CONTAINER HAULER,
4 X 4 MK14 (NSN 2320-01-176-0469)
4 X 4 MK14A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-5294)

TRAILER, POWERED,
WRECKER/RECOVERY
4 X 4 MK15 (NSN 2320-01-176-6928)
4 X 4 MK15A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-8144)

TRAILER, POWERED,
FIFTH WHEEL, SEMI-TRAILER ADAPTER
4 X 4 MK16 (NSN 2320-01-176-0487)
4 X 4 MK16A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-5293)

TRAILER, POWERED,
DROPSIDE, CARGO W/CRANE
4 X 4 MK17 (NSN 2320-01-176-0468)
4 X 4 MK17A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-5296)

OSHKOSH TRUCK CORPORATION


DAAE07-83-C-H418
DAAE07-95-C-X057
THIS PUBLICATION IS REQUIRED FOR OFFICIAL USE OR FOR
ADMINISTRATIVE OR OPERATIONAL PURPOSES, DISTRIBUTION IS LIMITED
TO U.S GOVERNMENT AGENCIES ONLY. OTHER REQUESTS FOR THIS
DOCUMENT MUST BE REFERRED TO: COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE
CORPS (ARD), WASHINGTON. D.C. 20380-0001

MAY 2004
PCN 180 002326 00
TM 08780B-10

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY


Headquarters, U. S. Marine Corps
Washington, DC 20380-0001

28 May 2004

1. This Technical Manual (TM 08780B-10), authenticated for Marine Corps use
and effective upon receipt, provides operation instructions for the Logistics
Vehicle System (LVS) series of vehicles, consisting of the Front Power Unit
MK48/48A1, Trailer, Powered, Container Hauler MK14/14A1, Trailer,
Powered, Wrecker/Recovery MK15/15A1, Trailer, Powered, Fifth Wheel, Semi-
Trailer Adapter MK16/16A1 and Trailer, Powered, Dropside, Cargo with Crane
MK17/17A1.

2. Submit notice of discrepancies or suggested changes on a NAVMC 10772.


The NAVMC may be submitted via the Internet using website:
https://pubs.ala.usmc.mil/front.htm, scrolling down to the NAVMC 10772
Tracking Program and following instructions provided. It may also be
submitted by electronic mail to mbmatcommarlogbases@logcom.usmc.mil, or
by mailing paper copy of NAVMC 10772 in an envelope addressed to:
Commander, Marine Corps Systems Command, Attn: Assistant Commander
Acquisition and Logistics (LOG/TP), 814 Radford Blvd, Suite 20343, Albany,
Georgia, 31704-0343.

3. TM 2320-10/11A dated December 20, 1989 is hereby superseded for Marine


Corps use.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

OFFICIAL

S. I. SCHULER
Colonel, USMC
Program Manager, Motor Transport (PMM151)
Marine Corps Systems Command

DISTRIBUTION: PCN 180 002326 00

1/(2 blank)
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY
Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps
Washington, DC 20380-0001

TM 08780B-10
Change 1
PCN 180 002326 01

30 September 2010

Encl: (1) Replacement Pages


(2) New Insert Pages

1. Purpose. To transmit new and replacement pages to TM 08780B-10, Operators Manual for
Truck, 8 X 8 Logistics Vehicle System, dated May 2004.

2. Action. Remove present pages listed below and replace with corresponding pages contained
in the enclosures. Significant changes contained in the replacement pages of this change are
denoted by a vertical bar in the left-hand margin. Changes to figures are denoted by a pointing
hand indicating the location of the change.

REMOVE PAGES INSERT PAGES


Cover Page Cover Page
A/(B blank) A/(B blank)
iii - iv iii - iv
2-395.1 – 2-395.32
B-31 – B-34 B-31 – B-34

3. Filing Instructions. This change transmittal page will be filed immediately following the
signature page of the manual.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

OFFICIAL

MICHAEL W. EVERLY
Program Manager, Motor Transportation (PMM 151)
Marine Corps Systems Command

DISTRIBUTION: PCN 180 002326 01


1/(2 blank)
TM 08780B-10

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES


NOTE: The portion of the text affected
by the changes is indicated by a vertical
line in the outer margin of the page.
Changes to illustrations are indicated
by miniature pointing hands. Changes
to wiring diagrams are indicated by
shaded areas.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages


are:
Original. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 May 2004
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Sep 2010
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 913 CONSISTING OF THE
FOLLOWING:

Page No. Change No. Page No. Change No.


B-1 - B-31 0
Title 1 B-32 - B-34 1
Blank 0 B-35 - B-56 0
1 0 C-1 - C-2 blank 0
2 blank 0 D-1 - D-6 blank 0
A - B blank 1 E-1 - E-36 blank 0
i-ii 0 Index-1 - Index-6 blank 0
iii 1
iv - xx blank 0
1-1 - 1-34 0
2-1 - 2-395 0
2-395-1 - 2-395-31 1
2-396 – 2-642 blank 0
3-1 - 3-74 0
A-1 - A-2 blank 0

*ZERO IN THIS COLUMN INDICATES AN ORIGINAL PAGE

A/(B blank)
RECORD OF CHANGES
CHANGE DATE TITLE OR BRIEF ENTERED
NO. DESCRIPTION BY
TM 08780B-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

How to Use This Manual ............................................................ xvii

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ............................................ 1-1

Section I General Information ................................. 1-1


1-1 Scope ...................................................... 1-1
1-2 Maintenance Forms and Records ............. 1-1
1-3 Report of Maintenance and
Unsatisfactory Equipment (QDR'S) ......... 1-1
1-4 Warranty Information .............................. 1-1
1-5 Reference Information ............................. 1-2

Section II. Equipment Description ............................ 1-3


1-6 General Description ................................. 1-3
1-7 MK48/48A1//14/14A1 Container
Hauler Vehicle ......................................... 1-4
1-8 MK48/48A1//15/15A1
Wrecker/Recovery Vehicle ...................... 1-6
1-9 MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Fifth Wheel
Semi-Trailer Adapter Vehicle .................. 1-9
1-10 MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Drop Side
Cargo w/Crane Vehicle .......................... 1-11
1-11 Difference Between Models .................. 1-14
1-12 Equipment Data ..................................... 1-15

Section III. Technical Principles of Operation ......... 1-29


1-13 Introduction ............................................ 1-29
1-14 Air System ............................................. 1-29
1-15 Electrical System ................................... 1-30
1-16 Hydraulic System ................................... 1-31
1-17 Steering System ..................................... 1-32
1-18 Drive Line System ................................. 1-33

i
TM 08780B-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ...................... 2-1

Section I. Description and Use of Operator's


Controls, Indicators, and Features ........... 2-1
2-1 MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit ................ 2-1
2-2 MK14/14A1 Container Hauler
Trailer .................................................... 2-21
2-3 MK15/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery
Trailer .................................................... 2-24
2-4 MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel
Semi-Trailer Adapter ............................. 2-40
2-5 MK17/17A1 Drop Side Cargo
w/Crane Trailer ...................................... 2-44
2-6 Special Purpose Kits Controls and
Indicators................................................ 2-56

Section II. Prevention Maintenance Checks


and Services (PMCS) ............................. 2-61
2-7 General ................................................... 2-61
2-8 Table Arrangement ................................ 2-61
2-9 Use of Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Services .............................. 2-61
2-10 General Maintenance Procedures .......... 2-62
2-11 Fluid Leakage......................................... 2-63
2-12 Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Service Tables .................... 2-64

Section III. Operation Under Normal Conditions ... 2-170


2-13 MK48 Operation .................................. 2-170
2-14 Operation of Vehicle Lights................. 2-192
2-15 Power Unit and Trailer Separation ...... 2-196
2-16 MK15 Crane Operation........................ 2-213
2-17 MK15A1 Material Handling (MHC)
Crane Operation ................................... 2-248

ii
TM 08780B-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page

2-18 MK15/15A1 A-Frame Lift and Tow


Operations…………………………… 2-273
2-19 Lift Towing the 7-Ton Truck by the
LVS Wrecker ....................................... 2-382
2-19.1 Lift Towing the LVSR MKR 18 by the
LVS Wrecker .................................... 2-395.1
2-20 MK15/MK15A1 Winch Operation ...... 2-427
2-21 MK15 Auxiliary Hydraulics for
Tool Usage ........................................... 2-448
2-22 MK15 Auxiliary Hydraulics for
Additional Crane Usage ....................... 2-458
2-23 MK16/MK16A1 Fifth Wheel
Operation.............................................. 2-468
2-24 MK16 Winch Operation ...................... 2-478
2-25 MK17 Crane Operation........................ 2-485
2-26 MK17A1 Material Handling (MHC)
Crane Operation ................................... 2-516
2-27 MK17/17A1 Cargo Side Panel
Operation.............................................. 2-541
2-28 MK17/17A1 Cargo Cover Kit ............. 2-550
2-29 ISO/ANSI Container Loading
Procedures ............................................ 2-568
2-30 Cargo Tie Down Rings and Ratchet
Straps.................................................... 2-582
2-31 Run Flat and Sand Tire Kits................. 2-586
2-32 Rear Body Tow Unit Operation ........... 2-588
2-33 Extended and Standard Pintle
Operation.............................................. 2-599
2-34 Machine Gun Platform and Hatch
Operation.............................................. 2-608
2-35 M870/M870A1 Trailer Kit Operation . 2-613

Section IV. Operation Under Unusual Conditions.. 2-615


2-36 Introduction .......................................... 2-615
2-37 Operating In Extreme Cold Weather ... 2-615

Change 1 iii
TM 08780B-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page

2-38 Operating In Hot Weather .................... 2-618


2-39 Operating In Rough Or Unusual
Terrain .................................................. 2-621
2-40 Fording Operations .............................. 2-626
2-41 Emergency Operating Procedures…… 2-628
2-42 Front Flat Towing Procedures ............. 2-642
2-43 Flat Towing the 7-Ton Truck by
the LVS ................................................ 2-663

CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Lubrication Instructions ........................... 3-1


3-1 Lubrication ............................................... 3-1

Section II. Troubleshooting Procedures .................... 3-1


3-2 Introduction .............................................. 3-1

Section III. Maintenance Procedures ........................ 3-38


3-3 Introduction ............................................ 3-38
3-4 Tire Inflation .......................................... 3-38
3-5 Draining Air Reservoirs ......................... 3-45
3-6 Cleaning the Vehicle .............................. 3-46
3-7 Purging Air From Hydraulic Jack .......... 3-47
3-8 Changing Wheel and Tire Assembly ..... 3-48
3-9 Fuel Tank Strainer Service..................... 3-63
3-10 Battery Service ....................................... 3-65
3-11 Battery Service (MK48A1 Series
Vehicles Only) ....................................... 3-69
3-12 Fifth Wheel and Fifth Wheel Ramp
Service.................................................... 3-73

Appendix A References ........................................................... A-1


Appendix B Components of End Item and Basic Issue
Lists ......................................................................B-1
Appendix C Additional Authorization List ..............................C-1
Appendix D Expendable/Durable Supplies List ...................... D-1

iv
TM 08780B-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page

Appendix E Stowage and Sign Guide ...................................... E-1


Index .................................................................... INDEX-1

v
TM 08780B-10

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

1-1 Differnce Between Models ................................ 1-14


1-2 Performance Data............................................... 1-15
1-3 Vehicle Dimensions ........................................... 1-16
1-4 Chassis Dimensions ........................................... 1-16
1-5 Curb Weight ....................................................... 1-17
1-6 Maximum Payload ............................................. 1-17
1-7 Shipping Dimensions ......................................... 1-18
1-8 Capacities ........................................................... 1-19
1-9 Specifications ..................................................... 1-20
1-10 Specifications ..................................................... 1-23
1-11 Specifications ..................................................... 1-24
1-12 Specifications ..................................................... 1-26
1-13 Specifications ..................................................... 1-28

2-1 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance


Checks and Services (All Vehicles) ................... 2-66
2-2 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance
Checks and Services (MK15 Wrecker/
Recovery) ......................................................... 2-118
2-3 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance
Checks and Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/
Recovery) ......................................................... 2-127
2-4 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance
Checks and Services (M16 Fifty Wheel
Semi Trailer Adapter) ...................................... 2-140
2-5 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance
Checks and Services (MK17 Dropside
Cargo w/Crane) ................................................ 2-148
2-6 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance
Checks and Services MK17A1 Dropside
Cargo w/Crane ................................................. 2-155
2-7 Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Services (Special Purpose Kits) ... 2-167
2-8 Transmission Shift Ranges .............................. 2-181
2-9 LVS GPM Flow Ranges .................................. 2-420

vi
TM 08780B-10

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

2-10 LVS ISO/ANSI Container Load


Combinations ................................................... 2-539
3-1 System Index ........................................................ 3-1
3-2 Troubleshooting ................................................... 3-3
3-3 Unsafe Inflation Pressures ................................. 3-41
3-4 Unsafe Inflation Pressures ................................. 3-57

vii
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

CARBON MONOXIDE (EXHAUST GAS) CAN KILL YOU.


Carbon monoxide is without color and smell, but it can kill you.
Breathing air with carbon monoxide produces symptoms of
headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control, a sleepy feeling, and
coma. Brain damage or death can result from heavy exposure.
Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of fuel-burning heaters
and internal combustion engines. Carbon monoxide can become
dangerously concentrated under conditions of no ventilation.
Precautions must be followed to insure crew safety when the
personnel heater or engine of any vehicle is operated for any
purpose.

1. DO NOT operate personnel heater or engine of vehicle in a


closed place without proper ventilation.

2. DO NOT drive any vehicle with inspection plates, cover


plates, or engine compartment covers removed unless necessary
for maintenance purposes.

3. BE ALERT at all times during vehicle operation for


exhaust odors and exposure symptoms. If either are present,
IMMEDIATELY VENTILATE personnel compartments. If
symptoms persist, remove affected crew to fresh air and keep
warm. DO NOT PERMIT PHYSICAL EXERCISE. If necessary,
give artificial respiration and get immediate medical attention.

THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST CARBON MONOXIDE


POISONING IS GOOD VENTILATION

WARNING
Front and rear frames pivot. Stay clear of tires and center hinge
area while engine is running.

viii
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY

The following is a list of warnings that appear in this manual. LVS


operators must become familiar with all warnings. Severe injury
and death can be avoided by operator's who understand the vehicle
and are alert to possible dangers.

Failure to use seatbelt can result in serious injury in case of


accident. Always use your seatbelt when operating this vehicle.

The operator should never leave the cab without applying the
parking brake. Vehicle could roll away, causing serious personal
injury or damage to the vehicle.

All personnel must stand clear of vehicle, particularly the


articulation joint area located between the front power unit and rear
trailer, when an engine start is attempted. The operator should
visually check to see that all areas of vehicle are clear of personnel
before attempting to start engine. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.

Never use parking brake for normal braking. The wheels will lock
up, causing a severe skid. This could result in serious personal
injury, death of personnel, and/or extensive equipment damage.

Do not place tools or other solid objects under the driver's seat or
on the floor at driver's feet. Keep the area clean. Such items can
roll underneath the brake pedal, preventing brake application and
serious personal injury in case of accident.

Avoid quick, jerking, winch operation. Keep personnel well away


from vehicles involved in winching operations. A snapped cable
or shifting load can cause serious personal injury.

Do not hold onto the winch cable if tension is required to guide the
cable back on the spool, the assistant will hold the clevis, not the
cable. Neither the operator nor assistant should stand within arms
length of the spool when the cable is being retrieved.

ix
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Cable can become frayed or contain broken wires. Wear heavy


leather-palmed gloves when handling cable. Never let moving
cable slide through hands, even when wearing gloves. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel.

If operating crane under power lines, do not allow vehicle to touch


high voltage connections. Death on contact may result.

Remove rings, bracelets, wristwatches, and neck chains before


working around the vehicle or other vehicles. Jewelry can catch on
equipment and cause injury, or may short across an electrical
circuit and cause severe burns or electrical shock.

Starting fluid is toxic and flammable. Do not store in cab and do


not breathe fumes. Do not puncture or burn containers. Dispose of
container properly. Serious injury could result.

Fuel is flammable and can explode. To avoid serious injury or


death, keep fuel away from open fire and keep fire extinguisher
within easy reach when working with fuel. Do not work on fuel
system when engine is hot. Fuel can be ignited by hot engine.
Smoking is prohibited while working with fuel.

During vehicle operation, exhaust pipe and muffler can become


very hot. Be careful not to touch these parts with any part of your
body. Exhaust system parts can become hot enough to cause
serious burns.

Do not reach into radiator fan area with engine running. The fan is
thermostatically controlled and may engage without warning
causing serious injuries.

Cooling system components become hot during operation. To


avoid personal injury, do not service cooling system components
until cooling system has cooled down.

x
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in


two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate
cap counterclockwise to its first stop. Pause, and let pressure
escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap counterclockwise
until you can remove it. Failure to follow this procedure can result
in serious burns.

Always remove negative battery ground cables first and install


them last to avoid sparks that can cause an explosion. Failure to
follow this precaution may result in serious injury to you and other
personnel.

Be careful not to short out battery terminals. Do not smoke or use


open flame near batteries. Batteries may explode from a spark.
Battery acid is harmful to skin and eyes.

Transporting, handling, and loading of any explosives and/or


hazardous material must be done in accordance with local, state,
and federal regulations. Motor vehicle operator's responsibilities
are provided in the Motor Vehicle Drivers Handbook for
Ammunition, Explosives, and Hazardous Material NAVSEA
SWO-20-AF-ABK-010.

Do not operate hydraulic tools near electrical power sources or


electric power lines. Contact or near contact with electrical power
sources or electric power lines could cause serious injury or death
by electrocution.

When it is necessary to lift and tow a disabled vehicle, certain


precautions and procedures must be followed to prevent damage to
the vehicle or components. Failure to use standard towing
precautionary measures while lifting and towing a disabled vehicle
could result in an unsafe operating condition.

Do not attempt to move vehicle with selector valve in the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Steering will not work.

xi
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Coupling a disabled vehicle for lifting and towing requires an


experienced operator and ground guide. Operator must back in
slowly, using extreme care. Full attention must be paid to the
ground guide. Operator and ground guide must both agree on and
understand two hand signals - one that means BACK UP
SLOWLY and one that means STOP.

Before decoupling the rear module, lower landing leg on rear


crossmember.

Do not handle winch cable unless necessary and never with bare
hands. Always wear leather gloves when handling cables. Never
allow cable to run through hands. Broken wires can cause injuries.

Do not operate winch with less than five coils of cable. Cable
clamp will not hold under direct strain.

Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable and load during
winching operation. A snapped cable or shifting load can be
extremely dangerous.

Do not adjust seat while vehicle is moving. The seat suspension


mechanism can cause serious injury to personnel if hands are
placed into it during adjustment procedure.

Hearing protection is required when firing machine gun.

Do not wear watches or other jewelry when servicing batteries


which could short out battery terminals. Do not smoke or use open
flame around batteries. Batteries may explode from a spark.
Battery acid is harmful to skin and eyes.

Increased effort will be required to turn steering wheel if there is a


failure of hydraulic steering system or the engine stops running.
Stop vehicle as soon as road conditions permit. Operating the
vehicle with impaired steering could result in serious injury or
death.

xii
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Ensure area is clear on both sides of vehicle before extending


outrigger beams and jacks. Failure to comply may result in injury
to personnel or damage to equipment.

Keep hands and feet clear of outriggers during operation. Failure


to comply may result in injury to personnel.

The engine during operation will create blowing dust. Eye


protection must be worn while operating crane controls. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel.

Keep boom clear of all electrical lines and other obstacles while
operating crane. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.

The crane must be operated with remote control if operator is not


able to keep load in sight at all times during operation. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel.

Ensure that area is clear of personnel before rotating boom. Boom


must be rotated slowly enough so operator has complete control of
load. If operator cannot see load during operation, operate crane
with remote control. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.

Operator must keep control of load at all times. Attach guide lines
to load as required. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel.

Ensure that hook latch is closed and safety pin is installed before
attempting to raise load. A hook latch that is not closed and locked
in position could allow load to become disengaged from hook,
allowing load to fall. Injury or death could result.

xiii
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Use extreme care when attempting to raise load with a damaged


hook latch or safety pin. Have Organizational Maintenance repair
damaged parts as soon as mission is completed.

Ensure there are at least two wraps of cable on hoist drum at all
times. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.

Do not disconnect cable from stowage ring until boom is raised to


a 45-degree angle. Hook assembly could fall. Failure to comply
may result in injury to personnel.

Use this procedure only in the event of an event of an extreme


emergency. Using the MANUAL OVERRIDE switch to operate
the MHC defeats the overload shutdown circuits and allows the
MHC to exceed the rated capacity. Failure to comply may result in
injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.

While changing tires or while performing tire maintenance, stay


out of the trajectory as shown by the area indicated. Failure to
follow proper procedures may result in injury or death to
personnel.

Under some circumstances, the trajectory may deviate from its


expected path. Failure to follow proper procedures may result in
injury or death to personnel.

If the tire is under inflated or over inflated, or there is obvious or


suspected damage on the tire or wheel components, the tire must
be completely deflated (TM 08780B-20). To deflate the tire,
remove the valve core from the valve stem and stand out of the
trajectory area before the wheel is removed from the vehicle or
personal injury may result.

xiv
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Never inflate a tire without checking to ensure that the flange and
lock ring are still properly seated and the lock ring is properly
seated in the lock ring groove. Ensure that the flange, lock ring
and lock ring groove are not damaged. The lock ring and flange
may blow off during inflation/deflation resulting in serious injury
or death to personnel.

Failure to comply with these procedures may result in faulty


positioning of the tire and/or rim parts, and cause the assembly to
burst with explosive force, sufficient to cause serious physical
injury or death.

When inflating tires mounted on the vehicle, all personnel must


remain out of the trajectory of the lock ring and flange, as shown
by the areas indicated. Failure to follow proper procedures may
result in serious injury or death to personnel.

If tire is under inflated or over inflated, or there is obvious or


suspected damage on the tire or wheel components, the tire must
be completely deflated by removing the valve core from the valve
stem and stand out of the trajectory area or personal injury or death
may result.

Before checking tire pressure, perform steps (1 thru 4.2) to check


tire pressure properly, or pressure readings will be inaccurate and
injury or death may result.

If the tire has been driven under inflated or over inflated, or there is
obvious or suspected damage on the tire or wheel components, the
tire must be completely deflated. To deflate the tire, remove the
valve core from the valve stem and stand out of the trajectory area
or personal injury or death may result.

When returning axle to ground, ensure personnel are out of the


trajectory as shown by the area indicated. Failure to comply may
result in serious injury or death to personnel.

xv
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Lead-acid batteries contain sulfuric acid which can cause severe


burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing. Wear safety
goggles and gloves. If battery electrolyte is spilled, take
immediate action to stop its corrosive (burning) effects.

When inspecting battery, never smoke or expose battery to sparks


or flames. The gas mixture in each cell of the battery, which
escapes through holes in the vent plugs, can ignite causing an
internal explosion of battery.

When working around batteries, ALWAYS wear eye protection


(face shield), acid resistant rubber apron, and gloves.

When servicing batteries, do not wear watches, rings, or other


jewelry.

Whenever disconnecting battery cables, always disconnect


GROUND terminal first. When reconnecting, always connect
GROUND cables last.

Cribbage and/or blockage should not be used under the outrigger


pads to prevent sinking into the soil. Failure of such devices could
result in serious injury or death.

Crane operations have inherent hazards that cannot be


mechanically safeguarded. Operator and assisting personnel are
required to wear hard hats and safety shoes.

To avoid being crushed, stay clear of stabilizers while in operation.

To avoid personal injury, stay clear of stabilizer when pulling


towards rear of vehicle.

Lift and tow operations must always be conducted at a speed


which the operator determines to be safe under existing conditions.
In no event should the operator exceed 15 mph (24 kph) when
lifting and towing a disabled vehicle.

xvi
TM 08780B-10

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

If the tire has been run flat, or is over or under inflated when tire
pressure measured and operating terrain is compared to Table 3-3,
or if wheel/tire assembly has obvious or suspected damage, it is not
safe to adjust tire pressure. Completely deflate the tire and remove
the tire from the axle. Failure to follow these procedures may
result in serious personal injury or death.

Never mount or use damaged tires or rims.

Speed limits posted on curves reflect speeds that are considered


safe for automobiles. Heavy trucks with a high center of gravity
can roll over at these speed limits. Use caution and reduce your
speed below the posted limit before entering a curve. Failure to
comply may result in vehicle crash and injury to personnel.

xvii
TM 08780B-10

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This single volume manual is divided into CHAPTERS,


SECTIONS, and PARAGRAPHS. For a specific Chapter, Section,
or Paragraph, refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS (page III).

The TABLE OF CONTENTS lists the titles of each Chapter,


Section, and Paragraph and the page number where they can be
found. The TABLE OF CONTENTS also lists the Appendices and
Index for this manual.

CHAPTER 1 introduces and describes the Logistics Vehicle


System (LVS) giving General Information, Equipment
Description, and Technical Principles of Operation.

CHAPTER 2 provides Operation Instructions for the LVS in the


following sections:

• Description and Use of Operator's Controls, Indicators, and


Features
• Operation Under Normal Conditions
• Operation Under Unusual Conditions

CHAPTER 3 provides Maintenance Instructions for the LVS in the


following sections:

• Lubrication Instructions
• Troubleshooting Procedures
• Maintenance Procedures

A feature of the Troubleshooting Procedures Section is the


SYMPTOM INDEX. This index provides an easy way to find the
troubleshooting procedure needed by looking up the symptom.

APPENDICES are located at the back of this manual to provide


information on equipment, tools, and supplies needed to keep the
LVS fully operational.

xviii
TM 08780B-10

Before operating any part of the LVS, ALWAYS do the following:

• Read and follow all WARNINGS inside the front cover.

• Read the Equipment Description and Technical Principles


of Operation located in Chapter 1.

• Read completely through the Operating Instructions to


familiarize yourself with the equipment before using it.

xix/(xx blank)
TM 08780B-10

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Section I. General Information

1-1. SCOPE. This technical manual contains instruction for


operation and operator-performed maintenance of the all-wheel
drive (8 x 8) Logistic Vehicle System (LVS) series. The LVS
series consists of four different models. They are as follows: the
MK48/14/MK48A1/14A1 Container Hauler, the MK48/15/
MK48A1/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery, the MK48/16/MK48A1/16A1
Fifth Wheel and the MK48/17/MK48A1/17A1 Dropside Cargo
with crane. All models are built on the same chassis, but are
specially equipped to perform different missions. Your manual
also includes operator instructions for special purpose kits that may
be installed on your vehicle.

1-2. MAINTENANCE FORMS AND RECORDS.


Instructions contained in TM 4700-15/1 (Equipment Record
Procedures) will be used for preparation, use and disposition of
required forms and records associated with operation and
maintenance of Marine Corps equipment.

1-3. REPORT OF MAINTENANCE AND


UNSATISFACTORY EQUIPMENT (QDR's). Report of
Maintenance and unsatisfactory equipment shall be reported on
standard form SF 368 in accordance with MCO 4855.10. Submit
to:
Commanding General
Marine Corps Logistics Base
Code 856
Albany, GA 317045000

1-4. WARRANTY INFORMATION. The LVS Series


vehicles are warranted for 15 months or 15,000 miles (24135 km),
whichever comes first. The warranty starts on the date found in
block 23, DA Form 2408-9, in the logbook. Report all defects in

1-1
TM 08780B-10

material or workmanship to your NCOIC who will take


appropriate action through your Organizational Maintenance Shop.

1-5. REFERENCE INFORMATION. This includes the


nomenclature cross reference list, a list of abbreviations and an
explanation of terms (glossary) used in this manual.

a. Nomenclature Cross Reference List

NAME OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE


Engine Coolant Antifreeze, ethlyene glycol mixture
Cold Start System Ether quick-start system
Jacobs Brake Engine retarder
Glad Hand Quick disconnect coupling

b. Abbreviations

BII Basic Issue Items


C Celsius
CID Cubic Inch Displacement
cm centimeters
F Fahrenheit
ft foot
GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating
GPM Gallons Per Minute
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating -
HMMWV High Mobility Multi-Purpose Wheeled
Vehicle
hp horsepower
ISO/ANSI International Standards Organization/
American National Standards Institute
kg kilogram
km kilometers
kPa kilopascals
kph kilometer per hour
L liter
LVS Logistic Vehicle System
m meter
MHC Material Handling Crane

1-2
TM 08780B-10

mt milliton
MTVR Medium Tactical Vehicle Replacement
mm millimeter
MPH Miles Per Hour
N•m Newton meter
PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and
Services
psi pounds per square inch
QDR Quality Deficiency Report
rpm revolutions per minute
STE/ICE Simplified Test Equipment for Internal
Combustion Engines
VDC Volts Direct Current

Section II. Equipment Description

1-6. GENERAL DESCRIPTION. The Logistic Vehicle


System (LVS) series trucks are tactical vehicles designed for on
and off road use. The series consists of four vehicles, each of
which has a front power unit (MK48) and a rear trailer. Below is a
general description of the power unit and each trailer.

• The MK48/MK48A1 Front Power Unit, 4 X 4 contains the


entire power train components and is the primary source of
power for the four trailers.

• The MK14/MK14A1 Trailer, Container Hauler, is a flat


bed 4 X 4 powered trailer used for carrying standardized
cargo containers.

• The MK15/MK15A1 Trailer is a Wrecker/Recovery 4 X 4,


powered, fully equipped wrecker for recovery of disabled
vehicles and material handling.

• The MK16/MK16A1 Trailer, Fifth Wheel, Semi-trailer


Adapter, is a 4 X 4, powered, Fifth Wheel unit for transport
of semi-trailers and towed-type military trailers.

1-3
TM 08780B-10

• The MK17/MK17A1 Trailer, Dropside Cargo W/Crane, is


a 4 X4, powered, flat bed trailer with crane for hauling
palletized cargo.

The complete vehicle consists of the Front Power Unit


(MK48/MK48A1) coupled to any one of the four trailers
(MK14/MK14A1, MK15/MK15A1, MK16/MK16A1 and
MK17/MK17A1). When coupled, the complete unit is an 8 X 8
powered drive vehicle.

1-7. MK48/48A1/14/14A1 CONTAINER HAULER


VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/14/14A1 Container


Hauler's primary mission is to transport ISO/ANSI (International
Standards Organizational/American National Standards Institute)
containers, standardized cargo, shelters and functional modules
from beach sites to unit supply points.

b. Capabilities. The MK48/48A1/14/14A1 is capable


of:

(1) Operating in temperatures from -25° F to


+125° F (-32° C to +52° C).

(2) Fording water up to 60 inches (152.4 cm)


deep.

(3) Climbing and descending 60% grades with a


gross vehicle weight of 64,000 pounds (29,056 kg).

(4) Operating on 30% side slopes and parking


on 20% grades.

(5) Articulation and roll between front power


unit and trailer, enabling vehicle to maintain ground contact with
all eight wheels even on rough terrain.

1-4
TM 08780B-10

MK48/14

(6) Pulling an additional MK14/14A1,


MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1, using a rear body tow
unit.

(7) Operating for maximum range of 300 miles


(482.7 km). This depends on vehicle load, type of terrain, idling
time and fuel quantity.

(8) Being airlifted by CH53E helicopter, or


transported by C-141 or C-5A type aircraft with minimal
preparation.

(9) Being transported by highway, rail, or sea.


The MK48/48A1 and the MK14/14A1 can be separated into two
units, for ease of handling.

(10) Turning within a radius of 38.5 feet (11.7 m).

(11) Carrying a payload of 12.5 tons (11.337 mt)


off road and 22.5 tons (20,407 kg) on road.

c. Features

(1) The MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit can


separate from the MK14/14A1 trailer or couple with any of the
other three trailers (MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1).

1-5
TM 08780B-10

(2) Incorporated within the MK48/48A1


electrical system is a test connector that allows use of test
(STE/ICE) equipment. This helps maintenance personnel find
problems within the engine, electrical system, or hydraulic system.

(3) The MK48/48A1 has a hand priming pump


that allows repriming of the fuel system after it has run dry.

(4) The MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit has the


ability to turn while the trailer remains still, through the use of two
yaw steering cylinders.

(5) The MK48/48A1/14/14A1 has a steel, 20


foot (6.1 m) bed with standard ANSI/ISO container locks and
fittings.

1-8. MK48/48A1/15/15A1 WRECKER/RECOVERY


VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Wrecker


Recovery Vehicle is primarily used for recovery of all LVS
vehicles. It is also capable of lifting and towing the following
vehicles: M809, M929, MTRV, M35, M36, M49, M50, and
HMMWV.

Lifting of the vehicles is accomplished by an A-Frame attached to


the rear of the vehicle. A heavy duty rear winch enables the
wrecker to free mired vehicles. The wrecker is equipped with a
Material Handling Crane (MHC), used for removing power packs,
loading equipment and standardized containers. An auxiliary
hydraulic circuit on the vehicle provides power for tools and can
also be used to supply another trailer (MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1,
or MK17/17A1) with hydraulics.

b. Capabilities. The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 is capable


of:

(1) Operating in temperatures from -25° F to


+125° F (-32° C to +52° C).

1-6
TM 08780B-10

(2) Fording water up to 60 inches (152.4 cm)


deep.

(3) Climbing and descending 60% grades with a


gross vehicle weight of 64,000 pounds (29,056 kg).

MK48/15

(4) Operating on 30% side slopes and parking


on 20% grades.

(5) Articulation and roll between front power


unit and trailer, enabling the vehicle to maintain ground contact
with all eight wheels even on rough terrain.

(6) Pulling and additional MK14/14A1,


MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1, using a rear body tow
unit.

(7) Operating for maximum range of 300 miles


(482.7 km). This depends on vehicle load, type of terrain, idling
time and fuel quantity.

(8) Turning within a radius of 38.5 feet


(11.7 m).

(9) Carrying a payload of 10 tons (9.07 mt).

1-7
TM 08780B-10

(10) Raising and towing an LVS vehicle or an


MTVR.

(11) Lifting 9,000 pounds (4,086 kg) with the


crane fully extended 15 feet (4.6 m).

(12) Lifting 9,000 pounds (4,086 kg) with the


crane extended 15 feet (4.6 m) (LVSA1 series vehicles only).

(13) Pulling 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg) with its


rear winch.

c. Features

(1) Incorporated within the MK48/48A1


electrical system is a test connector that allows use of test
(STE/ICE) equipment.

(2) The MK48/48A1 has a hand priming pump


that allows repriming of fuel system after it has run dry.

(3) The MK48/48A1 has the ability to turn the


front power unit while the trailer remains still, through the use of
two yaw steering cylinders.

(4) The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 has a 7 foot (2.13


m) cargo bed with standard ISO/ANSI container lock fittings and
front and rear stowage areas.

(5) The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 has a remote


control unit that allows operation of the crane, A-Frame and winch
from a distance.

(6) The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 has an auxiliary


hydraulic circuit with 50 feet (15.25 m) of hose, on a reel, for
operation of power tools and for supply of hydraulics on other
trailers.

1-8
TM 08780B-10

1-9. MK48/48A1/16/16A1 FIFTH WHEEL SEMI-


TRAILER ADAPTER VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Fifth Wheel is


used to transport semi-trailers with 3.5 (8.89 cm) diameter
kingpins. Its primary mission is to transport the M870A1,
M870A2, and M870A2E1 trailers. It can also transport towed type
full trailers like the M105 and M353. The winch may also be used
for recovery of other vehicles.

MK48/16

b. Capabilities. The MK4848A1/16/16A1 is capable


of:

(1) Operating in temperatures from -25° F to


+125° F (-32° C +15° C).

(2) Fording water up to 60 inches (152.4 cm)


deep.

(3) Climbing and descending 60% grades.

(4) Operating on 30% side slopes and parking


on 20% grades.

(5) Articulation and roll between the front


power unit and its trailer, enabling the vehicle to maintain ground
contact with all eight wheels even on rough terrain.

1-9
TM 08780B-10

(6) Pulling an additional MK14/14A1,


MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1, using a rear body tow
unit.

(7) Operating for a maximum range of 300


miles (482.7 km). This depends on vehicle load, type of terrain,
idling time and fuel quantity.

(8) Being airlifted by CH53E helicopter, or


transported by C-141 or C-5A type aircraft with minimal
preparation.

(9) Being transported by highway, rail, or sea.


The MK48/48A1 and MK16/16A1 can be separated into two units,
for ease of handling.

(10) Turning within a radius of 32.5 feet (9.9 m).

(11) Loading 46,000 pounds (20,884 kg) on the


fifth wheel.

(12) Pulling 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg) with its


winch.

c. Features

(1) The MK48/48A1 front power unit can


separate from the MK16/16A1 trailer or couple with any of the
other three trailers (MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1, or MK17/17A1).

(2) Incorporated within the MK48/48A1


electrical system is a test connector that allows use of test
(STE/ICE) equipment. This helps maintenance personnel find
problems within the engine, electrical system, or hydraulic system.

(3) The MK48/48A1 has a hand priming pump


that allows repriming of the fuel system after it has run dry.

1-10
TM 08780B-10

(4) The MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit has the


ability to turn while the trailer remains still, though the use of two
yaw steering cylinders.

(5) The MK48/48A1/16/16A1 has a remote


control unit for the operation of the winch.

(6) The MK48/48A1/16/16A1 has a fully


oscillating fifth wheel that can be adjusted for on and off road use.

1-10. MK48/48A1/17/17A1 DROP SIDE CARGO W/CRANE


VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Drop Side


Cargo W/Crane is used to transport palletized cargo and ISO/ANSI
(International Standards Organization/American National
Standards Institute) containers. The side panels of the cargo bed
can be dropped down or removed to ease ON and OFF loading.
The side panels also provide seating for troops. A Material
Handling Crane (MHC) at the rear of the vehicle is used to load
and unload equipment and cargo. The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 is
also intended to tow and position the M198 howitzer.

MK48/17

1-11
TM 08780B-10

b. Capabilities. The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 is capable


of:

(1) Operating in temperatures from -25° F to


+125° F (-32° Cto +52° C).

(2) Fording water up to 60 inches (152.4 cm)


deep.

(3) Climbing and descending 60% grades with a


gross vehicle weight of 64,000 pounds (29,056 kg).

(4) Operating on 30% side slopes and parking


on 20% grades.

(5) Articulation and roll between front power


and trailer, enabling the vehicle to maintain ground contact with all
eight wheels even on rough terrain.

(6) Pulling an additional MK14/14A1,


MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1 using a rear body tow
unit.

(7) Operating for maximum range of 300 miles


(482.7 km). This depends on vehicle load, type of terrain, idling
time and fuel quantity.

(8) Turning within a radius of 38.5 feet (11.7


m).

(9) Carrying a payload of 10 tons (9.07 mt) off


road and 20 tons (20.14 mt) on road.

(10) Lifting 9,000 pounds (4,086 kg) with the


crane fully extended 15 feet (4.6 m).

(11) Lifting 9,000 pounds (4,086 kg) with the crane


extended 15 feet (4.6 m) (LVSA1 series vehicles only).

1-12
TM 08780B-10

c. Features

(1) The MK48/48A1 front power unit can


separate from the MK17/17A1 trailer and couple with any of the
other three trailers (MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1 and MK16/16A1).

(2) Incorporated with the MK48/48A1 electrical


system is a test connector that allows use of test (STE/ICE)
equipment.

(3) The MK48/48A1 has a hand priming pump


that allows the fuel system to be reprimed after it has run dry.

(4) The MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit has the


ability to turn while the trailer remains still, through the use of two
yaw steering cylinders.

(5) The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 has a remote


control unit that allows operation of the crane from a distance.

(6) The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 has dropside


cargo panels that ease loading and unloading and provide seating
for troops.

(7) The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 has a 16 foot


(4.88 m) cargo bed with standard ISO/ANSI container lock
fittings.

1-13
TM 08780B-10

1-11. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS. The major


equipment and functional differences between models are given in
Table 1-1. For components of the end item and basic issue items
(1311), refer to Appendix B.

Table 1-1. Differences Between Models

Description or
Equipment/ MK48/ MK48/ MK48/ MK48/ Operational
Function 48A1/ 48A1/ 48A1/ 48A1/ Paragraph
14/14A1 15/15A1 16/16A1 17/17A1
Material handling X X 2-16/2-25
crane (MHC)
Material handling X X 2-17/2-26
crane (MHC)
(LVSA1 Series
Vehicles Only)
Heavy duty winch X X 2-20/2-24
Fifth wheel X 2-23
Remote controls X X X 2-16/2-21/2-25
Remote X X 2-17/2-26
controls(MK15A1
and MK17A1
only)
ISO/ANSI X X X 2-29
container
Rear landing leg X 2-15
Cargo body X 2-27
dropside panels
Fold-down troop X 2-27
seats
Cargo bed size:
238 inch X 2-29
(604.5 cm)
120 inch X 2-29
(304.8 cm)
190 inch X 2-29
(482.6 cm)
Cargo cover X 2-28
Extended Pintle X 2-33
Auxiliary X 2-21/2-22
Hydraulics

1-14
TM 08780B-10

1-12. EQUIPMENT DATA. Tables 1-2 through 1-13 list data


and specifications for all LVS models.

Table 1-2. Performance Data


UNIT CAPABILITIES
ALL

ALL FORDING UP
TO 60"

ALL 45°
APPROACH
ANGLE

MK48/ 45°
48A1/ DEPARTURE
14/14A1 ANGLE

MK48/ 48°
48A1/ DEPARTURE
15/15A1 ANGLE

MK48/ 48°
48A1/ DEPARTURE
16/16A1 ANGLE

MK48/ 40°
48A1/ DEPARTURE
17/17A1 ANGLE

1-15
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-3. Vehicle Dimensions

LENGTH HEIGHT
UNIT
Inches cm Inches cm
MK48 238.5 605.7 102 259
MK48A1 238.3 605.7 102.3 259
MK14 240 609.6 61 154.9
MK14A1 240 609.6 61.2 154.9
MK15 240 609.6 94 243.8
MK15A1 240 609.6 100.9 256.3
MK16 198 503 87 220.9
MK16A1 198 503 87 220.9
MK17 240 609.6 96 256
MK17A1 243.4 618.2 96.8 256
MK48/14 456 1158.2 102 259
MK48/14A1 456 1158.2 102.3 259
MK48/15 444 1127.8 102 259
MK48/15A1 444.5 1127.8 102.3 259
MK48/16 398 1010.9 102 259
MK48/16A1 398.2 1010.9 102.3 259
MK48/17 456 1158.2 102 259
MK48/17A1 459.6 1158.2 102.3 259
Width (All Units) .............................................96 Inches (243.8 cm)

Ground Clearance (All Units) ............................23 Inches (58.4 cm)

Table 1-4. Chassis Dimensions

ANGLE OF ANGLE OF TURNING


UNIT WHEELBASE APPROACH DEPARTURE RADIUS
MK14 259 Inches 45° 46° 38.5 feet
MK14A1 (657.9 cm) (11.7 m)
MK15 259 Inches 45° 48° 38.5 feet
MK15A1 (657.9 cm) (11.7 m)
MK16 229 Inches 45° 67° 32.5 feet
MK16A1 (581.7 cm) (9.9 m)
MK17 259 Inches 45° 40° 38.5 feet
MK17A1 (657.9 cm) (11.7 m)

1-16
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-5. Curb Weight

UNIT WEIGHT
MK48 25,300 lbs d(11,486.2 kg)
MK48A1
MK14 16,000 lbs (7,264.0 kg)
MK14A1
MK15 28,200 lbs (12, 791.3 kg)
MK15A1
MK16
16,200 lbs (7,354.8 kg)
MK16A1
MK17 22,360 lbs (10,142.3 kg)
MK17A1
MK48/14 41,300 lbs (18,750.2 kg)
MK48/14A1
MK48/15 53,500 lbs (24,267.2 kg)
MK48/15A1
MK48/16 41,500 lbs (18,841.0 kg)
MK48/16A1
MK48/17 47,660 lbs (21,618.2 kg)
MK48/17A1

Table 1-6. Maximum Payload

UNIT ON ROAD OFF ROAD


MK48/14 45,000 lbs (20,430 kg) 125,000 lbs (11,350 kg)
M K48/14A1
MK48/15 20,000 lbs ( 9,080 kg) 20,000 lbs ( 9,080 kg)
MK48/15A1
MK48/16 46,000 lbs (20,884 kg)
MK48/16A1
MK48/17 39,000 lbs (04,706 kg) 20,000 lbs ( 9,080 kg)
MK48/17A1

1-17
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-7. Shipping Dimensions

UNIT SHIPPING CUBAGE SHIPPING


TONNAGE
Cubic Cubic Tons Metric
Feet Meters Tons
MK48 1352 53.6 12.5 11.3
MK48A1 1355 53.6 12.5 11.3
MK14 813 18.6 8.0 7.2
MK14A1 816 18.6 8.0 7.2
MK15 1190 35.8 13.0 11.7
MK15A1 1280 35.8 13.0 11.7
MK16 943 26.4 8.0 7.2
MK16A1 934 26.4 8.0 7.2
MK17 1253 35.8 11.0 9.9
MK17A1 1363 35.8 11.0 9.9
MK48/14 2584 72.3 20.5 18.5
MK48/14A1 2593 72.3 20.5 18.5
MK48/15 2516 72.3 25.5 23.1
MK48/15A1 2528 72.3 25.5 23.1
MK48/16 2255 63.0 20.5 18.5
MK48/16A1 2265 63.0 20.5 18.5
MK48/17 2584 72.4 23.5 21.3
MK48/17A1 2614 72.4 23.5 21.3

1-18
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-8. Capacities

VEHICLE DESCRIPTION CAPACITY


Standard Metric
All Cooling System 27 gallons 102.6 liters
All Engine (Crankcase Only) 22 quarts 21 liters
All Engine (Crankcase with Filter) 24 quarts 23 liters
All Fuel Tank (Each Tank) 75 gallons 284 liters
All Hydraulic System 95 quarts 90 liters
All Nose Box 7 pints 3.3 liters
All No. 1 Axle 33 pints 15.6 liters
All No. 2 and 4 Axles 33 pints 15.6 liters
All No. 3 Axle 40 pints 19 liters
All Transmission 36 quarts 34 liters
All Transfer Case 10 quarts 9.5 liters
MK48/15 Winch Gear Case 13 quarts 12.3 liters
MK48/16 Winch Gear Case 13 quarts 12.3 liters
All Windshield Washer 4 quarts 3.78 liters

1-19
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-9. Specifications

MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit

Engine

Make .......................................................... Detroit Diesel 8V92TA


Type ......................... Diesel, Turbocharged, Blown, Liquid cooled
Brake Horsepower ............................ 445 Horsepower at 2100 rpm
Idle Speed (engine rpm) .............................................. 690-700 rpm
Oil Pressure ............................................... 5 psi (34.4 k Pa) at idle,
....................................................... 70 psi (482.6 k Pa) at 2,100 rpm
Water Temperature ..................... 160°F to 230°F (71°C to 110°C)
Governed Speed ............................................................... 2100 rpm
Maximum Horsepower (at 2,100 rpm) ...... 445 Brake Horsepower

Electrical System

Type ...................................................... 24 Volts Negative Ground


Battery Make .................................................................... Prestolite
Battery Model ...................................................... ................... 31CS
*Battery make ...................................................... .................. Exide
*Battery Model ......................................................................... 6TL
Starter Make ................................................................ Delco Remy
Starter Model ..................................................................... 1990272
Alternator Make ........................................................ Leece Neville
Alternator Model ................................................................. 2428JC
Alternator Type .......................... Direct Drive W/Integral Regulator

Cooling System

Radiator ........................................................................ Heavy Duty


Make ............................................................ General Radiator, Inc.
*Make .............................................................. G&O Radiator, Inc.

*LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only

1-20
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-9. Specifications (Continued)

MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit

Fuel System

Fuel Tanks ..................................................... Two (One Each Side)


Capacity ......................................................................... 75 Gallons

Air Cleaner

Make ......................................................................................... Farr


Model ..................................................................................... T-528
Type ............................................................................... Two Stage

Transmission

Make ............................................................ Detroit Diesel Allison


Model ............................................................................... HT 740D
Type .................................................................. 4-Speed Automatic
Oil Temperature ......................... 160°F to 220°F (71 °C to 104°C)

Transfer Case

Make ................................................... Oshkosh Truck Corporation


Model ................................................................................... DA100
Type ................................................................................... 2-Speed
Location ........................................................ Behind Transmission

Axles

No. 1
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model ................................................................... DS-381 P
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

1-21
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-9. Specifications (Continued)

MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit

No. 2
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model ...................................................................... RS-381
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

Shock Absorbers

Make .................................................................................... Gabriel


Type ............................................................................. Heavy Duty
Quantity .................................................................................... Four

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc


Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)
Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 1 Axle
Make .................................................................... Rockwell
Type ......................................................................... Wedge

No. 2 Axle
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Type ......................................................................... S-Cam
ABS .............................................................................2S/2M

1-22
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-10. Specifications

MK14/14A1 Container Hauler Trailer

Axles

No. 3
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model .................................................................... DS-580P
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

No. 4
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model ...................................................................... RS-580
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc


Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)
Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and 4 Axles


Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Type ......................................................................... S-Cam
ABS .............................................................................2S/2M

1-23
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-11. Specifications

MK15/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery Trailer

Axles

No. 3
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model .................................................................... DS-580P
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

No. 4
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model ...................................................................... RS-580
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type ................................................. ............................. Disc


Wheel Size ................................ ............. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)
Tire Size .................................................... ............................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and No. 4 Axles


Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Type ......................................................................... S-Cam
ABS (Axle No. 4 only) ...............................................2S/2M

Body Equipment

Crane
Make ......................................................................... Wajax
Type ................................................. Hydraulic/Articulated
Rating ..................... 9,000 Lbs (4,086 Kg) At 15 Ft. (4.6m)

1-24
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-11. Specifications (Continued)

MK15/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery Trailer

Crane (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)


Make .......................................................................... Grove
Type ................................................... Hydraulic/Telescopic
Rating ..................... 9,000 Lbs (4,086 Kg) At 15 Ft. (4.6m)

Winch
Make ...................................................................... DP Mfg.
Type ................................................. Two-Speed Hydraulic
Rating ............................................ 60,000 Lbs (27,240 Kg)

A-Frame
Make ......................................................................... Wajax
Type ..................................................................... Hydraulic
Rating ............................................ 32,000 Lbs (14,528 Kg)

A-Frame (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)


Make .......................................................................... Grove
Type ..................................................................... Hydraulic
Rating ........... .................................. 32,000 Lbs (14,528 Kg)

1-25
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-12. Specifications

MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter

Axles

No. 3
Make.....................................................……………... Eaton
Model..................................................…………... DS-580P
Type ...................................……. Single Reduction Tandem

No. 4
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model ...................................................................... RS-580
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc


Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)
Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and 4 Axles


Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Type ......................................................................... S-Cam
ABS (Axle No. 4 only) ...............................................2S/2M

Fifth Wheel

Make ................................................................................... Holland


Model ....................................................................... FW-2080-0-15
Type .................................................................. Four-Way Pivoting
Size .................................................................... 36 Inch (91.44 cm)
Kingpin Size ....................................................... 3.5 Inch (8.89 cm)

1-26
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-12. Specifications (Continued)

MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter

Body Equipment

Winch
Make ...................................................................... DP Mfg.
Type ................................................. Two-Speed Hydraulic
Rating ............................................ 60,000 Lbs (27,280 Kg)

1-27
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-13. Specifications

MK17/17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane Trailer

Axles

No. 3
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model .................................................................... DS-580P
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

No. 4
Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Model ...................................................................... RS-580
Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc


Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)
Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and No. 4 Axles


Make .......................................................................... Eaton
Type ......................................................................... S-Cam
ABS (Axle No. 4 only) ...............................................2S/2M

Body Equipment

Crane
Make ......................................................................... Wajax
Type ................................................. Hydraulic/Articulated
Rating ..................... 9,000 Lbs (4,086 Kg) At 15 Ft. (4.6m)

1-28
TM 08780B-10

Table 1-13. Specifications (Continued)

MK17/17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane Trailer

Axles

Crane (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)


Make .......................................................................... Grove
Type .................................................. Hydraulic/Telescopic
Rating ..................... 9,000 Lbs (4,086 Kg) At 15 Ft. (4.6m)

Section III. Technical Principles of Operation

1-13. INTRODUCTION. All LVS vehicles include five


functional systems. They are the air system, electrical system,
hydraulic system, steering system and drive line system. This
section explains the overall operation of these systems.

1 -14. AIR SYSTEM. The air system has two purposes. The
first is to operate the vehicle's service and parking brakes and the
second is to power the air operated accessories. The system is
divided into two sections-the front cab section and the rear trailer
section. Air pressure in both sections is indicated by a pressure
gauge in the cab.

The air system consists mainly of-an engine-driven compressor


and five air stowage reservoirs. These components, in conjunction
with the necessary valves, hoses and fittings, supply regulated air
to the brakes and other air operated devices on the vehicle.

By automatically turning the compressor on or-off, an air governor


keeps pressure in the system at approximately 120 psi (827.4 kPa)
for non-ABS systems and 130PSI (896.35 kPa) for ABS equipped
vehicles. Regulated air then goes through a safety valve and an air
dryer into a small front reservoir. Pressure builds within the front
reservoir until adequate for safe operation of the brakes. A
pressure regulator in the system opens, once this level is achieved,
allowing pressurization of the six large tanks that remain. All air

1-29
TM 08780B-10

operated systems run off the six large reservoirs, unless pressure
drops to approximately 60 psi (413.7 kPa) when the brake system

takes priority, excluding other systems. A low air warning system,


consisting of a pressure switch, buzzer and warning light, sounds if
pressure drops below 60 psi (413.7 kPa). This informs the
operator that the brakes can no longer be safely operated.

1-15. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The electrical system operates


on 24 volts, negative ground. It is powered by four 12 volt
batteries connected in series-parallel circuit to produce 24 volts.
The electricity stored in the batteries is used to start the engine and
operate accessories. Once the engine is started, it drives an
alternator that produces electricity to both maintain battery voltage
and power electrical components on the vehicle.

The ignition switch has three positions (ON, OFF and START). In
the OFF position, electricity is confined to the lighting system. In
the START position, electricity is directed from the batteries
through a relay and a solenoid to the starter.

With the engine running and the ignition switch in the ON


position, the alternator generates between 27.8 and 28.2 volts of
electricity for charging the batteries and operating accessories. A
voltage regulator adjusts alternator output, making sure voltage in
the system is maintained at 24 volts.

1-30
TM 08780B-10

The system is protected against overload by automatic-reset type


circuit breakers. A diagnostic connector assembly is also
incorporated within the system to help Organizational Maintenance
diagnose problems that may develop.

1-16. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. The hydraulic system consists of


an engine-driven tandem pump, an oil reservoir, a power steering
gear, two yaw cylinders, a radiator fan motor and controlling
valves.

The reservoir holds the hydraulic oil that supplies the system. The
pump draws oil from the reservoir to provide hydraulic pressure
for operation of front axle steering, yaw cylinder steering, the
auxiliary equipment and the fan motor. The various valves within
the system control hydraulic pressure, flow and direction for the
operation of the fan motor, steering system, or auxiliary hydraulics.
The fan motor provides cooling of engine, transmission and
hydraulic oil. A hydraulic selector valve mounted on the right
fender of the front power unit is a two position (Push/Pull) valve
used by the operator to determine whether oil flow goes to
STEERING or AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS. With the selector
valve in the STEERING position, the No. 1 axle will turn and the
yaw cylinders are operational. The vehicle is driven with the
selector valve in this position. With the selector valve in the-
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position, the auxiliary equipment
(crane, winch, or power tools) receive hydraulic power. Steering
at the No. 1 axle will still work, but yaw steering is not possible.

1-31
TM 08780B-10

Without yaw steering, the vehicle's ability to turn is seriously


reduced. For this reason, the vehicle must never be driven with the
selector valve in the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

1-17. STEERING SYSTEM. When the hydraulic selector valve


is in the STEERING position, steering is accomplished through the
use of two sub-systems – yaw steering and hydraulic power-assist
steering. These systems work together to make the vehicle highly
maneuverable.

The yaw steering system is responsible for turning the front power
unit at the articulation joint. This is accomplished through the use
of two double-acting, hydraulic yaw cylinders that connect to the
front and rear bodies on each side of the articulation joint. As one
cylinder contracts, the other extends. The front power unit is then
forced to turn, whether the vehicle is rolling or not. This reduces
turning radius and allows the vehicle to navigate among obstacles
that are relatively close together.

The yaw steering system coordinates with the hydraulic, power-


assist steering wheel, the No 1 axle and the yaw steering work
together to turn the vehicle. This system maintains proper
alignment between the front and rear sections through the full
range of steering.

1-32
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
The yaw steering system will not operate with the parking brakes
applied and the transmission in neutral. If the yaw steering
system operates in this condition, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

1-18. DRIVE LINE SYSTEM. Power for the LVS vehicle


comes from a diesel engine housed in the center of the front power
unit. The power goes to an automatic transmission attached to the
back of the engine. A short propeller shaft delivers power from the
transmission to the transfer case. The transfer case then sends the
power to both the No. 1 axle of the power unit and the No. 3 axle
of the rear trailer.

A nose box mounted on the No. 1 axle receives power from the
transfer case and delivers it to the No. 1 axle. The No. 1 axle has
an inter-axle differential that sends power through a propeller shaft
to the No. 2 axle. In this way, all four wheels of the power unit are
driven.

The No. 3 axle of the trailer receives power from the transfer case
through a series of propeller shafts and universal joints. The No. 3
axle has an inter-axle differential that sends power through a
propeller shaft to the No. 4 axle. In this manner, all four wheels of
the trailer receive power.

1-33
TM 08780B-10

By using the Drive Line Lockup switch in the front power unit, the
operator can control parts of the drive line. On dry pavement, the
Drive Line Lockup is left in the UNLOCK position. This allows
the drive line to operate in a way similar to that of an ordinary
automobile. If traction is good, all drive wheels pull.

If wheel slippage is expected, either the AXLE-LOCKUP or the


XFR CASE LOCKUP position may be used.

In the AXLE-LOCKUP position, the inter-axle differentials lock


together axles No. 1 and No. 2 and axles No. 3 and 4. The
controlled traction differentials then lock together the wheels on
each axle. Unless the difference in torque between the wheels goes
beyond certain limits, they will turn at the same speed.

In the XFR CASE LOCKUP position, the transfer case differential


is locked. This provides power equally between the front power
unit and the trailer. If one section of the vehicle loses traction, the
other section will continue to pull.

1-34
TM 08780B-10

CHAPTER 2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Description and Use of Operator's


Controls, Indicators and Features

2-1. MK48 FRONT POWER UNIT

a. Instrument Panel

Key Item and Function

(1) LEFT TURN INDICATOR. Flashes green


when left turn signal is on.

(2) SPEEDOMETER/ODOMETER. Shows


vehicle's speed and total miles traveled in MPH and KM/h.

(3) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR. Lights red


when vehicle headlights are on high beam.

(4) TRAILER AIR SUPPLY VALVE.


Supplies air to additional trailers being towed behind the
MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1. PUSH
to charge brakes-PULL to release.

(5) PARKING BRAKE VALVE. Applies and


releases vehicle parking brake. PULL to apply-PUSH to release.

2-1
TM 08780B-10

(6) TACHOMETER/HOURMETER. Shows


engine operating speed (RPM) and total operating time in hours.
Includes red tipped pointers to show best RPM operating range.

(7) RIGHT TURN INDICATOR. Flashes green


when right turn signal is on.

(8) FUEL GAUGE. Shows amount of fuel in


fuel tanks.

(9) OIL PRESS GAUGE. Shows engine oil


pressure.

(10) LOW OIL/WATER INDICATOR LIGHT.


Lights red when engine oil pressure is too low or when engine
coolant temperature is too high. A buzzer will sound when the
light is on for either oil pressure or coolant temperature.

(11) BUZZER. Sounds when hydraulic oil level


is low.

2-2
TM 08780B-10

(12) AIR FILTER RESTRICTION


INDICATOR. Shows condition of air filter. Yellow indicates
clean. Red indicates filter requires service.

(13) HYDRAULIC LOW OIL INDICATOR.


Lights red if level in hydraulic reservoir is low.

(14) DRIVE LINE LOCKUP INDICATORS.


Lights green when drive line lockup control is in AXLE LOCKUP
position or TRANSFER CASE LOCKUP POSITION.

(15) DRIVE LINE LOCKUP CONTROL


LEVER. Three position lever-center is UNLOCK, left is AXLE
LOCKUP and right is TRANSFER CASE LOCKUP.

(16) COLD WEATHER START BUTTON.


Injects ether into engine for cold weather starting.

(17) ENGINE STOP SWITCH. Used to stop


engine. Returns to position when released.

2-3
TM 08780B-10

(18) ENGINE START SWITCH. Three


position-OFF, ON and START. When switch is released after
engine starts, it will return to ON position.

(19) LOW AIR INDICATOR. Lights red when


air pressure drops below 60 psi (413.7 kPa). A buzzer sounds
when light is lit.

(20) AIR PRESSURE GAUGE. Shows air


pressure in both sections of air brake system. Green shows front
section. Red shows rear section.

(21) WATER TEMP GAUGE. Shows engine


coolant temperature.

(22) BATTERY GAUGE. Shows battery


voltage.

(23) TRANS TEMP GAUGE. Shows


transmission fluid temperature.

(24) HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE


GAUGE. Indicates hydraulic oil temperature within reservoir.

b. Driver's Side Panel

Key Item and Function

(25) TRAILER HANDBRAKE CONTROL.


Applies brakes on additional trailers being towed behind the
MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1. This is
separate from LVS service brakes.

(26) JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE ON/OFF


SWITCH. Supplies or shuts off electrical power to Jacobs engine
brake.

(27) JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE INDICATOR.


Lights green when Jacobs engine brake is on.

2-4
TM 08780B-10

(28) JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE HIGH/LOW


SWITCH. Selects amount of engine braking action. HIGH
provides maximum braking. LOW position provides lesser
amount of engine braking.

(29) BEACON LIGHT SWITCH. Two position


ON/OFF switch controls amber strobe light, located on top of cab.

(30) WORK LIGHT SWITCH. Two position


ON/OFF switch controls exterior work lights.

(31) DOME LIGHT SWITCH. Two position


ON/OFF switch controls dome light.

(32) CLEARANCE LIGHT SWITCH. Two


position ON/OFF switch controls clearance lights.

2-5
TM 08780B-10

(33) DEFROST CONTROL. Controls amount of


heated air directed at windshield. PULL to increase-PUSH to
decrease.

2-6
TM 08780B-10

(34) FAN SWITCH. Three position switch


controls fan speed-HI, LOW and OFF.

(35) HEAT CONTROL. Controls amount of


heated air entering cab. PULL to increase-PUSH to decrease.

(36) MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC


DISENGAGE LIGHTS. MANUAL DISENGAGE LIGHT is on
when selector valve is in the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
position. AUTOMATIC DISENGAGE LIGHT is on when
transmission is in NEUTRAL and parking brakes are applied.

NOTE
For LVSA1 series vehicles only, the indicator will also light
orange when the articulation joint lockout strut is in place.

(37) LOCKOUT STRUT WARNING


INDICATOR. Lights orange when suspension lockout struts are in
place.

NOTE
Upon power up of ABS system, ABS warning lights should come
on for about two seconds, then turn off.

(37.1) ABS WARNING LIGHTS. Lights will


come on when there is a malfunction with the ABS system.

(38) TRANSFER CASE SHIFTER. Forward for


DIRECT (HIGH)-back for LOW.

(39) LIGHT CONTROL. Controls all electrical


power for lighting system.

(40) WASHER CONTROL. Controls spray of


cleaning fluid on windshield. Push for spray.

(41) RIGHT WIPER CONTROL. Controls


operation of right windshield wiper. PULL for ON-PUSH and
hold to shut wipers off. Turn control right to increase wiper speed.

2-7
TM 08780B-10

For LVSA1 series vehicles, turn clockwise to turn wiper ON. Turn
counterclockwise to turn wiper OFF.

(42) TRANSMISSION RANGE SELECTOR.


Used to select transmission driving range. Push button in to move
lever.

(42.1) EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUTDOWN


(LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY). Used to stop engine
manually. Pull handle to stop engine.

(43) LEFT WIPER CONTROL. Controls


operation of left windshield wiper. PULL for ON-PUSH and hold
to shut wipers off. Turn control right to increase wiper speed. For
LVSA1 series vehicles, turn clockwise to turn wiper ON. Turn
counterclockwise to turn wiper OFF.

d. Steering Column

Key Item and Function

(48) EMERGENCY FLASHER CONTROL.


Controls 4-way flashers. Position turn signal lever (50) in RIGHT
turn position. Press hazard tab down and push turn signal lever

2-8
TM 08780B-10

(50) up as far as it will go. To shut flashers off, return signal lever
(50) to OFF position.

(48.1) EMERGENCY FLASHER CONTROL


(LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY). Controls 4-way flashers.
Position turn signal lever (50.1) in RIGHT turn position. Pull
emergency flasher control (48.1) up and push signal lever (50.1) up
as far as it will go. To shut flashers off, return signal lever (50.1)
to OFF position.

(49) HORN BUTTON. Sounds electric horn


when pressed.

(50) TURN SIGNAL LEVER. Controls turn


signals for RIGHT, LEFT and OFF. Signal must be manually shut
off after turning.

2-9
TM 08780B-10

e. Floor Mounted Controls

Key Item and Function

(51) HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH.


Controls LOW and HIGH beams of headlights.

(52) THROTTLE TREADLE. Increases or


decreases engine speed.

(53) SERVICE BRAKE TREADLE. Applies


service brakes.

(54) CAB DRAIN PLUG. Provides an opening


to drain cab. One under each seat. Turn T-handle LEFT to loosen-
RIGHT to tighten.

2-10
TM 08780B-10

f. Cab Mounted Hand Controls

Key Item and Function

(55) AIR HORN CHAIN. Controls air horn.


Pull to sound air horn.

(56) DOOR LATCH. PULL to open cab door.

(57) CAB DOOR HANDLE. PULL to close cab


door.

(58) WINDOW HAND CRANK. Raises or


lowers cab door window glass.

(58.1) RIFLE MOUNTING. Holds driver or


passenger rifle during vehicle operation.

(59) ROOF VENT. Allows fresh air to enter cab.


PUSH up on bar to open and PULL down to close.

2-11
TM 08780B-10

g. Operator and Crew Seat Controls

NOTE
Controls on driver's seat and passenger seats are identical.

Key Item and Function

WARNING

DO NOT ADJUST SEAT WHILE VEHICLE IS MOVING.


THE SEAT SUSPENSION MECHANISM CAN CAUSE
SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL IF HANDS ARE
PLACED INTO IT DURING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.

(60) RIDE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL. Use to


adjust seat tension.

(61) SEAT BELT AND SHOULDER


HARNESS. Secures personnel in seat.

2-12
TM 08780B-10

(62) HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL. Use


to adjust seat height.

(63) FORWARD/BACKWARD ADJUSTMENT


CONTROL. Use to move seat forward or backward.

h. Vehicle Exterior

Key Item and Function

(64) ARTICULATION JOINT LOCKOUT


STRUT. Use to keep articulation joint straight when air lifting and
towing.

(65) FRONT GLAD HANDS. Allows towing


vehicle to supply air to reservoirs on towed vehicle for operation of
towed vehicle's brakes.

2-13
TM 08780B-10

(66) TOW BRACKETS. Used for towing the


vehicle.

(67) PEEP WINDOW. Provides ground vision


for driver when climbing or cresting hills.

(68) STEP. Allows access in or out of vehicle.

(69) DOOR LATCH. Pull to open cab door.

(70) GRAB HANDLES. Allow access into or


onto vehicle.

(71) LOCKOUT STRUT SENSOR. Electrical


switch that indicates suspension lockout struts are in position, one
on each side of unit. Turn LEFT to remove cap-RIGHT to install.

2-14
TM 08780B-10

(72) LOCKOUT STRUT. Locks out suspension


action of the front power unit. This stabilizes the front power unit
when uncoupled from the trailer. One on each side of power unit.

(72.1) ARTICULATION JOINT LOCKOUT


SENSOR (LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY). Electrical switch
that indicates articulation joint lockout strut is in position. Turn
LEFT to remove cap-RIGHT to install.

(73) WORKLIGHT. Can be removed by


removing retaining pin. Operate by turning on switch inside cab
and switch on worklight.

CAUTION

TO PREVENT PARTS DAMAGE, DO NOT DROP ENGINE


COMPARTMENT DOOR TO CLOSE IT. LOWER IT AND
CAREFULLY SNAP IT CLOSED.

2-15
TM 08780B-10

(74) ENGINE COMPARTMENT DOOR


LATCH. Lift up and turn clockwise to open.

(75) PIONEER TOOL BRACKET. Used to


secure pioneer tools.

(76) RADIATOR CAP. Provides pressurization


of cooling system and covers filler opening. Turn LEFT to open –
RIGHT to close.

(MK48A1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY)

(77) COOLANT SIGHT GLASS. Allow visual


inspection of radiator coolant level.

(78) FUEL TANK CAP. Turn LEFT to open-


RIGHT to close.

(79) ETHER QUICK START. Provides ether to


the engine for cold weather starting. Operated by a button inside
cab.

2-16
TM 08780B-10

(80) SLAVE PLUG. Used for jump starting the


vehicle. Slide cap off to connect slave cable.

CAUTION

BATTERY BOX COVER IS NOT HINGED. TO PREVENT


PARTS DAMAGE RAISE IT ONE INCH AND PULL
OUTWARD.

(81) BATTERY BOX LATCH. Lift rubber tee,


raise battery box cover one inch and pull outward.

NOTE
• When parking vehicle on a side slope, ensure that one of
the fuel tank shut-off valves is closed to prevent lower side
fuel tank from overfilling.

• When filling fuel tanks, ensure at least one of the fuel


tank shut-off valves is closed, to allow each fuel tank to be
filled separately.

(82) FUEL TANK SHUT-OFF VALVE. Allows


either left or right fuel tank to be shut off. Turn handle in line with
fuel line to open-turn 90° to close. Each fuel tank has its own
valve.

2-17
TM 08780B-10

(83) AIR RESERVOIR QUICK DISCONNECT.


Used for connection of air hose. Pull back on sleeve to connect or
release air hose.

(84) SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE. Provides


additional wheel and tire for the vehicle.

(85) TIRE HOIST ASSEMBLY. Used to raise


or lower spare tire from vehicle. Remove retaining pins to remove
hoist parts.

(86) HYDRAULIC QUICK DISCONNECTS.


Used when coupling or uncoupling the front power unit from its
trailer. Pull back on sleeve to connect or release hoses.

(87) ARTICULATION LOCKOUT STRUT


MOUNTS. Provide mounting for the articulation lockout strut.

(88) WHEEL CHOCK RACK. Used to store


wheel chocks.

2-18
TM 08780B-10

(89) TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK. Used to


check transmission fluid level. Turn T-handle LEFT to loosen-
RIGHT to tighten.

(90) HAND PRIMER PUMP. Used to manually


prime fuel system. PUSH in knob and turn LEFT to pump-PUSH
knob in to override spring, then turn RIGHT to lock.

(91) WATER/FUEL SEPARATOR. Traps


condensation in lower portion of separator. Drain condensation by
opening drain on bottom of bowl.

(92) STOWAGE BOX. Used to store extension


cord for worklight. Lift rubber tee to open compartment.

(93) TIRE HOIST BASE MOUNT. Provides a


base for assembling tire hoist.

2-19
TM 08780B-10

(94) SELECTOR VALVE. Two position valve.


PUSH in to shift to the STEERING position-PULL out to shift to
the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

(95) HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR FILLER CAP.


Provides a cover for the hydraulic reservoir filler opening. Turn
LEFT to remove-RIGHT to install.

(96) ENGINE OIL FILLER CAP. Provides an


opening to add engine oil. Turn T -handle LEFT to loosen-RIGHT
to tighten.

(97) HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR SIGHT


GLASS. Provides visual inspection of fluid level in reservoir.
Level is inspected with crane in the stowed position.

(98) ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK. Used to check


engine oil level. Turn T-handle LEFT to loosen-RIGHT to tighten.

2-20
TM 08780B-10

2-2. MK14/14A1 CONTAINER HAULER TRAILER

a. Cargo Bed

Key Item and Function

(1) ISO/ANSI FITTINGS. 12 fittings to add


additional locks for container.

(2) TIE DOWN SLOTS. 24 cargo tie downs


used for securing cargo.

(3) ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOCK. Four


positive locking devices used to lock down containers on the cargo
bed.

(4) CONTAINER LOCK DOOR. Covers


ISO/ANSI lock when not in use. Lift up to open.

(5) ISO/ANSI LOCK HANDLE. Used to


engage ISO/ANSI container lock.

2-21
TM 08780B-10

b. Body and Frame

Key Item and Function

(6) TIE DOWN RINGS. Used to secure vehicle


in place during transportation.

(7) FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET. Used


to secure fire extinguisher. Pull handle to open bracket.

(8) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release
pins.

(9) LANDING LEG BRACKET. Holds


landing leg in its stowed position.

(10) LANDING LEG HAND CRANK. Raises


or lowers landing leg. Remove retaining pin to unstow crank.
Turn crank clockwise to raise – counterclockwise to lower.

(11) LANDING LEG. Used to support trailer


when separated from the front power unit. There is one leg per
side.

2-22
TM 08780B-10

(12) LANDING LEG BRACES. Used to


strengthen landing legs when deployed. Remove retaining pins to
remove braces.

(13) TOW/LIFTING BRACKETS. Used to


either attach lifting sling, or to tie vehicle down for transport.

2-23
TM 08780B-10

(14) PINTLE HOOK. Used for attaching trailers


and tow bars. Remove cotter pin and pull latch forward to open.

(15) GLAD HANDS. Allow LVS to supply air


to towed trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and
BLUE for service.

(16) INTER-VEHICLE ELECTRICAL


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to electrical
system of towed trailer.

2-3. MK15/15A1 WRECKER/RECOVERY TRAILER

a. Both Left and Right Sides

Key Item and Function

(1) TIE DOWN RINGS. Used to secure vehicle


in place during transportation.

2-24
TM 08780B-10

(2) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release
pins.

(3) LANDING LEG BRACKET. Holds


landing leg in its stowed position.

(4) LANDING LEG HAND CRANK. Raises


or lowers landing leg. Remove retaining pin to unstow crank.
Turn crank clockwise to raise – counterclockwise to lower.

(5) LANDING LEG. Used to support trailer


when separated from the front power unit. There is one leg per
side.

b. Left Side

Key Item and Function

(6) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools and other equipment. Pull tee handle out and turn left to
open.

2-25
TM 08780B-10

(7) GROUND SPADES. Used to hold vehicle


in place during winching operation. Shown in stowed position.

(8) STABILIZER CYLINDER. Used to


support and level vehicle during crane operation.

(8.1) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION


CYLINDER (MK15A1 ONLY). Used to support and level vehicle
during crane operation.

(8.2) BOOM ANGLE INDICATOR (MK15A1


ONLY). Indicates the angle of the MHC boom during operation.

(9) STABILIZER CYLINDER LOCK VALVE.


Valve has two positions. In the LOCK position, vertical stabilizer
will not work.

(10) VERTICAL STABILIZER LOCK PIN.


Locks stabilizer cylinder in either stowed or working position.

2-26
TM 08780B-10

(11) STABILIZER CABLE. Detachable cable


used to raise or lower stabilizer cylinder.

(12) GROUND SPADE TUBE HOLD DOWN.


Used to stow ground spade tubes to vehicle. Turn handle
counterclockwise to loosen hold down.

(13) GROUND SPADE TUBES. Used to


connect ground spades on vehicle.

(14) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE. Used


to lift cargo or equipment and place it within a 350 degree radius,

2-27
TM 08780B-10

(14.1) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE


(MK15A1 ONLY). Used to lift' cargo or equipment and place it
within a 318 degree radius.

(15) SIDE PULL RELIEF VALVE. Limits


hydraulic pressure to the winch preventing damage when making
side pulls.

(15.1) AUXILIARY CONTROL PANEL


(MK15A1 ONLY). Contains the following items:

(a) SIDE PULL RELIEF VALVE.


Limits hydraulic pressure to the winch, preventing damage when
making side pulls.

(b) WINCH REMOTE CONTROL


RECEPTACLE. Used to connect winch remote control.

(c) AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS


LEVER. Used to supply hydraulic pressure to auxiliary hose reel.

(d) A-FRAME CYLINDER LEVER.


Used to raise or lower A-frame cylinder.

(16) MANUAL/REMOTE SWITCH. Three


position switch that allows the selection of either manual or remote
controls.

(17) OUTRIGGER EXTENSION LOCK


VALVE. Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position,
outrigger beam will extend or retract. In the LOCK position,
outrigger beam will not move.

(18) CRANE HOOK. Used for attaching load to


crane.

2-28
TM 08780B-10

(19) MAIN CONTROL PANEL. Contains the


following controls:

(a) EMERGENCY MANUAL


SHUTDOWN VALVE. Allows the crane to continue operation in
the event of an electrical failure.

(b) DECK WINCH. Pays out or


rewinds cable. Control also engages high idle.

(c) ROTATION. Rotates crane


clockwise or counterclockwise.

(d) MAIN BOOM. Raises or lowers


main boom.

(e) FOLDING BOOM. Raises or lowers


folding boom.

(f) BOOM EXTENSION. Retracts or


extends extension booms.

(g) WRECKER HOIST. Raises or


lowers A-frame cylinder.

2-29
TM 08780B-10

(h) NEAR SIDE STABILIZER.


Extends or retracts either the near side outrigger beam or stabilizer
cylinder.

(i) FAR SIDE STABILIZER. Extends


or retracts either the far side outrigger beam or stabilizer cylinder.

(19.1) MHC MAIN CONTROL PANEL


(MK15A1 ONLY). Contains the following controls:

(a) BOOM LEVER. Raises and lowers


boom.

(b) TELESCOPE LEVER. Retracts or


extends telescoping boom sections.

(c) SWING LEVER. Rotates crane


clockwise or counterclockwise.

(d) HOIST LEVER. Pays out or reels in


the crane hoist cable.

(e) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers LH outrigger jack cylinder.

(f) MAST LEVER. Raises or lowers


the mast.

(g) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.


Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger jack beams.

(h) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers RH outrigger jack cylinder.

(19.2) MHC REMOTE CONTROL


RECEPTACLE (MK15A1 ONLY). Used to connect MHC remote
control.

2-30
TM 08780B-10

(19.3) TILT ALARM (MK15A1 ONLY). Sounds


warning when crane is out of balance during operation.
4.5-degrees out of level will sound alarm.

(19.4) MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH


(MK15A1 ONLY). Push button switch used to provide hydraulic
power to MHC in the event of a MHC electrical failure.

(19.5) MHC MAIN JUNCTION BOX. Contains


the following switches:

(a) MAIN POWER. Two-position


on/off switch used to control MHC electrical power supply.

(b) TILT ALARM. Turns MHC tilt


alarm system ON or OFF.

2-31
TM 08780B-10

2-32
TM 08780B-10

c. Rear

Key Item and Function

(20) RECOVERY WINCH. Used for recovery


operations.

(21) STOWAGE STRAPS. Used to hold A-


frame in upright position when A-frame is not in use.

2-33
TM 08780B-10

(22) A-FRAME. Used to lift and support


disabled vehicles.

(23) WRECKER CYLINDER. Used to lift


disabled vehicles.

(24) CYLINDER STOWAGE BRACKET.


Holds end of A-frame cylinder when not in use.

(25) WINCH ROLLERS. Used to support winch


cable during side or downward pull operations.

(26) TIE DOWN/LIFTING POINTS. Used to


either attach lifting sling, or to tie vehicle down for transportation.

(27) WINCH CABLE STOWAGE HOOK.


Holds end of cable when winch is not in use.

(28) PINTLE HOOK. Used for attaching trailers


and tow bars. Remove cotter pin and pull latch forward to open.

(29) GLAD HANDS. Allow LVS to supply air


to towed trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and
BLUE for service.

(30) INTER-VEHICLE ELECTRICAL


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to system of
towed trailer.

(31) FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET. Used


to secure fire extinguisher. Pull handle to open bracket.

(31.1) MHC REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE


COMPARTMENT (MK15A1 ONLY). Used to store MHC
remote control unit and cable.

2-34
TM 08780B-10

2-35
TM 08780B-10

d. Right Side

Key Item and Function

(32) REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE


COMPARTMENT. Used to store remote control and cable. Pull
rubber tee to open compartment.

(32.1) WINCH REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE


COMPARTMENT. Used to store winch remote control unit and
cable.

(32.2) PASSENGER SIDE OUTRIGGER JACK


CYLINDER CONTROL PANEL. Contains the following
controls:

(a) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers RH outrigger jack cylinder.

(b) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.


Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger beams.

(c) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers LH outrigger jack cylinder.

(32.3) CRANE HOOK BLOCK (MK15A1


ONLY). Used to attach load to crane.

(32.4) CRANE HOOK BRACKET (MK15A1


ONLY). Used to store crane hook block when not in use.

(33) STABILIZER CYLINDER LOCK VALVE.


Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position, stabilizer
cylinder will extend or retract. In the LOCK position, stabilizer
cylinder will not move.

(34) VERTICAL STABILIZER LOCK PIN.


Locks stabilizer cylinder in either stowed or working position.

2-36
TM 08780B-10

(35) FLOW CONTROL VALVE. Adjustable


flow valve used to set hydraulic oil flow rate to auxiliary hose reel.

(36) OUTRIGGER EXTENSION LOCK


VALVE. Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position,
outrigger beam will extend or retract. In the LOCK position,
stabilizer beam will not move. Stabilizer cylinder is lowered with
outrigger beam extended and locked.

(37) NEAR SIDE STABILIZER CONTROL.


Used to extend or retract either the outrigger beam or the stabilizer
cylinder.

(38) AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CONTROL. Used


to supply hydraulic pressure to auxiliary hose reel.

2-37
TM 08780B-10

(39) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used for


stowage of the following items: two hydraulic impact wrenches
and sockets, hydraulic drill, hydraulic chain saw and hydraulic
hose reel with 50 feet (15.25 m) of hose.

(40) ISO/ANSI FITTINGS. Consists of four


fittings to add additional locks for container.

(41) TIE DOWN SLOTS. Consists of eight


cargo tie downs used for securing cargo.

2-38
TM 08780B-10

(42) FRONT STOWAGE COMPARTMENT.


Used to store the following items: slings, chains and clevises.
Oxygen and acetylene tanks are also mounted to front stowage
compartment.

(43) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools, tie down straps and other equipment. Open by
removing quick release pin.

(43.1) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION PADS


(MK15A1 ONLY). Used as support platforms for the outrigger
jack extension cylinders. When not in use, the outrigger jack
extension pads are stowed in brackets located on the underside of
the RH and LH stowage compartments.

(44) LANDING LEG BRACES. Used to


strengthen landing legs when deployed. Remove retaining pins to
remove braces.

2-39
TM 08780B-10

2-4. MK16/16A1 FIFTH WHEEL SEMI-TRAILER


ADAPTER

a. Left Side

Key Item and Function

(1) LANDING LEG BRACES. Used to


strengthen landing legs-when deployed. Remove retaining pins to
remove braces.

(2) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Stores


remote control. Pull up on tee handle to open.

b. Both Left and Right Sides

(3) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Stores


tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release pins
(both sides).

(4) LANDING LEG BRACKET. Holds


landing leg in its stowed position (both sides).

2-40
TM 08780B-10

(5) LANDING LEG HAND CRANK. Raises


or lowers landing leg. Remove retaining pin to unstow crank.
Turn crank clockwise to raise – counterclockwise to lower (both
sides).

(6) LANDING LEGS. Used to support trailer


when separated from front power unit (both sides).

(7) TIE DOWN RINGS. Used to secure vehicle


in place during transportation (both sides).

c. Rear

Key Item and Function

(8) WINCH. Used to pull vehicles onto fifth


wheel semi-trailer.

(9) SIDE PULL ROLLERS. Used to support


the winch cable during operation. These rollers are adjustable.
Rollers should be in the inboard position for winching the

2-41
TM 08780B-10

M870/870Al trailer onto the fifth wheel. The rollers should be in


the outboard position during other operations.

(10) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release
pins.

(11) LADDER AND GRAB HANDLES.


Allows access onto vehicle and platform.

(12) WINCH CABLE STOWAGE HOOK.


Holds end of cable when not in use.

(13) ADJUSTABLE FIFTH WHEEL. Used to


support semi-trailer, on or off road. Oscillates four ways and has
positive locking mechanism.

(14) SECONDARY KINGPIN LATCH


HANDLE. Unlocks secondary kingpin lock.

(15) PRIMARY KINGPIN LATCH HANDLE.


Unlocks primary kingpin lock.

(16) REMOTE CONTROL RECEPTACLE.


Used to plug in remote control cable.

(17) INTER-VEHICLE ELECTRICAL


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system of towed trailer.

(18) SIDE PULL RELIEF VALVE. Used when


making a side pull. In OPEN position, hydraulic system builds up
normal pressure. In CLOSED position, hydraulic pressure is
reduced.

(19) GLAD HANDS. Allow LVS to supply air


to semi-trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and
BLUE for service.

2-42
TM 08780B-10

(20) HOSE TENDER. Used to secure semi-


trailer air lines when not in use.

(21) FIFTH WHEEL RAMPS. Used to pick up


and guide the king pin of attaching semi-trailers to the fifth wheel.

(21.1) FIFTH WHEEL SUPPORT BLOCKS


(MK16A1 ONLY). Used to support fifth wheel when
disconnecting from trailer. To use, place both blocks under rear
edge of fifth wheel. Stow in stowage brackets when not in use.

(22) TIE DOWN/LIFTING POINTS. Used to


either attach lifting sling, or to tie vehicle down for transportation.

(23) PINTLE HOOK. Used for attaching trailers


and tow bars. Remove cotter pin and pull latch forward to open.

(24) GLAD HANDS. Allow LVS to supply air


to towed trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and
BLUE for service.

(25) INTER-VEHICLE ELECTRICAL


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to system of
towed trailer.

2-43
TM 08780B-10

2-5. MK17/17A1 DROPSIDE CARGO W/CRANE


TRAILER

a. Cargo Bed

Key Item and Function

(1) SIDE PANEL LATCH. Used to secure two


side panels together. Lift up latch to release panels individually.

(2) SIDE PANEL. Fold-down and removable


side panels ease loading.

(3) TROOP SEAT. Folds down for carrying


personnel.

(4) LOCK PIN. Locks side panel to front and


rear gates.

(5) ISO/ANSI FITTINGS. 10 fittings to add


additional locks for container.

(6) TIE DOWN SLOTS. 24 cargo tie downs


used for securing cargo.

2-44
TM 08780B-10

b. Both Left and Right Sides

Key Item and Function

(7) LADDER. Used to climb onto cargo bed.


Lift up and swing down to use.

(8) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release
pins.

(9) LANDING LEG BRACKET. Holds


landing leg in its stowed position.

(10) LANDING LEG HAND CRANK. Raises


or lowers landing leg. Remove retaining pin to unstow crank.
Turn crank clockwise to raise – counterclockwise to lower.

2-45
TM 08780B-10

(11) LANDING LEG. Used to support trailer


when separated from the front power unit. There is one leg per
side.

(12) TIE DOWN RING. Used to secure vehicle


in place during transportation.

c. LEFT SIDE

Key Item and Function

(13) STABILIZER CABLE. Detachable cable


used to raise or lower stabilizer cylinder.

(14) VERTICAL STABILIZER LOCK VALVE.


Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position, stabilizer
cylinder can be raised or lowered. In the LOCK position, stabilizer
cylinder will not work.

(15) STABILIZER CYLINDER. Used to


support and level vehicle during crane operation.

(16) REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE


COMPARTMENT. Used to store remote control and cable. Pull
rubber tee to open compartment.

(17) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE. Used


to lift cargo or equipment and place it within 350 degrees.

(18) CRANE HOOK. Used for attaching load to


crane.

(19) EMERGENCY MANUAL SHUT DOWN


VALVE. Allows the crane to continue operation in the event of an
electrical failure.

(20) STABILIZER EXTENSION LOCK


VALVE. Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position,

2-46
TM 08780B-10

outrigger beam will extend or retract. In the LOCK position,


outrigger beam will not move.

(21) CRANE CONTROLS. Contains the


following controls:

(a) Rotation. Rotates crane clockwise or


counterclockwise.

(b) Main Boom. Raises or lowers main


boom.

(c) Folding Boom. Raises or lowers


folding boom.

(d) Boom Extension. Retracts or


extends extension booms.

(e) Near Side Stabilizer. Extends or


retracts either the near side outrigger beam or stabilizer cylinder.

(f) Far Side Stabilizer. Extends or


retracts either the far side outrigger beam or stabilizer cylinder.

(22) STABILIZER CYLINDER LOCK PIN.


Locks stabilizer in either stowed or working position.

2-47
TM 08780B-10

(22.1) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MHC)


(MK17A1 ONLY). Used to lift cargo and equipment and place it
within a 318 degree radius.

(22.2) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION PADS


(MK17A1 ONLY). Used as support platforms for the outrigger
jack extension cylinders. When not in use, the outrigger jack
extension pads are stowed in brackets located on the underside of
the RH and LH stowage compartments.

(22.3) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION


CYLINDER (MK17A1 ONLY). Used to support and level vehicle
during crane operation. Outrigger jack extension cylinders may be

2-48
TM 08780B-10

controlled from either the MHC main control panel or the


passenger side outrigger jack extension control panel.

(22.4) MHC MAIN CONTROL PANEL


(MK17A1 ONLY). Contains the following controls:

(a) BOOM LEVER. Raises and lowers


boom.

(b) TELESCOPE LEVER. Extends or


retracts telescoping boom sections.

(c) SWING LEVER. Rotates crane


clockwise or counterclockwise.

(d) HOIST LEVER. Pays out or reels in


the crane hoist cable.

2-49
TM 08780B-10

(e) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers right side outrigger jack cylinder.

(f) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.


Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger beams.

(g) MAST LEVER. Raises or lowers


the mast.

(h) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers left side outrigger jack cylinder.

(22.6) MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH


(MK17A1 ONLY). Push button switch used to provide hydraulic
power to MHC in the event of a MHC electrical failure.

(22.7) REMOTE CONTROL HOOK-UP


RECEPTACLE (MK17A1 ONLY). Used to connect MHC remote
control.

2-50
TM 08780B-10

(22.8) TILT ALARM (MK17A1 ONLY). Sounds


warning when crane is out of balance during operation.
4.5-degrees out of level will sound alarm.

(23) EXTENDED PINTLE BRACKET. Used to


attach rear extended pintle to vehicle.

(24) CRANE STOWAGE PIN. Secures crane in


stowed position when not in use.

(25) NEAR SIDE STABILIZER CONTROL.


Used to extend or retract either the outrigger beam or the stabilizer
cylinder.

(26) STABILIZER EXTENSION LOCK


VALVE. Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position,

2-51
TM 08780B-10

outrigger beam will extend or retract. In the LOCK position,


outrigger beam will not move.

(27) FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET. Used


to secure fire extinguisher. Pull handle to open basket.

(28) TIE DOWN/LIFTING POINTS. Used to


either attach lifting sling or to tie vehicle down for transportation.

(29) REAR LANDING LEG. Used to support


rear of trailer when separated from the front power unit.

(30) PINTLE HOOK. Used for attaching trailers


and tow bars. Remove cotter pin and pull latch forward to open.

(31) GLAD HANDS. Allows LVS to supply air


to towed trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and
BLUE for service.

(32) INTER-VEHICLE ELECTRICAL


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to electrical
system of towed trailer.

(32.1) MHC MAIN JUNCTION BOX (MK17A1


ONLY). Contains the following switches:

(a) MAIN POWER. Two-position


on/off switch used to control MHC electrical power supply.

(b) TILT ALARM. Turns MHC tilt


alarm system ON or OFF.

(32.2) BOOM ANGLE INDICATOR (MK17A1


ONLY). Indicates angle of the MHC boom.

(32.3) REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE BOX


(MK17A1 ONLY). Used to store MHC remote control and cable.

2-52
TM 08780B-10

2-53
TM 08780B-10

e. Right Side

Key item and function

(33) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to


store tools, tie down straps and other equipment. Open by
removing quick release pins.

(34) LANDING LEG BRACES. Used to


strengthen landing legs when deployed. Remove retaining pins to
remove braces.

2-54
TM 08780B-10

(34.1) PASSENGER SIDE OUTRIGGER JACK


CYLINDER CONTROL PANEL. Contains the following
controls:

2-55
TM 08780B-10

(a) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers RH outrigger jack cylinder.

(b) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.


Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger jack extensions.

(c) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


Raises or lowers left side outrigger jack cylinder.

2-6. SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS' CONTROL AND


INDICATORS

a. Rear Body Unit Tow Kit

Key Item and Function

(1) TOW EYE. Used for attaching rear body


tow kit to towing vehicle.

(2) STOWAGE BOX. Stores tow unit


mounting hardware when not in use.

(3) AIR LINES. Use quick disconnect


couplings to connect with quick disconnect fittings on rear body.

(4) STOWAGE QUICK DISCONNECT


FITTINGS. Used to stow air lines when not in use.

(5) SERVICE AIR SUPPLY GLAD HAND.


Allow vehicle to supply service air to towed rear body.

(6) STOWAGE GLAD HANDS. Used to stow


glad hand end of air lines when not in use.

(7) EMERGENCY AIR SUPPLY GLAD


HAND. Allows vehicle to supply emergency air to towed rear
body.

2-56
TM 08780B-10

(8) SAFETY CHAINS. Secure towed trailer to


towing vehicle if pintle fails.

(9) ELECTRICAL CABLE. Allows vehicle to


supply power to the rear body's electrical system.

b. Machine Gun Mount

Key Item and function

(10) MACHINE GUN RING. Allows


360 degree rotation of weapon.

(11) ROOF HATCH. Used to cover roof


opening when gun is not in use.

2-57
TM 08780B-10

(12) PLATFORM. Used to stand on when


operating machine gun.

(13) PLATFORM LEG. Supports platform when


in use.

(14) QUICK RELEASE PIN. Locks platform in


stowed position.

2-58
TM 08780B-10

c. Front And Rear Extended Pintle Kit

Key Item and Function

(15) PINTLE HOOK. Remove cotter pin and


pull latch forward to open.

(16) TOW BAR SUPPORT. Used to support


tow bar when stowed and unstowed.

(17) FRONT TOW BAR. Primarily used to


maneuver the M198 howitzer.

(18) TOW BAR STRUT. Used to support tow


bar when in use.

(19) PINTLE HOOK. Remove cotter pin and


pull latch forward to open.

2-59
TM 08780B-10

(20) REAR TOW BAR. Primarily used to tow


the M198 howitzer.

2-60
TM 08780B-10

Section II. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services


(PMCS)

2-7. GENERAL. This section contains PMCS requirements for


the MK48/48A1/14/14A1 thru MK48/48A1/17/17A1 LVS
vehicles. The PMCS tables contain checks and services necessary
to insure that your vehicle is ready for operation. Using PMCS
tables, perform your maintenance at the specified intervals.

2-8. TABLE ARRANGEMENT. Table 2-1 covers items


which are common to the MK48/48A1/14/14A1 and all other LVS
models. Tables 2-2, 2-3 and 2-4 cover items that are only used on
certain LVS models. Table 2-5 covers special purpose kits which
may be found on any LVS model. Start your PMCS check with
Table 2-1 and continue to the next table that covers your vehicle
model.

All Table 2-1


MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Table 2-2/2-3
MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Table 2-4
MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Table 2-5/2-6
Kits Table 2-7

If your vehicle has a special purpose kit installed, follow the


PMCS checks in Table 2-5.

2-9. USE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS


AND SERVICES (see Tables 2-1 thru 2-5)

a. Do your BEFORE (B) Preventive Maintenance just


before you operate the vehicle. Pay attention to all CAUTIONS
and WARNINGS.

b. Do your DURING (D) Preventive Maintenance


while the vehicle and/or its component systems are in operation.
Pay attention to all CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.

c. Do your AFTER (A) Preventive Maintenance right


after operating the vehicle.

2-61
TM 08780B-10

d. Do your WEEKLY (W) Preventive Maintenance


once a week.

e. Do your MONTHLY (M) Preventive Maintenance


once a month.

f. If something does not work, troubleshoot it with the


instructions in this manual, or notify your Non-Commissioned
Officer in Charge (NCOIC).

g. Always do your Preventive Maintenance in the


same order so that it gets to be a habit.

h. If you find a problem that is beyond your echelon of


repair, report the problem to Organizational Maintenance.

i. When you do your Preventive Maintenance, take


along the tools you will need to make all the checks. You will
always need a rag or two.

2-10. GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

WARNING

DRY CLEANING SOLVENT, USED TO CLEAN PARTS, CAN


GIVE OFF HARMFUL VAPORS AND IS HARMFUL TO
SKIN AND CLOTHING. TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH,
KEEP AWAY FROM OPEN FLAME OR EXCESSIVE HEAT
AND USE IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. IF DRY
CLEANING SOLVENT GETS ON SKIN OR CLOTHING,
WASH IMMEDIATELY WITH SOAP AND WATER.

a. Cleanliness. Dirt, grease, oil and debris get in the


way and may cover up a serious problem. Use dry cleaning
solvent (item 20, Appendix D) on all metal surfaces.

b. Bolts, Nuts and Screws. Check them all for obvious


looseness or missing, bent, or broken condition. You cannot try

2-62
TM 08780B-10

them all with a tool but look for chipped paint, bare metal, or rust
around bolt heads. If you find one you think is loose, tighten it or
report it to Organizational Maintenance.

c. Welds. Look for loose or chipped paint, rust, or


gaps where parts are welded together. If you find a bad weld,
report it to Organizational Maintenance.

d. Electric wires and Connectors. Look for cracked or


broken insulation, bare wires, and loose or broken connectors.
Tighten loose connectors and make sure the wires are in good
shape. If you find a bad wire or connector, report it to
Organizational Maintenance.

e. Hydraulic Lines and Fittings. Look for wear,


damage, or leaks and make sure clamps and fittings are tight. Wet
spots show leaks but a stain around a fitting or connector can also
mean a leak. If a leak comes from a loose fitting or connector,
tighten it. If any part is broken or worn out, report it to
Organizational Maintenance.

f. Damage. Damage is defined as any conditions that


affect safety or would render the vehicle unserviceable for mission
requirements.

2-11. FLUID LEAKAGE. It is necessary for you to know how


fluid leakage affects the status of fuel, oil, coolant and the
hydraulic systems. The following are definitions of the
types/classes of leakage you need to know about for determining
the status of fluid systems. Become familiar with them and
remember-WHEN IN DOUBT, NOTIFY YOUR NCOIC.

CAUTION

EQUIPMENT OPERATION IS ALLOWABLE WITH MINOR


LEAKAGES (CLASS I OR II). OF COURSE,
CONSIDERATION MUST BE GIVEN TO THE FLUID
CAPACITY IN THE ITEM/SYSTEM BEING
CHECKED/INSPECTED. WHEN IN DOUBT, NOTIFY YOUR

2-63
TM 08780B-10

SUPERVISOR. WHEN OPERATING WITH CLASS I OR II


LEAKS, CONTINUE TO CHECK FLUID LEVELS AS
REQUIRED IN YOUR PMCS. CLASS III LEAKS SHOULD
BE REPORTED TO YOUR SUPERVISOR OR TO
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE.

a. Class I. Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness


or discoloration) not great enough to form drops.

b. Class II. Leakage of fluid great enough to form


drops but not enough to cause drops to fall from item being
checked/inspected.

c. Class III. Leakage of fluid great enough to form


drops that fall from the item being checked/inspected.

2-12. OPERATOR/CREW PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE


CHECKS AND SERVICE TABLES. Checks and service
intervals given are for normal operation. These should be adjusted
for abnormal or severe operating conditions. This walk around
PMCS diagram will help you perform the B, D and A PMCS. It
shows the vehicle PMCS routing track which matches the
sequence of basic PMCS to be performed on all vehicles.

2-64
TM 08780B-10

2-65
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed.
Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
MAKE THE FOLLOWING WALK-AROUND
CHECKS:

DANGER

FRONT AND REAR FRAMES


PIVOT. STAY CLEAR OF
TIRES AND CENTER HINGE
AREA WHILE ENGINE IS
RUNNING

CAB EXTERIOR
• a. Inspect cab (1) for damage that Any damage to
would impair operation. cab that would
impair vehicle's
mission.

• b. Inspect cab door for damage or


misalignment.

• c. Inspect cab door seals for tears


or rot.

• d. Inspect for broken, cracked, or


loose mirrors.

2-66
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
1 CAB EXTERIOR (Continued)

• e. Check for broken or loose


reflectors.
• f. Look under the vehicle for fuel, Any class III
oil, or coolant leakage. fuel, oil, or
coolant leaks.

• g. Check for missing, illegible, or


damaged data plates (2) between the
two frames.

2 TIRES
WARNING

• WHILE CHANGING
TIRES OR WHILE PERFORMING
TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY
OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS
SHOWN BY THE AREA
INDICATED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

• UNDER SOME
CIRCUMSTANCES, THE
TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE
FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH.

2-67
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
2 TIRES (Continued)

FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER


PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

NOTE
Trajectory area as shown applies
to all wheel/ tire assemblies.

• • a. Check tires (3) for cuts, gouges, Tires have cuts,


or cracks. gouges, or
cracks which
would result in
tire failure
during
operation. One
or more tires is
unserviceable
and no spare is
available.

• • b. Check tire tread depth. Tires If tread is worn


should not be worn beyond level of beyond level of
wear bar. wear bar.

2-68
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
2 TIRES (Continued)

• • c. Check wheels (4) for broken, A wheel is


cracked, or bent surfaces. Check that broken,
side ring (5) and clamp plate (6) are cracked, or
not damaged or loose and that they bent; or side
fit securely in their grooves. ring or clamp
plate are
damaged or not
secure.

• • d. Check wheel studs and nuts (7) Two or more


for obvious looseness. Check for nuts or studs on
bent or broken studs and missing the same wheel
nuts. are missing,
broken, or bent.

WARNING

WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR


WHILE PERFORMING TIRE
MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN
BY THE AREA INDICATED.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

2-69
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
2 TIRES (Continued)

WARNING

UNDER SOME
CIRCUMSTANCES, THE
TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE
FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

NOTE
Trajectory area as shown applies to
all wheel tire assemblies.

• e. Check tires for proper air


pressure. Refer to paragraph 3-4.

CAUTION

OFF ROAD OPERATION MUST


BE LIMITED TO 30 MPH.
EMERGENCY OPERATION
(SAND, MUD AND SNOW) MUST
BE LIMITED TO 10 MPH.
NOTE
All tire pressure should be checked
and adjusted when tires are cold.

2-70
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
2 TIRES (Continued)

TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)


MK48/ MK14/14A1,
48A1 1515/A1,
16/16A1 and
17/17A1
ON ROAD 60 PSI 110 PSI
OFF ROAD 45 PSI 45 PSI
EMERGENCY 30 PSI 30 PSI
(sand, mud and snow)

3 BATTERIES

WARNING

DO NOT WEAR WATCHES,


RINGS OR OTHER JEWELRY
WHEN SERVICING BATTERIES
WHICH COULD SHORT OUT
BATTERY TERMINALS. DO NOT
SMOKE OR USE OPEN FLAME
AROUND BATTERIES.
BATTERIES MAY EXPLODE
FROM A SPARK. BATTERY
ACID IS HARMFUL TO SKIN
AND EYES.

2-71
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
3 BATTERIES
• a. Inspect for missing battery One or more
batteries
missing.

• b. Remove battery caps (8) and


check fluid level of each cell. Fluid
level should be up to the split ring.

NOTE
If fluid level is repeatedly low, or
fluid is boiling, notify
Organizational Maintenance. When
temperature is below +32°F (0°C),
run engine 15 minutes to allow
water, added by Organizational
Maintenance, to mix with
electrolyte.

2-72
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
3 BATTERIES (Continued)

• c. Inspect batteries for cracked or Battery is


leaking casing (9), or loose, broken, damaged or
burned, or corroded terminal post terminals are
(10). If batteries require broken or
maintenance, refer to paragraph 3-10. burned.

• d. Check battery box (11) for


damage or corrosion.
• e. Inspect slave receptacle, (12)
for loose cables, damage, or missing
cover.

2-73
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
3.1 BATTERIES (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)

WARNING

DO NOT WEAR WATCHES OR


OTHER JEWELRY WHEN
SERVICING BATTERIES WHICH
COULD SHORT OUT BATTERY
TERMINALS. DO NOT SMOKE
OR USE OPEN FLAME AROUND
BATTERIES. BATTERIES MAY
EXPLODE FROM A SPARK.
BATTERY ACID IS HARMFUL
TO SKIN AND EYES.

• a. Inspect for missing battery. One or more


batteries
missing.

• b. Remove battery caps (1) and


check fluid level of each cell. Fluid
level should be approximately 1/8 in.
(3.2 mm) below the split ring.

2-74
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
3.1 BATTERIES (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)
(Continued)

NOTE
If fluid level is repeatedly low, or
fluid is boiling, notify
Organizational Maintenance. When
temperature is below +32°F (0°C),
run engine 15 minutes to allow
water, added by Organizational
Maintenance, to mix with
electrolyte.

• c. Inspect batteries for cracked or Battery is


leaking casing (2), or loose, broken, damaged or
burned, or corroded terminal post (3). terminals are
If batteries require maintenance, refer broken or
to paragraph 3-10.1. burned.

2-75
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
BATTERIES (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)
(Continued)

• d. Check battery box (4) for


damage or corrosion.

• e. Inspect slave receptacle (5) for


loose cables, damage, or missing
cover.

2-76
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
4 ETHER START SYSTEM

• a. When temperature is below Canister is


+45°F (+7°C), inspect ether canister punctured or
(13) for punctures or obvious empty.
damage.

• b. Check for loose or damaged


mounts or hardware.

2-77
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
5 AIR DRYER

• a. Inspect air dryer (14) for Air dryer is


punctures and obvious damage. punctured.

• b. Check air dryer (14) for loose


mounting bolts and loose air line
connections.

2-78
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
6 WORK LAMP

• a. Check work lamp (15) for


damage to lens, or case. Make sure
lamp is secure in its holder.

• b. Check work lamp (15) for


proper operation.

7 FUEL TANKS

WARNING

DO NOT PERFORM FUEL


SYSTEM CHECK WHILE
SMOKING OR NEAR FLAMES,
FIRE OR SPARKS. FUEL COULD
IGNITE, CAUSING DAMAGE TO
VEHICLE, SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH.

• • a. Check fuel tank (16) for leaks Any class III


or damage. fuel leakage.

2-79
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
Available If:
7 B D A W M FUEL TANKS (Continued)

• b. Check fuel hoses (17) and Any class III


connections (16) for leaks or damage. leakage or loose
Make sure all connections are secure. connections.

NOTE
Both the right and left fuel tanks
have fuel tank shut-off valves.

• c. Check fuel tank shut-off valves


(19) for proper operation.

2-80
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
8 COUPLING BOLTS

• • Check for broken, loose, or missing Any coupling


coupling bolts and nuts (20). bolts or nuts are
broken, loose,
or missing.

9 STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

• Check compartment (21) for water in


bottom of compartment, or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

2-81
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
10 LIGHTS

• Check stoplights, clearance lights,


and headlights for burned out bulbs
or broken lens.

11 PINTLE HOOK

• Check pintle hook (22) for secure Pintle locking


mounting and proper operation of mechanism is
locking mechanism. damaged and is
required for
mission.

12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

• a. Inspect electrical connector (23) Connector is


for damage. damaged and is
required for
mission.

• b. Inspect electrical connector


cover seal for tears or rot.

2-82
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR (Continued)

• c. Inspect electrical connector Cable is


cable for damage. damaged and is
required for
mission.
13 REAR GLAD HANDS

• Check glad hands (24) and air lines Air lines or


for damage. Inspect glad hands for seals are
missing or rotted seals. damaged,
missing, or
rotting and glad
hands are
required for
mission.

2-83
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
14 TIRE HOIST

• Check tire hoist (25) for any


damaged or missing parts.

15 FUEL-WATER SEPARATOR

WARNING

DO NOT PERFORM FUEL


SYSTEM CHECKS WHILE
SMOKING OR NEAR FLAMES,
FIRE, OR SPARKS. FUEL
COULD IGNITE, CAUSING
DAMAGE TO VEHICLE SEVERE
INJURY, OR DEATH

• a. Check fuel-water separator (26) Any class III


for leaks and/or damage. fuel leakage.

2-84
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
15 FUEL-WATER SEPARATOR (Continued)

• b. Check priming pump (27) for Any class III


leaks or damage. fuel leakage.

• c. Check sediment bowl (28) for


water. If water is present, drain fuel
from bowl into suitable container
until clean fuel flows out.

16 SECONDARY FUEL FILTER

• Check secondary fuel filter (29); for Any class III


leaks or damage. fuel leakage.

2-85
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
17 ENGINE OIL

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERFILL ENGINE


OIL. ENGINE DAMAGE COULD
RESULT.
NOTE
• If engine has been running,
wait approximately five
minutes after engine shutdown
before checking engine oil
level.

• Normal oil consumption could


be up to .27 quarts (.26 liters)
per operating hour under
normal operating conditions.

• Check engine oil level on dipstick Oil level below


(30). Oil level should be between low (L) mark or
low (L) mark and full (F) mark. Add above full (F)
oil as required. mark.

2-86
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
17 ENGINE OIL (Continued)

18 COOLANT FILTER

• Check coolant filter (31) for leaks or


damage.

19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM RESERVOIR

NOTE
On the MK15 and the MK17, the
cranes must be in the stowed
position to correctly check hydraulic
fluid level. Hydraulic fluid must be
at operating temperature.

2-87
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM RESERVOIR (Continued)

• • a. Check that hydraulic fluid level Fluid is below


in sight glass (32) on reservoir (33) is add mark.
between full and add marks. Add
fluid as required.

• • b. Inspect hydraulic fluid in sight Fluid appears


glass (32) for milky, foamy, or dirty milky, foamy,
appearance. or dirty.

19.1 HYDRAULIC SELECTOR VALVE

• Clean selector shaft of dirt and


grease. Pull out and push in valve
knob. Recoat selector shaft with
grease.

2-88
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
20 WIPER ARMS AND BLADES
• Check windshield wiper arms and
blades for damage or wear.

21 WINDSHIELD AND CLASS


• Check for broken or cracked
windshield, door glass, rear window,
or peep window.

22 FRONT GLAD HANDS


• Check glad hands (34) for damage.
Inspect glad hands for missing or
rotted seals.

2-89
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
24 HYDRAULIC PUMP

WARNING

PERFORM YOUR INSPECTS/


CHECKS ON THE HYDRAULIC
PUMP ONLY WHEN THE
ENGINE IS OFF.

• a. Inspect hydraulic pump (35) Pump housing


for cracks. is cracked.

2-90
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
23 HYDRAULIC PUMP (Continued)

• b. Check hydraulic pump (35), Any class III


hoses (36), and split flanges (37) for leakage.
leaks.

• c. Check hydraulic pump (35) for Pump is loose


looseness or missing mounting bolts. or bolts are
Make sure pump is secure. missing.

24 UNDERCARRIAGE AND FRAME

• a. Inspect for missing or broken One or more


suspension limit chains (39) on No. 1 chains are
and No. 2 axles. missing or
broken on the
same axle.

2-91
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed.Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
24 UNDERCARRIAGE AND FRAME (Continued)

• b. Check that all axle and shift


unit breathers (39) are not dogged
and that they spin.

2-92
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed.Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
24 UNDERCARRIAGE AND FRAME (Continued)

c. Check for loose, broken, or One or more


missing cargo body mounting studs studs are
(40). broken or
missing.

• d. Inspect frame rails and Any broken


crossmembers for loose or broken frame rails,
bolts, cracked or broken welds. crossmembers,
broken welds,
loose or broken
bolts.

• e. Check air lines and hoses for Any leaks or


leaks or obvious damage. damage to
lines, hoses, or
fittings.

2-93
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
24 UNDERCARRIAGE AND FRAME (Continued)

• f. Visually inspect spring brake


chamber for missing dust caps (41).
Replace missing dust caps (41)
immediately if operating off road.

• g. Check all slack adjusters (41.1) Any loose or


for looseness or damage. damaged slack
adjuster is
found.

• h. Inspect hydraulic lines and Any class III


hoses for breaks, cracks or leaks. leaks or
cracked,
broken, or bent
lines or hoses.

2-94
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
25 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

• Check air intake system for loose Any punctured


clamps (42) and punctured or or damaged
damaged tubes (43). tube that would
allow unfiltered
air to enter
engine.

2-95
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
26 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
• a. Check turbocharger oil line (44) Any leakage is
and fittings for signs of leaks or evident.
damage.

• b. Check air compressor (45) for Compressor is


oil and coolant leaks. Check that the loose.
compressor is securely mounted.

2-96
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
27 EXHAUST SYSTEM

WARNING

DO NOT TOUCH HOT EXHAUST


PIPES OR MUFFLER WITH
BARE HANDS. SEVERE BURNS
WILL RESULT.

• Check exhaust system (46) for Pipe between


damaged pipes or muffler, or loose or turbocharger
missing clamps. While engine is and exhaust
running, listen for exhaust leaks. manifold leaks.

2-97
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
28 RADIATOR HOSES

• Check radiator hoses (47) for rot,


leaks or loose clamps (48).

2-98
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
29 RADIATOR COOLANT

• a. Check for coolant in sight glass Sight glass does


(49). Add coolant, if required, as not show
follows: coolant.
WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID


BEING SCALDED OR BURNED
WHEN REMOVING COOLING
SYSTEM RADIATOR CAP. USE
HEAVY RAG OR GLOVES TO
PROTECT HANDS.

b. Turn radiator cap (50) only one-


half turn counterclockwise and allow
pressure to escape before fully
removing cap.

c. Add coolant to radiator (51)


approximately one inch (2.54 cm)
below filler neck.

2-99
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
30 CARGO LOCKS, TIEDOWNS AND FITTINGS

• Check for broken or cracked Any lock,


container locks (52), fittings (53) and fitting, or slot
tiedown slots (54). broken that is
required to
secure intended
mission load.

2-100
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
31 FUEL TANK STRAINER

• Check fuel tank strainer (55) for


clogs or damage. If strainer is
clogged, clean strainer. Refer to
paragraph 3-9.

*Item (52) on MK14 only. Items


(53) and (54) are on MK14, MK15
and MK17 only.

32 CAB INTERIOR

NOTE
Upon power up of ABS system, ABS
warning lights should come on for
about 2 seconds, then turn off.

2-101
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

a. Check engine for:

• (1) Noisy or slow cranking Starter is noisy


starter. or cranks slow.

• (2) Excessive smoke, unusual Any of these


noise, rough running, or misfiring. conditions are
found.
• (3) Correct idle of 690 to 700
rpm. Tachometer
reads less than
650 rpm or
more than 750
rpm.

• b. Check the following readings Gauge reads


less than 49 psi
(1) Engine oil pressure gauge (337 kPa)
(56) must show normal operating during
pressure of 49 to 70 psi (337 to 482 operation or
kPa) at 2,100 rpm. Minimum oil less than 5 psi
pressure at idle can go as low as 5 psi (34 kPa) at idle.
(34 kPa).

2-102
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

• (2) Air cleaner restriction Indicator reads


indicator (57) must read within the red.
yellow area. If restriction window
(58) reads yellow but gauge (59)
reads 18 H2O (4.50 kPa) or more,
filter is partially clogged and should
be replaced at the end of the vehicle's
operation or mission.

2-103
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

• • (3) Air pressure gauge (60) Gauge


indicates system air pressure in both indication is
the front and rear sections. Low air less than 55 psi
pressure indicator (61) and buzzer (379 kPa), or
will operate until the air pressure is low pressure
between 55 psi and 75 psi (379 and indicator
517 kPa) in both sections. remains on or
does not
operate. Or
pressure
exceeds 120 psi
(827 kPa) for
non-ABS
systems or 130
psi (863.35
kPa) for ABS
equipped
systems.

2-104
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly
For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

• • (4) Battery gauge (62) should Gauge reads


read between 24 and 28 volts. below 24 or
above 28 volts

c. Check to see that:

• (1) Seat belts are securely


mounted and operate properly.

• (2) Turn signal control (63)


and indicators (64) operate properly.

(3) Emergency flasher control


• (65) operates properly.

2-105
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

• (4) Both WIPER controls (66


and 67) operate properly. WASHER
control (68) operates properly.

• (5) Both horns (air and


electric) operate properly (only if
tactical situation permits).

• (6) HEAT (69) and


DEFROST (70) controls operate
properly. FAN switch (71) operates
properly, in LO and HI positions.

• (7) Check fire extinguisher


for missing or-broken seal.

• (8) Check condition of fire


extinguisher.

• (9) Check condition of fire


extinguisher mounting bracket.

(10) Check that ABS warning


lights (71.1) come on for about 2
seconds then go off when vehicle is
powered up.

2-106
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

NOTE
If ABS lights stay on, the ABS is
inoperable but the air brakes remain
functional.

• d. Check that engine water Gauge not


temperature gauge (72) indicates operating or
normal operating temperature of reads more than
160°F to 230°F (71°C to 110°C). 230°F (110°C).

2-107
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

• e. Check that hydraulic oil Gauge reads


temperature gauge (73) indicates above 170°F
normal operating temperature of (77°C).
130°F to 150°F (54.4°C to 65.5°C).

2-108
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
33 TRANSMISSION FLUID

WARNING

• SET PARKING BRAKE


BEFORE CHECKING
TRANSMISSION FLUID.

• WHEN WORKING AT THE


ARTICULATION JOINT,
MAKE SURE TRANSMIS-
SION IS IN NEUTRAL AND
THE PARKING BRAKE IS
APPLIED. THIS WILL
PREVENT THE
ARTICULATION JOINT
FROM MOVING IF THE
STEERING WHEEL IS
ACCIDENTALLY MOVED
WHILE THE ENGINE IS
RUNNING.

• a. With engine running and Fluid level is


transmission in neutral, check low or too high.
transmission fluid level on dipstick
(74). If transmission temperature is
below 160°F (71°C), fluid level
should be within COLD RUN area.
If transmission temperature is above
160°F (71°C), fluid level should be
within HOT RUN area.

2-109
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:

34 BRAKES

• a. Check brakes for chatter, noise, Brakes chatter,


or side pull. are noisy, or
pull.
NOTE
Trailer hand brake control (75) can
only be checked with a trailer
connected.

• b. Check that trailer brake hand Control does


control (75) operates properly by not apply trailer
moving truck and applying trailer brakes.
brakes.

2-110
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
34 BRAKES (Continued)

35 STEERING

• Check steering system for any Steering binds


unusual noise, binding or steering or is
difficulty during operation. unresponsive.

2-111
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
36 TRANSFER CASE

CAUTION

TRUCK MUST BE STOPPED


WHEN MAKING THIS CHECK.
TRANSFER CASE WILL BE
DAMAGED IF SHIFTED WHILE
TRUCK IS MOVING.

• Check transfer case (76) for proper Transfer case


operation in DIRECT (HIGH) and does not
LOW range. operate in all
ranges required
for mission.

2-112
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
37 TRANSMISSION

• a. Check transmission for proper Transmission


shifting. does not
operate in all
ranges.

NOTE
At idle speed the automatic
transmission may not reach 160°F
(71°C) oil temperature.

• b. Check transmission temperature Gauge reads


gauge (77) for normal operating 300°F (149°C)
temperature of 160°F to 220°F (71°C or more.
to 104°C). If the transmission
temperature exceeds 220°F (104°C),
downshift to lower gear to avoid
overheating.

2-113
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
37 TRANSMISSION (Continued)

38 AIR RESERVOIR

• a. With engine off, listen for leaks Any air leakage


at all air reservoirs and reservoir present.
lines.

2-114
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
38 AIR RESERVOIR (Continued)

• b. Drain air reservoirs (78), (79),


(80), (81) and (82). Refer to
paragraph 3.5.

2-115
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
39 VEHICLE EXTERIOR

NOTE
• Recommended vehicle wash
intervals are based on the severity of
the corrosive environment. The
following areas have high
concentrations of vehicles for which
wash intervals must be adjusted to
more than an after operation
interval.
1. Continental United States
(CONUS)
2. Okinawa, Japan
3. Hawaii
4. Panama
5. Puerto Rico
6. Republic of Korea (ROK)
• Highly corrosive
environments include "severe" and
"extremely severe" corrosive
regions. A highly corrosive
environment does not refer only to
areas where the use of road salts or
other chemical de-icers is common,
high humidity areas and/or areas
with a high concentration of salt in
the air are also considered to be
highly corrosive.

2-116
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
39 VEHICLE EXTERIOR (Continued)

NOTE
Intervals listed in the following
chart are the minimum
recommended wash intervals based
on severity of corrosive areas.
These intervals should be adjusted
with regard to availability of
vehicles, personnel, fresh water and
wash rack facilities.

Recommended Wash Intervals by Seventy of Corrosive


Areas

Ranking Wash Intervals


Extremely Severe* Every 5 Days
Severe** Every 15 Days
Moderate Every 25 Days

* Within 0-75 miles of coastal area


** Beyond 75 miles from coastal area

• Wash exterior of vehicle


undercarriage and frame. Refer to
paragraph 3-6.

2-117
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
40 HYDRAULICS (MK15/15A1)

NOTE
Inspection for hydraulic leaks must
be performed with engine running
and AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC
selector valve engaged.

a. Inspect the A-frame, crane and Any class III


winch for hydraulic
leakage.

• • (1) Broken, cracked, or leaking


hydraulic hoses

• • (2) Bent, crushed, or leaking


hydraulic lines

• b. Inspect all hydraulic lines and


hoses are secure and fittings are not
loose.

• c. Check all valves and cylinders Valve or


for proper operation. cylinder will
not operate.

2-118
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
40 HYDRAULICS (MK15/15A1) (Continued)

d. Check main control (1) for Controls,


malfunction,
bind, or do not
respond.
• • (1) Damage to casing.

• • (2) Damage or binding control


levers.

• • (3) Torn or ripped bellows and


switch boot.

• • (4) Malfunction or
misadjustment..

2-119
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
41 A-FRAME (MK15/15A1)

• • a. Inspect A-frame (2) for cracks, A-frame is


broken welds, or damaged hydraulic cracked, broken
cylinder (3). welds are
found, or
hydraulic
cylinder is
damaged.

• • b. Check that hydraulic cylinder


(3) is retracted and clevis (4) is in
stowed position.

• • c. Check cable (5) for kinks, Cable has more


broken strands, or wear. than six wires
in one strand
that are broken.

2-120
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
41 A-FRAME (MK15/15A1) (Continued)

2-121
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
42 WINCH (MK15)

WARNING

• USE LEATHER GLOVES


WHEN CHECKING WINCH
CABLE. INJURY TO HANDS
MAY RESULT IF GLOVES
ARE NOT WORN.

• DO NOT HOLD ONTO


WINCH CABLE IF TENSION
IS REQUIRED TO GUIDE
THE CABLE BACK ON THE
SPOOL. THE ASSISTANT
WILL HOLD THE CLEVIS,
NOT THE CABLE.
NEITHER THE OPERATOR
NOR THE ASSISTANT
SHOULD STAND WITHIN
ARMS LENGTH OF THE
SPOOL WHEN THE CABLE
IS BEING RETRIEVED.

• a. Unwind cable and check for Evidence of


kinks, broken strands, or wear. Refer cable breaks,
to paragraph 2-20. kinks, broken
strands, or
wear.

2-122
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
42 WINCH (MK15) (Continued)

• b. Check that winch cable shackle Shackle is loose


(5) is not broken and pin (6) is secure on cable or
and in place. broken.

2-123
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
43 CRANE (MK15)

NOTE
Perform PMCS check No. 43c only
if crane is to be operated during
vehicle mission.

• a. Check crane (7) for cracks or Cracks or


broken welds. broken welds
are evident.

• b. Inspect boom hook (a) for Hook is


cracks. cracked.

• c. Check for hydraulic power to Outrigger beam


crane by extending and retracting one does not
outrigger beam (9) approximately operate.
one foot. Refer to paragraph 2-16.

2-124
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44 REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK15)

• a. Check compartment (10) for


tom or damaged seal, water in
bottom of compartment, or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

• b. Check for missing remote


control unit (11) and cable (12).

NOTE
If remote unit is to be operated
during mission, perform PMCS step
No. 44c.

2-125
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-2. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44 REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK15) (Continued)

• c. Check remote control unit (11)


for proper operation. Refer to
paragraph 2-16.

2-126
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1)

NOTE
Inspection for hydraulic leaks must
be performed with engine running,
AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC selector
valve engaged and MHC MAIN
POWER SWITCH ON.

a. Inspect Material Handling Any class III


Crane (MHC) for hydraulic
leakage.

• • (1) Broken, cracked, or leaking


hydraulic hoses.

• • (2) Bent, crushed, or leaking


hydraulic lines.

• b. Inspect to ensure that all


hydraulic lines and hoses are secure
and fittings are not loose.

2-127
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1) (CONTINUED)

• c. Check all valves and Valve or


cylinders for proper operation. cylinder will
not operate.

d. Check MHC main control panel Controls


(1) for malfunction,
bind, or do not
respond.

• • (1) Damaged or binding


control levers.

• • (2) Loose or damaged


electrical connectors

• • (3) Damaged or missing pins


and other obvious damage in remote
control receptacle (2)

2-128
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1)(Continued)

e. Check passenger side outrigger Controls


jack control panel (3) for damaged or malfunction,
binding control levers. bind, or do not
respond.

f. Check auxiliary control panel Controls


(4) for malfunction,
bind, or do not
respond.

• (1) Damaged or binding


control levers.

• (2) Loose or damaged


electrical connectors.

2-129
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1) (Continued)

• (3) Damaged or missing pins Damaged or


and pinholes on winch remote missing pins are
control receptacle (5). found.

44.2 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MK15A1)

• a. Check crane (6) for cracks or Cracks or


broken welds. broken welds
are evident.

• • b. Inspect hook block (7) for Hook block is


cracks and other obvious damage. damaged.

2-130
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.2 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MK15A1)
(Continued)

• • c. Check for hydraulic power to Outrigger beam


crane by extending and retracting does not
both outrigger beams (8) operate.
approximately one foot. Refer to
paragraph 2-17. Fully stow
outriggers after check.

• • d. Check and ensure crane boom


and hook block are fully stowed.
Refer to paragraph 2-17.

• e. Check outrigger pads (9) for


damaged or missing retaining pins
and other obvious damage.

2-131
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.2 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MK15A1)
(Continued)

2-132
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK15A1)

• a. Check all tool stowage


compartments (10) for water in
bottom of compartment or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

• b. Check MHC remote control


compartment (11) for torn seal, water
in bottom of compartment, or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

2-133
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK15A1) (Continued)

• c. Check for missing MHC remote


control unit (12) and cable (13).

• d. Check MHC remote control


unit cable (13) for cracked insulation
and damage to plugs on cable.

• e. Check MHC remote control


unit (12) for broken controls or other
obvious damage.

• f. Check receptacle (14) on MHC


remote control unit (12) for damaged
or missing pins.

NOTE
Perform PMCS check 44.3g only if
MHC is to be operated during
mission.

• g. Check MHC remote control


unit (12) for proper operation. Refer
to paragraph 2-17.

2-134
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK15A1) (Continued)

• h. Check winch remote control


stowage compartment (15) for torn
seal, water in bottom of compartment
or other obvious damage. Ensure
drain holes are clear.

• i. Check for missing winch Control unit is


remote control unit (16) and cable missing.
(17).

• j. Check winch remote control


unit cable (17) for cracked insulation
and damage to plugs on cable.

2-135
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK15A1) (Continued)

• k. Check receptacle (18) on winch Damaged or


remote control unit (16) for damaged missing pins are
or missing pins found.

NOTE
Perform PMCS check 44.3 l only if
winch is to be operated during
mission.

• l. Check winch remote control Control unit


unit (16) for proper operation. Refer does not
to paragraph 2-20. operate.

2-136
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.4 MHC CABLE (MK15A1)

WARNING

CABLE CAN BECOME FRAYED OR CONTAIN


BROKEN WIRES. WEAR HEAVY LEATHER-
PALMED WORK GLOVES WHEN HANDLING
CABLE. NEVER LET MOVING CABLE SLIDE
THROUGH HANDS, EVEN WHEN WEARING
GLOVES. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT
IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

• a. Pay out MHC cable (14) MHC cable is


completely and inspect for crushing, damaged or
sharp bends and abrasions. excessively
worn.

2-137
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.4 MHC CABLE (MK15A1) (Continued)

• b. Inspect MHC cable (14) for Cable has more


broken wires or kinks. than three
broken wires
per 3-inch
section on same
strand. The
maximum
number of
broken wires
shall not occur
in any two
consecutive 3-
inch sections of
cable. That is,
if six wires are
broken in one
3-inch section
of cable, none
would be
allowed in the
next
consecutive 3-
inch section.

2-138
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-3. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed.
Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
44.5 MHC OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN BOX (MK15A1)

• a. Check security of electrical


connectors on overload shutdown
box (19).

• b. Inspect electrical wiring for Wiring is


cracking, fraying, or chafing. frayed, cracking
or excessively
worn.

2-139
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
45 HYDRAULICS (MK16)

NOTE
Inspection for hydraulic leaks must
be performed with engine running
and AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC
selector valve engaged.

a. Inspect winch for Any class III


hydraulic
leakage.

• • (1) Broken, cracked, or leaking


hydraulic hoses.

• • (2) Bent, crushed, or leaking


hydraulic lines.

• b. Inspect that all hydraulic lines


and hoses are secure and fittings are
not loose.

2-140
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
46 FIFTH WHEEL (MK16)

• • a. Check coupler jaws (1) for Jaws are broken


damage and proper operation. or mechanism
is damaged.

• • b. Check primary release handle Handles will


(2), secondary release handle (3) and not operate
linkage and locking plungers for properly.
damage and proper operation.

• c. Check for loose mounting of


fifth wheelbase (4) at frame.

• d. Check fifth wheel ramps (5) for


loose mounting or damage.

• e. Check fifth wheel support


blocks (6) for loose mounting or
damage.

2-141
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
47 TRAILER AIR BRAKE HOSES AND GLAD
HANDS (MK16)

• • a. Check trailer air brake hoses (6) Air hose(s) are


for cracks, cuts, or other obvious damaged or
damage. cannot be
connected to
trailer.

2-142
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
47 TRAILER AIR BRAKE HOSES AND GLAD
HANDS (MK16) (Continued)

• • b. Check glad hands (7) for Glad hand(s)


damage or missing seals. cannot be
connected or
seal is damaged
or missing.

48 TRAILER ELECTRICAL CABLE (MK16)

• • a. Check trailer electrical cable (8) Cable is


for damage. damaged and
cannot be
connected.

49 WINCH (MK16)

WARNING

USE LEATHER GLOVES WHEN


CHECKING WINCH CABLE.
INJURY TO HANDS MAY
RESULT IF GLOVES ARE NOT
WORN.

2-143
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
49 WINCH (MK16) (Continued)

WARNING

DO NOT HOLD ONTO THE


WINCH CABLE IF TENSION IS
REQUIRED TO GUIDE THE
CABLE BACK ON THE SPOOL.
THE ASSISTANT WILL HOLD
THE CLEVIS, NOT THE CABLE.
NEITHER THE OPERATOR NOR
ASSISTANT SHOULD STAND
WITHIN ARMS LENGTH OF THE
SPOOL WHEN THE CABLE IS
BEING RETRIEVED.

• a. Unwind cable (9) and check for Evidence of


kinks and broken strands or wear. able breaks,
Refer to paragraph 2-24. kinks, broken
strands or wear.

2-144
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
49 WINCH (MK16) (Continued)

• b. Check that winch cable shackle Shackle is loose


(10) is not broken and pin (11) is on cable or
secure and in place. broken.

2-145
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
50 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK16)

a. Check compartment (12) for


water in bottom of compartment or
other obvious damage. Insure drain
holes are clear.

• b. Check compartment (13) for


torn or damaged seal, water in
bottom of compartment, or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

2-146
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-4. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
50 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK16) (Continued)

• c. Check for missing remote Control unit is


control unit (14) and cable (15). missing.

• d. Check remote control unit (14) Control unit


for proper operation. Refer to does not
paragraph 2-24. operate.

2-147
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
51 HYDRAULICS (MK17)

NOTE
Inspection for hydraulic leaks must
be performed with engine running
and AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC
selector valve engaged.

a. Inspect crane for Any class III


hydraulic
leakage.

• • (1) Broken, cracked, or leaking


hydraulic hoses.

• • (2) Bent, crushed, or leaking


hydraulic lines.

• b. Inspect that all hydraulic lines


and hoses are secure and fittings are
not loose.

• c. Check all valves and cylinders Valves or


for proper operation cylinders will
not operate.

d. Check main controls (1) for Controls


malfunction,
bind, or do not
respond.

2-148
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
51 HYDRAULICS (MK17) (Continued)

• • (1) Damage to casing.

• • (2) Damage or binding control


levers.

• • (3) Torn or ripped bellows and


switch boot.

• • (4) Malfunction or
misadjustment.

2-149
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
52 CRANE (MK17)

NOTE
Perform PMCS check #52c only if
crane is to be operated during
vehicle mission.

• a. Check crane (2) for cracks or Cracks or


broken welds. broken welds
are evident.

• b. Inspect boom hook (3) for Hook is


cracks. cracked.

• c. Check for hydraulic power to Outrigger beam


crane by extending and retracting one does not
outrigger beam (4) approximately operate.
one foot. Refer to paragraph 2-25.

2-150
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
52 CRANE (MK17) (Continued)

• d. Check rear landing leg (5) for


damage.

53 CARGO BODY (MK17)

• a. Check for broken latches (6) or


missing lockpins (7).

• b. Check for broken, bent, or


damaged hinge pins (8).

• c. Check that side panels (9) and


end panels (10) are not bent or
broken and have no broken welds.

• • d. Inspect cargo cover for tears or


rips.

2-151
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
53 CARGO BODY (MK17) (Continued)

2-152
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK17)

• a. Check all compartments (11)


for water in bottom of compartment
or other obvious damage. Ensure
drain holes are clear.

• b. Check compartment (12) for


torn or damaged seal, water in
bottom of compartment, or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

2-153
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-5. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo w/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK17) (Continued)

• c. Check for missing remote


control unit (13) and cable (14).

NOTE
Perform PMCS check #54d only it
crane is to be operated during
mission.

• d. Check remote control unit (13)


for proper operation. Refer to
paragraph 2-25.

2-154
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.1 HYDRAULICS (MK17A1)

NOTE
Inspection for hydraulic leaks must
be performed with engine running,
AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC selector
valve engaged and MHC MAIN
POWER switch ON.

a. Inspect Material Handling Any class III


Crane (MHC) for hydraulic
leakage.

• • (1) Broken, cracked, or leaking


hydraulic hoses.

• • (2) Bent, crushed, or leaking


hydraulic lines.

2-155
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.1 HYDRAULICS (MK17A1) (Continued)

• b. Inspect to ensure that all


hydraulic lines and hoses are secure
and fittings are not loose.

• c. Check all valves and cylinders Valve or


for proper operation. cylinder will
not operate.
d. Check MHC main control panel
(1) for

2-156
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.1 HYDRAULICS (MK17A1) (Continued)

• • (1) Damaged or binding Controls


control levers. malfunction,
bind, or do not
respond.

• • (2) Loose or damaged


electrical connectors.

• • (3) Damaged or missing


terminal pins and other obvious
damage in remote control receptacle
(2).

2-157
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.1 HYDRAULICS (MK17A1) (Continued)

• • e. Check passenger side outrigger Controls


jack control panel (3) for damaged or malfunction,
binding control levers. bind, or do not
respond.

2-158
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.2 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MK17A1)

• a. Check crane (4) for cracks or Cracks or


broken welds. broken welds
are evident.

• • b. Inspect hook block (5) for Hook block is


cracks and other obvious damage. damaged.

• • c. Check for hydraulic power to Outrigger beam


crane by extending and retracting does not
both outrigger beams (6) operate.
approximately one foot. Refer to
paragraph 2-26. Fully stow
outriggers after check.

• • d. Check and ensure crane boom


and hook block are fully stowed.
Refer to paragraph 2-26.

2-159
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.2 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MK17A1)

• e. Check rear landing leg (7) for


damage.

• f. Check outrigger pads (8) for


damaged or missing retaining pins
and other obvious damage.

2-160
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK17A1)

• a. Check all tool stowage


compartments (9) for water in bottom
of compartment or other obvious
damage. Ensure drain holes are
clear.

• b. Check MHC remote control


compartment (10) for torn seal, water
in bottom of compartment, or other
obvious damage. Ensure drain holes
are clear.

2-161
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK17A1) (Continued)

• • c. Check for missing MHC remote


control unit (11) and cable (12).

• • d. Check MHC remote control


unit cable (12) for cracked insulation
and damage to plugs on cable.

• • e. Check MHC remote control


unit (11) for broken controls or other
obvious damage.

• • f. Check receptacle (13) on MHC


remote control unit (11) for damaged
or missing pins.

2-162
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT (MK17A1) (Continued)

NOTE
Perform PMCS check 54.3g only if
MHC is to be operated during
mission.

• g. Check MHC remote control


unit (11) for proper operation. Refer
to paragraph 2-26.

54.4 MHC CABLE (MK17A1)

WARNING

CABLE CAN BECOME FRAYED


OR CONTAIN BROKEN WIRES.
WEAR HEAVY LEATHER-
PALMED WORK GLOVES WHEN
HANDLING CABLE. NEVER
LET MOVING CABLE SLIDE
THROUGH HANDS, EVEN
WHEN WEARING GLOVES.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

2-163
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.4 MHC CABLE (MK17A1) (Continued)

• a. Pay out MHC cable (14) MHC crane


completely and inspect for crushing, cable is
sharp bends, and abrasions. damaged or
excessively
worn.

2-164
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.4 MHC CABLE (MK17A1) (Continued)

• b. Inspect MHC cable (14) for Cable has more


broken wires or kinks. than three
broken wires
per 3-inch
section on same
strand. The
maximum
number of
broken wires
shall not occur
in any two
consecutive 3-
inch sections of
cable. That is,
if six wires are
broken in one
3-inch section
of cable, none
would be
allowed in the
next
consecutive 3-
inch section.

2-165
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-6. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:
Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed.
Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
54.5 MHC OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN BOX (MK17A1)

• a. Check security of electrical


connectors on overload shutdown
box (15).

• b. Inspect electrical wiring for Wiring is


cracking, fraying, or chafing. frayed, cracking
or excessively
worn.

2-166
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-7. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (Special Purpose Kit)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure:Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled
Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS

The following checks for the special


purpose kits shall not render the
vehicle inoperable. Only the kit will
be reported as inoperable.

55 MACHINE GUN MOUNT

• Check machine gun mount (1) for Gun mount will


proper operation and lubrication. not rotate or
Refer to TM 08686A-13&P/l. lock into
position.

2-167
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-7. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (Special Purpose Kits) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
56 EXTENDED PINTLE

• Check front and rear extended pintles Pintle has


(2 and 3) for cracks or broken welds. cracks or
Make sure hook is secure and locking broken welds,
mechanism operates properly. or locking
mechanism is
damaged.

2-168
TM 08780B-10

Table 2-7. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And


Services (Special Purpose Kits) (Continued)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within


designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation


W-Weekly M-Monthly

For Readiness
Item Interval Item To Be Inspected Procedure: Reporting
No Check for and have repaired, filled Equipment Is
or adjusted as needed. Not Ready/
B D A W M Available If:
57 REAR BODY TOW UNIT

• a. Check tow unit (4) for Tow unit has


cracks or broken welds. cracks or
broken welds.

• b. Check tow unit for damaged Air lines or


air lines (5). Inspect glad hands (6) seals are
for missing or rotted seals. damaged,
missing, or
rotting.

2-169
TM 08780-10

Section III. Operation Under Normal Conditions

2-13. MK48 OPERATION

a. Entering Cab and Seat Adjustment

WARNING

• DO NOT USE STEERING WHEEL FOR A HAND


GRIP TO ENTER THE LVS CAB WHEN ENGINE IS
RUNNING. USE OF STEERING WHEEL FOR A
HAND GRIP WILL CAUSE SUDDEN VIOLENT
JERKING OF THE CAB IF PARKING BRAKE IS NOT
ENGAGED. THIS MAY RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY
TO OPERATOR AND CREW.

• BEFORE STARTING VEHICLE, MAKE CERTAIN


THAT SEAT ADJUSTMENT ALLOWS READY REACH
TO ALL CONTROLS.

(1) Enter cab using step (1) and grab handles


(2).

2-170
TM 08780-10

(2) Adjust seat height as needed with height


adjustment lever (4).

(3) Adjust seat forward or backwards as needed


using adjustment control (5).

NOTE
Operator should be able to easily reach trailer handbrake control
lever (18) with seat adjusted and seatbelt and shoulder harness
on.

(4) Buckle seatbelt and shoulder harness


together by pulling on strap (6) and engaging buckle (7). Pull on
strap (8) to tighten seatbelt and shoulder harness. Make certain
seat adjustment allows easy reach of trailer handbrake control lever
(18) and parking brake valve (10).

2-171
TM 08780-10

(5) To release seatbelt and shoulder harness pull


up on buckle latch, (9).

NOTE
• LVSA1 series vehicles have new style 3-point seat belts.
Perform steps (6) thru (10) if operating LVSA1 series
vehicle only.

• The seat belt/shoulder belt is two belts combined together.


The belt below the buckle is the seat belt, the belt above
the buckle is the shoulder belt.

(6) Push seat belt/shoulder belt clip (10) into


buckle (11) until a click is heard.

(7) Place seat belt (12) as low on hips as


possible.

NOTE
Seat belt does not have self-adjusting lock. Take slack out of seat
belt by pulling on shoulder belt end. Adjust shoulder belt until
snug against chest (no more than one inch away).

2-172
TM 08780-10

(8) Pull shoulder belt (13) until the seat belt (12)
fits snug at drivers hips.

(9) Adjust the shoulder belt (13) length by


releasing latch (14) and adjusting shoulder belt no more than one
inch away from chest. Engage latch to hold adjustment.

(10) To release the seat belt/shoulder belt clip


(10), push in release button (15) and pull clip from buckle (11).

b. Starting the Engine Above 32° F (0°C)

NOTE
• For starting the engine below 32° F (0°C), refer to
paragraph 2-13, section c, below. For starting the engine
in extremely cold weather, refer to Section IV, paragraph
2-33, Operation Under Unusual Conditions.

• Before attempting to operate vehicle, be sure to perform


the preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS)
in Table 2-1 thru 2-5. Also, you should be familiar with
all controls and indicators in paragraph 2-1.

2-173
TM 08780-10

(1) Apply parking brake by pulling out on


PARKING BRAKE valve (10).

NOTE
LOCK button (11) on transmission shifter handle must be
depressed when shifting between ranges.

(2) Place transmission shifter (12) in neutral (N)


position.

WARNING

BEFORE STARTING VEHICLE BE SURE ALL PERSONNEL


ARE CLEAR OF ARTICULATION JOINT AND OF THE
VEHICLE.

2-174
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

FOR LVS MK15A1 AND MK17A1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY,


ENSURE CRANE POWER SWITCH IS IN THE "OFF"
POSITION PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OVERLOAD
SHUTDOWN SYSTEM.

NOTE
If air pressure in the brake system is low, a warning buzzer and
light in vehicle cab will activate. This is normal for initial starts.
Buzzer and light will shut off once air pressure builds to a safe
pressure for brake operation.

(3) Turn engine START switch (13) to START


position. Release switch (13) once engine starts, allowing switch
to return to ON position.

2-175
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

• IF ENGINE FAILS TO START WITHIN 30 SECONDS,


TURN STARTER SWITCH TO OFF AND ALLOW
STARTER MOTOR TO COOL AT LEAST TWO
MINUTES BEFORE TRYING AGAIN. FAILURE TO
DO SO COULD RESULT IN THE STARTER BEING
DAMAGED.

• IF STARTER DISENGAGES, WAIT UNTIL ENGINE


STOPS FIRING AND STARTER STOPS SPINNING
BEFORE TRYING TO START ENGINE AGAIN.

NOTE
Upon startup, the engine must be operated at low idle (690-700
rpm) for one minute.

(4) If engine does not start on first try, engine


START switch must be turned to OFF before making next attempt.

(5) Check the following gauges for their proper


readings:

• Oil pressure (14) reads 5-49 psi (34.47-337.85 kPa) at idle.


• Battery gauge (15) reads 26-28 volts.
• Water temperature (16) reads 160° - 220° F (71° - 104° C)
after warmed up.
• Air pressure gauge (17), indicator light (14) and low air
buzzer will stop at approximately 65 psi (448.175 kPa).

c. Starting the Engine Below 32° F (0° C)

NOTE
Before attempting to operate the vehicle, be sure to perform the
"B"-Before Operation Preventive Maintenance Checks and
Services in tables 2-1 thru 2-7, as necessary.

2-176
TM 08780-10

(1) Apply parking brake by pulling out parking


brake valve (10).

(2) Place transmission shifter (12) in neutral (N)


position.

CAUTION

FOR LVS MK15A1 AND MK17A1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY,


ENSURE CRANE POWER SWITCH IS IN "OFF" POSITION
PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN
SYSTEM.

(3) Turn engine switch (13) to ON position.

CAUTION

DO NOT PRESS ETHER START BUTTON MORE THAN


THREE TIMES IN A SINGLE STARTING ATTEMPT TO
PREVENT SEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE.

NOTE
• If air pressure in the brake system is low, a warning
buzzer and light in vehicle will activate. This is normal
for initial starts. Buzzer and light will shut off once air
pressure builds to a safe pressure for brake operation.

• Upon startup, the engine must be operated at low idle


(690-700 rpm) for two minutes.

(4) Press ETHER START button (19) once for


3 seconds and release. Wait 3 seconds more, then turn ENGINE
switch (13) to START for about 10 seconds or until engine starts.

2-177
TM 08780-10

(5) If engine fails to start, return engine switch


to OFF position, then to ON position, press ETHER START
button (19) for 3 seconds, wait 3 seconds, then press ETHER
START button for 3 more seconds. Wait 3 seconds more, then
turn ENGINE switch (13) to START for about 10 seconds or until
engine starts.

(6) If engine fails to start, return engine switch


to OFF position, then to ON position, press ETHER START
button (19) for 3 more seconds, wait 3 seconds, press ETHER
START button for 3 more seconds. Wait 3 seconds, then press
ETHER START button again for 3 more seconds. Wait 3 seconds
more, then turn ENGINE switch (13) to START for about 10
seconds or until engine starts.

(7) If engine fails to start, repeat step (6) up to


five times. If engine does not start after these starting attempts,
notify Organizational Maintenance.

(8) After engine starts, continue normal


operating instructions as in section b, step (5).

2-178
TM 08780-10

d. Driving. After starting engine and monitoring all


instruments for normal indication, the vehicle may be operated as
follows:

(1) Turn on necessary lighting and controls as


conditions require. Adjust seat, mirrors and fasten seatbelt.

CAUTION

SHIFTING OF TRANSFER CASE MUST BE DONE ONLY


WHEN THE TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL (N) AND
VEHICLE IS STOPPED. OTHERWISE, DAMAGE TO
TRANSFER CASE WILL RESULT.

(2) Select LOW or DIRECT (HIGH) range on


transfer shifter (20) as required by driving conditions. DIRECT
(HIGH) range is used during normal highway type driving
conditions, city hauling, short runs and for stop-and-go type
driving. Low range is used for severe load and grade conditions,
off highway operation, or where creeping speed is needed.
Shifting must be done only when the vehicle is stopped and
transmission is in neutral.

NOTE
Transfer shifter (20) should shift smoothly from LOW to
DIRECT (HIGH) with transmission in neutral (N) range.
However, if shifting is hard to do, place transmission in drive (D)
range until engagement is felt. Return transmission to neutral
(N) range. Transfer shifter (20) should then shift smoothly. If
necessary, repeat the neutral-drive shifting until transfer shifts
easily.

WARNING

DO NOT ALLOW THE VEHICLE TO COAST IN NEUTRAL.


THIS CAN RESULT IN SEVERE TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
AND UNSAFE OPERATION BECAUSE ENGINE BRAKING
IS NOT AVAILABLE DURING NEUTRAL COASTS.

2-179
TM 08780-10

(3) With engine idling, depress lock button (11)


and select proper gear range with shifter (12). Each drive range is
as described in table 2-8.

2-180
TM 08780-10

TABLE 2-8. TRANSMISSION SHIFT RANGES

GEAR DESCRIPTIONS
R Reverse (R). To move vehicle
backward, idle the engine and shift
the selector to reverse position.
Depressing accelerator will then
cause the vehicle to back up.
Completely stop the vehicle when
shifting from forward to reverse or
reverse to forward.
N Neutral (N). Place the shift selector
at the neutral position before
starting the engine. Shifting from
neutral should be done at engine
idle. Apply vehicle parking brakes
and shift to neutral any time the
engine will be running while the
operator is not at the controls.
D Drive (D). The transmission will start in first and
automatically upshift at the proper speeds thru all gears.
Downshifts also will occur automatically in relation to
speed and throttle position.
D-3 Drive (3). In this range, the transmission will start in first
and automatically upshift, at the proper speeds, to third gear.
D-2 Drive (2). In this range, the transmission will start in first
and automatically upshift, at the proper speed, to second
gear.
D-1 Drive (1). In this range, the transmission will start in first
gear. No automatic upshift will occur unless the engine's
governed speed is exceeded.

(4) Select DRIVE LINE LOCKUP Lever (21)


position, as required by driving conditions. Drive line lockup
positions are described as follows:

2-181
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

• DO NOT OPERATE IN LOCK UNLESS TIRE


SLIPPAGE IS EXPECTED.

• SHIFT ONLY WITH VEHICLE STOPPED.

• ENGAGING AXLE LOCKUP OR XFR (TRANSFER)


CASE LOCKUP WITH VEHICLE IN MOTION OR
WITH WHEELS SPINNING WILL RESULT IN
DRIVELINE DAMAGE.

(a) Select UNLOCK position for


NORMAL DRIVING CONDITIONS.

(b) Select either AXLE LOCKUP or


XFR CASE LOCKUP position for slippery conditions or where
wheel spin is expected.

(c) When AXLE LOCKUP or XFR


CASE LOCKUP does not provide sufficient traction, stop vehicle
and shift to the alternate lockup position.

(d) Select XFR CASE LOCKUP


position when rear body unit is uncoupled.

(5) Release parking brake by pushing


PARKING BRAKE (10) valve IN. The vehicle is ready to drive.

2-182
TM 08780-10

e. Basic Driving Guidelines

WARNING

INCREASED EFFORT WILL BE REQUIRED TO TURN


STEERING WHEEL IF THERE IS A FAILURE OF
HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM OR THE ENGINE STOPS
RUNNING. STOP VEHICLE AS SOON AS ROAD
CONDITIONS PERMIT. OPERATING THE VEHICLE WITH
IMPAIRED STEERING COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH.

(1) Check gauges often to be sure they are


registering within normal operating range.

(2) Avoid oversteering. The steering wheel


should not be held at full turn for more than 10 seconds. Oil over
heating and power steering damage can result. Become familiar
with steering characteristics of vehicle before attempting
maneuvers in limited space.

2-183
TM 08780-10

f. Highway Driving

WARNING

SPEED LIMITS POSTED ON CURVES REFLECT SPEEDS


THAT ARE CONSIDERED SAFE FOR AUTOMOBILES.
HEAVY TRUCKS WITH A HIGH CENTER OF GRAVITY
CAN ROLL OVER AT THESE SPEED LIMITS. USE
CAUTION AND REDUCE YOUR SPEED BELOW THE
POSTED LIMIT BEFORE ENTERING A CURVE. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN VEHICLE CRASH AND
INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

When weather and traffic conditions permit, maintain legal


highway speed in gear range D (Drive). The engine will run below
governed speed of 2100 RPM and fuel consumption will be less
than at higher speeds.

g. Driving Up Steep Grades

(1) The engine works hardest when carrying a


load uphill. Proper use of gear ranges will minimize stress on the
engine.

(2) Unless uphill grade is extreme, begin in gear


range D (Drive). If there is enough power for a safe and
satisfactory road speed, remain in D range and allow transmission
to shift automatically.

(3) If the uphill grade causes a steady decrease


in road speed and engine RPM, the transmission can be manually
downshifted to a lower gear. The following are recommended
speeds for downshifting. Do not downshift above these speeds:

Gear Range Maximum Vehicle Speed


D to 3 35 MPH
3 to 2 24 MPH
2 to 1 13 MPH

2-184
TM 08780-10

Once grade is crested, return shifter to D (Drive) position.

h. Driving Down Steep Grades

(1) Driving a loaded vehicle down steep grades


requires the operator to use all of the vehicle braking components
available to maintain a safe road speed and engine RPM.

(2) Use the engine to aid braking by manually


downshifting transmission to next lower gear range. If the vehicle
is exceeding the maximum speed for that gear range, use the
service brakes and Jacobs brake to slow the vehicle down so the
transmission can be downshifted safely. At no time should engine
speed go above 2100 RPM. See section G, step (3) for
recommended speeds for downshifting. Do not downshift above
these speeds.

(3) Plan ahead to use the Jacobs brake for


additional speed control when driving in an area known to have
steep downgrades. See paragraph 2-13, section i.

i. Using the Jacobs Brake

WARNING

APPLY ENGINE BRAKE ONLY WHEN VEHICLE TIRES


HAVE GOOD TRACTION. APPLICATION OF ENGINE
BRAKE ON SLICK SURFACES MAY RESULT IN AN
ACCIDENT THROUGH LOSS OF VEHICLE CONTROL.

CAUTION

• THE JACOBS BRAKE SHOULD ONLY BE USED


WITH THE TRANSFER CASE IN LOW RANGE
WHEN CONDITIONS EXIST REQUIRING USE OF
JACOBS BRAKE. FULL TIME OPERATION OF
JACOBS BRAKE WITH TRANSFER CASE IN LOW
RANGE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
POWERTRAIN.

2-185
TM 08780-10

• DO NOT ALLOW ENGINE SPEED TO GO ABOVE


2100 RPM WHEN GOING DOWN A GRADE.
DAMAGE TO ENGINE WILL RESULT.

• THE ENGINE BRAKE LOSES EFFECTIVENESS


WHEN BEING PUSHED BY A LOADED VEHICLE
DOWN A GRADE. USE SERVICE BRAKES AND
MANUALLY DOWNSHIFT RANGE SELECTOR AS
NECESSARY ON LONG GRADES TO KEEP VEHICLE
SPEED UNDER CONTROL.

(1) Set Jacobs Brake HIGH/LOW switch (22) to


LOW. Turn switch (23) to ON. Jacobs Brake indicator (24) will
light when brake is turned on.

(2) Engine brake will automatically engage to


slow vehicle when accelerator is released.

(3) If more engine braking is needed, turn


HIGH/LOW switch (22) to HIGH position.

(4) When no engine braking is needed, turn


HIGH/LOW switch (22) on LOW and turn ON/OFF switch (23) to
OFF.

2-186
TM 08780-10

j. Using Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve

WARNING

DO NOT USE TRAILER BRAKES (25) FOR PARKING, USE


PARKING BRAKES (10). TRAILER BRAKES COULD
RELEASE ALLOWING THE VEHICLE TO MOVE POSSIBLY
CAUSING INJURY.

CAUTION

AFTER USE, ALWAYS RETURN TRAILER BRAKE HAND


CONTROL ARM (18) TO OFF POSITION (ALL THE WAY
FORWARD) OR TRAILER BRAKES WILL DRAG, CAUSING
EXCESSIVE WEAR.

(1) The trailer brake hand control (18) will


apply trailer service brakes only.

(2) Apply trailer brakes by pulling hand control


arm (18) to the rear. Release brakes by pushing hand control arm
(18) forward.

2-187
TM 08780-10

k. Off-Highway Driving

(1) Before entering an area where poor traction


conditions are likely to occur, bring vehicle to a complete stop,
place transmission in neutral and move lock lever (21) from
UNLOCK to the AXLE LOCKUP position. Indicator (26) will
come on when in this position.

(2) If the axle lockup position does not supply


the necessary traction, bring vehicle to a complete stop. Shift lock
lever to XFR CASE LOCKUP. Indicator (27) will come on in this
position.

(3) After regaining normal traction, bring


vehicle to complete stop. Move lock lever (21) to the UNLOCK
position. Indicator (26 or 27) will then shut off. It may take a few
feet of slow forward travel before all sliding clutches disengage.

I. Parking and Engine Shut Down

(1) To park vehicle, come to a complete stop


with the front wheels as straight as possible.

(2) Place transmission shifter (12) in neutral


(N).

(3) Pull parking brake valve (10) OUT to


engage parking brakes.

2-188
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

BEFORE SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, RUN AT 800-1000


RPM FOR 4 TO 5 MINUTES TO ALLOW TURBOCHARGER
TO SLOW DOWN. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN
TURBOCHARGER DAMAGE.

WARNING

• RELEASE STEERING WHEEL AND KEEP HANDS


CLEAR OF THE STEERING WHEEL UNTIL ENGINE
HAS COMPLETELY STOPPED RUNNING.
STEERING WHEEL MAY TURN SUDDENLY AND
CAB WILL JERK AFTER SHUT DOWN.

• OPERATOR AND CREW MEMBERS MUST LOOK


FOR AND DIRECT ALL PERSONNEL TO STAND
CLEAR OF THE CAB UNTIL ENGINE IS FULLY
STOPPED. CAB MAY JERK VIOLENTLY MOMENTS
AFTER ENGINE HAS STOPPED.

(4) Hold engine stop switch (28) down until


engine stops. Buzzer will sound and low oil/water indicator (29)
will come on. Turn engine START switch (13) to the OFF
position. Turn off all controls and lighting.

(5) After engine shutdown, turn steering wheel


slightly in each direction. This will relieve pressure in the steering
system.

2-189
TM 08780-10

m. Slave Starting Procedure

(1) Position left side of slaving vehicle next to


the left side of vehicle being started. Stop engine of slaving
vehicle.

(2) Remove cover (29) from slave receptacle


(30) on both vehicles. Connect slave cable (31) to slaving vehicle.
Connect other end to slaved vehicle.

(3) Start engine of slaving vehicle. Refer to


section a.

2-190
TM 08780-10

(4) After engine starts and is running smoothly,


disconnect slave cable (31) from slave receptacles (30) on both
vehicles. Install cover (29) and stow cable (31).

(5) Observe battery indicator, if indicator reads


less than 24 volts in either vehicle, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

n. Priming Fuel System

NOTE
It may be necessary to prime the fuel system if the vehicle has
run out of fuel.

(1) Push in knob (32) and turn counterclockwise


until knob (32) can be pulled out.

(2) Push and pull knob (32) on priming pump


(33) until a resistance is felt.

(3) Push knob (32) in and turn clockwise until


locked.

CAUTION

IF ENGINE FAILS TO START WITHIN 30 SECONDS, TURN


STARTER SWITCH OFF AND ALLOW STARTER MOTOR
TO COOL AT LEAST TWO MINUTES BEFORE TRYING
AGAIN. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN THE
STARTER BEING DAMAGED.

(4) Attempt to start engine. Refer to section b in


this paragraph. If engine fails to start, repeat steps (1) thru (3) as
necessary.

2-191
TM 08780-10

2-14. OPERATION OF VEHICLE LIGHTS

a. Operating Lighting Systems. The following


illustrations explain the functions and positions for operation of the
lighting system.

Depending on operating conditions, switch (1) must be placed in


one of five positions: STOP LIGHTS, SERVICE DRIVE, OFF,
BLACKOUT MARKER, or BLACKOUT DRIVE. Then switch
(3) must be turned to provide desired lighting.

Operate switch as follows:

2-192
TM 08780-10

NOTE
To move main switch (1) from OFF to any ON position except
blackout marker, unlock switch (2) must be lifted to "unlock"
position.

(1) Pull unlock switch (2) up and move main


switch (1) to desired function.

(2) Release unlock switch (2). This will lock


main switch (1) in position.

(3) Move auxiliary switch (3) to desired


function.

Service Drive

2-193
TM 08780-10

Off

2-194
TM 08780-10

b. Operating Auxiliary Lights. The following lights


will be operational only when the main switch (1) is in the Service
Drive or Stop Light positions:

All Auxiliary Lights


• Clearance Lights
• Dome Lights
• Work Lights
• Beacon Light

2-195
TM 08780-10

2-15. POWER UNIT AND TRAILER SEPARATION

a. Uncoupling Power Unit From Trailer

WARNING

AFTER POWER UNIT AND TRAILER ARE SEPARATED,


POWER UNIT MUST BE OPERATED WITH EXTREME
CARE. DRIVE ONLY ON LEVEL TERRAIN AT SPEEDS
LESS THAN 5 MPH (8.0 KM). DO NOT APPLY BRAKES
SUDDENLY OR DRIVE OVER UNEVEN TERRAIN. POWER
UNIT MAY ROLL FORWARD ONTO ITS CAB.

(1) Select a firm, level surface to work on.


Allow enough room to maneuver power unit after separation.

(2) Apply parking brake valve (1) and place


transmission shifter (2) in (N) neutral.

(3) Turn off engine and place transfer case


shifter (3) in neutral. This is halfway between DIRECT (HIGH)
and LOW range.

(4) On MK17 trailers, lower the rear landing leg


(4) as follows:

2-196
TM 08780-10

WARNING

REAR LANDING LEG IS HEAVY. CARE MUST BE TAKEN


WHEN SWINGING INTO POSITION TO AVOID INJURY.

(a) Remove quick release retainer (5)


and pull pin (6) out.

(b) Lower landing leg (4) and insert pin


(6) in rear bracket hole (7). Install retainer (5) in pin (6).

(c) Remove quick release retainer (8)


and pull pin (9) out. Allow leg (10) to lower to ground.

(d) Adjust leg (10) so holes align. Insert


pin (9) in leg and install retainer (8).

2-197
TM 08780-10

WARNING

LANDING LEGS ARE HEAVY. STAY CLEAR OF LEG


WHEN SWINGING INTO POSITION TO AVOID INJURY.

(7) Lower landing legs (11) into place as


follows:

(a) Remove clip (12). Pull crank handle


(13) from its stowed position and place in cranking position.

(b) Turn crank handle (13) to loosen


landing leg (11).

(c) Have helper raise landing leg (11)


out of its stowage bracket (14). Turn crank handle (13) to allow
landing leg (11) to clear bracket (14). Lower leg until it is just
above the ground.

(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) for


remaining leg.

NOTE
• Install support braces between landing legs first.

• Flat side of support braces go against mounting pins.

2-198
TM 08780-10

(e) On the MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1


and MK17/17A1, remove support braces (15) from right frame
rail. On the MK16/16A1, remove support braces (15) in front of
the winch. Install braces (15) between landing legs (11) as shown.

(f) Turn crank handle (13) until support


pad (16) touches ground. Then turn crank handle three more turns
to support trailer's load.

CAUTION

• IF TRAILER IS HEAVILY LOADED AT THE REAR,


IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO PLACE SUPPORTS
BEHIND NO. 4 AXLE. THIS WILL PREVENT
TRAILER FROM TIPPING BACK AFTER
SEPARATION.

2-199
TM 08780-10

• AFTER ALL AIR LINES HAVE BEEN SEPARATED,


MAKE SURE THEY ARE IN FRONT OF THE
PROPELLER SHAFT SUPPORT CHAIN. AIR LINES
COULD CATCH ON CHAIN AND CAUSE DAMAGE
TO LINES.

(8) Separate all airlines (17) by pulling back on


quick disconnect sleeves (18). Cover all openings with plugs (19).

(9) Unscrew electrical cable (20), ABS cable


(21) and separate from receptacle. Cover receptacle opening with
cover (22).

NOTE
• Clean quick disconnect sleeves with solvent before
disconnecting.

• Only two hydraulic lines are present on the MK17/17A1.

(10) On the MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1 and


MK17/17A1, disconnect hydraulic lines (22) by pulling back on

2-200
TM 08780-10

quick disconnect sleeves (23). Clean ends of hydraulic lines (22)


and inside of quick disconnect sleeves (23) with solvent. Cover
openings with plugs (24).

(11) Remove eight nuts (25), lockwashers (26)


and capscrews (27) to separate propeller shafts (28 and 29). Allow
propeller shaft (29) to rest on support chain (30).

WARNING

FAILURE TO USE LOCKOUT STRUTS COULD CAUSE


POWER UNIT TO ROLL FORWARD ONTO ITS CAB AFTER
SEPARATION.

2-201
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Lockout struts are located on each side of the MK48/48A1 just
above No. 2 Axle.

(12) Working at No. 2 Axle, install both lockout


struts (31) as follows:

(a) Remove sensor cap (32).

(b) Remove clips (33) and pins (34)


from struts (31).

WARNING

DO NOT OVEREXTEND LOCKOUT STRUT TURNBUCKLES.


THE STRUT COULD SEPARATE DURING UNCOUPLING
MANEUVERS.

(c) Swing struts (31) off bracket (35).


Adjust turnbuckle (36) so that strut (31) will reach axle bracket
(37) and clips (33).

(d) Insert pins (34) to hold strut (31) in


brackets (37).

2-202
TM 08780-10

(e) Turn turnbuckle (36) clockwise to


eliminate slack. Tighten turnbuckle again one more complete turn
with an adjustable wrench. Keep adjustment of both sides equal.

WARNING

TO PREVENT SEVERE INJURY, KEEP ALL PERSONNEL


AWAY FROM VEHICLE. DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO
STAND NEAR ARTICULATION JOINT WHEN STARTING
ENGINE OR WHEN SEPARATING POWER UNIT FROM
TRAILER.

(13) Remove five nuts (38) and eight capscrews


(39) from each side of the vehicle.

2-203
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

ENSURE ALL AIR LINES, HYDRAULIC LINES AND


ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ARE COMPLETELY
DISCONNECTED FROM REAR MODULE PRIOR TO
SEPARATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(14) Start engine and build air pressure to 120


psi.

(15) Release PARKING BRAKE valve (1).

(16) Place transfer case shifter (3) in LOW range.

(17) Place Drive Line Lockup control (40) in


TRANSFER CASE LOCKUP.

(18) Place transmission shifter (2) in D - 1.

CAUTION

DO NOT FORCE SEPARATION BY INCREASING ENGINE


RPM ABOVE 1000. IF SUDDEN SEPARATION OCCURS
AND BRAKES ARE APPLIED HARD, THE POWER UNIT
MAY ROLL FORWARD ONTO ITS CAB.

2-204
TM 08780-10

(19) Slowly increase engine speed to 800 - 900


rpm while turning steering wheel back and forth 1/4 turn each way.
Movement of steering wheel will cause articulation joint to move.
This aids separation.

(20) If power unit will not separate from trailer,


perform the following procedures:

(a) Make sure all nuts (38) and


capscrews (39) are removed.

(b) Change adjustments slightly on


lockout struts (31) or landing gear (11). Attempt to pull away after
each adjustment change.

CAUTION

MAKE SURE ALL AIR, ELECTRICAL AND HYDRAULIC


LINES ARE CLEAR OF COUPLING MATING SURFACE
BEFORE BACKING UP.

b. Coupling Power Unit To Trailer

(1) Clean mating pins (41) and sockets (42).


Then coat stinger (43) with grease (item 4, appendix D).

2-205
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

DO NOT PULL HYDRAULIC SELECTOR VALVE OUT


WHEN SEPARATED FROM TRAILER. DAMAGE TO
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM WILL RESULT.

NOTE
It may be necessary to adjust the Landing Legs of the trailer to
aid in alignment.

(2) Start engine. Back power unit up to trailer


until pins (41) engage socket (42). Turn steering wheel slightly to
aid alignment. Continue to back power unit up until pins (41) are
fully seated.

(3) After pins (41) are fully seated, shift


transmission shifter (2) to (N) neutral, apply parking brake valve
(1) and stop engine.

2-206
TM 08780-10

(4) Place transfer case shifter (3) in neutral.

(5) Place DRIVE LINE LOCKUP control (40)


in UNLOCK POSITION.

(6) Install eight capscrews (39) and five nuts


(38) on each side of the vehicle. Tighten capscrews (39) as much
as possible. Have Organizational Maintenance lubricate and
torque capscrews to 375 foot-pounds (508.5 N*m) as soon as
possible.

(7) Connect propeller shafts (28 and 29). Install


and tighten eight capscrews (27), lockwashers (26) and nuts (25).
Tighten nuts securely. Have Organizational Maintenance replace
lockwashers (26) as soon as possible.

2-207
TM 08780-10

(8) Drain all air reservoirs. Refer to paragraph


3-5.

(9) Remove plugs (19) and connect all airlines


(17). Remove cover (22) from receptacle opening and place in
stowed position as shown.

(10) Screw electrical cable (20) and ABS cable


(21) onto receptacles.

NOTE
• Ensure quick disconnect couplings are clean before
connecting.

• Only two hydraulic lines are present on the MK17/17A1.

(11) On the MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1 and


MK17/17A1, remove plugs (24) and connect hydraulic lines (22).

2-208
TM 08780-10

(12) Stow lockout struts as follows:

(a) Eliminate tension from struts (31) by


turning turnbuckle (36) counterclockwise.

(b) Remove clip (33) and pin (34).

(c) Swing strut (31) up and adjust


turnbuckle (36) so strut will fit on stowage bracket (35). Install pin
(34) and clip (33).

(d) Connect sensor caps (32).

(13) Stow landing leg as follows:

2-209
TM 08780-10

WARNING

TO AVOID INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF LEG WHEN LIFTING


INTO POSITION IN CASE LEG ACCIDENTALLY SWINGS
DOWNWARD.

(a) Remove support braces (15) and


stow in position as shown.

(b) Turn crank handle (13) to fully


retract landing leg (11).

2-210
TM 08780-10

(c) Have helper raise landing leg (11) up


to its bracket (14). Support pad (16) must be hooked on bracket
(14). Turn crank handle (13) to secure landing leg (11) in its
bracket (14).

CAUTION

IF EXCESSIVE FORCE IS NECESSARY TO STOW CRANK


HANDLE, RETRACT LANDING LEG (11) BY TURNING
CRANK HANDLE (13) BACK ONE TURN.

(d) Place crank handle (13) in its stowed


position. Install clip (12).

(e) Repeat steps (b) thru (d) to stow


remaining landing leg.

(14) On MK17/17A1 trailer, stow the rear


landing leg as follows:

WARNING

TO AVOID INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF LEG WHEN LIFTING


INTO POSITION IN CASE LEG ACCIDENTALLY SWINGS
DOWNWARD.

2-211
TM 08780-10

(a) Remove retainer (8) and pin (9).


Push leg (10) up into stowed position and install pin (9) and
retainer (8).

(b) Remove retainer (5) and pin (6).


Push leg (10) up and install pin (6) in rear bracket hole.

(c) Install retainer (5).

CAUTION

ENSURE ALL HYDRAULIC LINES ARE CONNECTED TO


REAR MODULE PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE. FAILURE
TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.

2-212
TM 08780-10

(15) Start engine and build air pressure to 120


psi. Leave parking brake valve (1) set.

(16) Check turn signal, brake and tail light


operation on the trailer if tactical conditions allow.

(17) Check lockout sensor light (44) to verify


that struts are in stowed position.

(18) Place transfer case shifter (3) in DIRECT


(HIGH) range.

(19) Release parking brake valve (1). Check for


proper service brake operation before driving.

2-16. MK15 CRANE OPERATION

a. General Description. While the vehicle is moving,


the Material Handling Crane (MHC) is secured in its folded
position by a pin. When unfolded, the crane has four basic
functions. They are the main boom, folding boom and two
extension booms. The main boom column can rotate 350 degrees,

2-213
TM 08780-10

with a 10 degree dead spot at the main control panel. The crane
can lift 9,000 pounds (4,082.4 kg) when extended 15 feet (4.512
M) outward (see lifting capacity chart located at control panel for
further information). The crane is operated by hydraulics supplied
by the MK48/48A1 through the main control panel. The main
control panel provides the controls to manually operate all
functions of the crane and stabilizers. Each control is proportional.
The more pressure, the faster the selected crane movement.
Besides the main controls, the crane may also be operated by a
remote control unit with the same operating functions, except for
stabilizer controls, as the main control. Left and right stabilizers
are provided to stabilize, support and level the vehicle while the
crane is operating. An additional set of stabilizer controls is
provided, separate from the main control panel, on the left side of
the vehicle. Built within the hydraulic system of the crane are
several safety features that protect the equipment and operating
personnel. They are as follows:

• Check valves, in the event of pressure loss due to hydraulic


line failure, prevent a load from falling.

• A suspended load on the crane can be lowered when


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48/48A1 if external hydraulic
lines from another MK48/48A1/15 Wrecker/Recovery vehicle are
attached to the crane's trailer. Should a hydraulic failure occur in
crane's trailer, the suspended load can be lowered by adjusting the
cylinder hold valve. This procedure should only be done by
Organizational Maintenance personnel.

• The crane is equipped with an overload protection system


that prevents lifting greater loads, at a given distance, than the
crane can handle. All functions that decrease overload remain
functional.

2-214
TM 08780-10

b. Pre-Operational Safety Checks

(1) When possible, position vehicle on firm


level ground.

(2) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N),


pull parking brake valve (2) OUT.

(3) Shutdown engine. Turn engine start switch


to ON. Engine's warning buzzer will sound. This is normal.

2-215
TM 08780-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.

(4) Pull selector valve (3), mounted on right


fender of power unit, to AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.
Make sure valve is fully engaged.

2-216
TM 08780-10

(5) Remove remote control (6) and cable (7)


from stowage compartment (8).

(6) Connect one end of the remote control cable


(7) to receptacle (12) and secure with latch (13). Close stowage
compartment door.

2-217
TM 08780-10

(7) Connect other end of cable (7) to remote


control receptacle (20) and secure with latch (21)

(8) Turn control switch (5) to REMOTE. Red


indicator light (22) on remote control (6) should be ON indicating
control is ready for operation.

NOTE
One of the two deadman switches (23) must be depressed to
activate remote control.

(9) Depress one of the two deadman switches


(23) on remote control. Green indicator light (24) should be ON
indicating connection between the remote control and main control
panel has been made.

(10) Depress one of the deadman switches (23)


and hold. Check that control levers (14, 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19) are
locked into the center (neutral) position and that these levers are in
a straight line. If any lever will not lock or does not line up, notify
Organizational Maintenance.

(11) While depressing deadman switch (23),


move control levers (25, 26, 27, 28, 29 and 30) of the remote
control in both directions. Make sure main control panel levers
agree with the remote control and are functioning properly. If
controls do not agree or are not functioning properly, notify
Organizational Maintenance.

(12) Turn control switch (5) OFF.

NOTE
Any failure of the remote control Pre-Operational check will not
prevent the use of crane. This, however, prevents the use of any
remote control operation until repairs have been made.

2-218
TM 08780-10

c. Deploying Stabilizers

NOTE
All crane controls, manual and remote, are proportional
controls. The more travel of the control, the faster the selected
crane movement.

(1) Start engine and turn control switch (5) to


MANUAL.

2-219
TM 08780-10

WARNING

TO AVOID BEING CRUSHED, STAY CLEAR OF


STABILIZERS WHILE IN OPERATION.

(2) Using control station (31) at right rear of


trailer, deploy right stabilizer as follows:

(a) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve


(32) in the UNLOCK position.

(b) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (33), slowly extend outrigger beam (34) fully.

(c) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve


(32) in the LOCK position.

2-220
TM 08780-10

(d) Place Stabilizer Cylinder lock valve


(35) in the UNLOCK position.

(e) Pull retaining pin (36) to free quick


release cable (37).

NOTE
There must be a minimum of one to two inches of slack in cable
to allow stabilizer to rotate into the working position.

(f) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (33), slowly extend stabilizer cylinder (38) until there is
approximately one to two inches (25 to 50 mm) of slack in quick
release cable (37).

2-221
TM 08780-10

WARNING

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF


STABILIZER WHEN PULLING TOWARDS REAR OF
VEHICLE.

(g) Remove quick release pin (39) from


vertical stabilizer lock pin (40). Remove lock pin (40). Pull
stabilizer towards rear of vehicle to start stabilizer in the downward
position.

(h) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (33), slowly retract stabilizer cylinder (38) fully. Stabilizer
will rotate into position.

2-222
TM 08780-10

(i) Using cable release handle (41),


remove quick release cable (37) from stabilizer cylinder (38).

(j) Install stabilizer cylinder lock pin


(40) and quick release pin (39).

(k) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (33), extend stabilizer cylinder (38) until it is
approximately three inches (76 mm) above the ground.

(3) At main control panel (4), deploy left


stabilizer as follows:

(a) Place STABILIZER EXT LOCK


VALVE (42) in the UNLOCK position.

2-223
TM 08780-10

(b) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (43), slowly extend outrigger beam (44) fully.

(c) Place STABILIZER EXT LOCK


VALVE (42) in the LOCK position,

(d) Place vertical stabilizer cylinder lock


valve (45) in the UNLOCK position.

(e) Pull retaining pin (46) to free quick


release cable (47).

2-224
TM 08780-10

NOTE
There must be a minimum of one to two inches of slack in cable
to allow stabilizer to rotate into the working position.

(f) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (43), slowly extend stabilizer cylinder (48) until there is
approximately one to two inches (25 to 50 mm) of slack in quick
release cable (47).

2-225
TM 08780-10

WARNING

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF


STABILIZER WHEN PULLING TOWARDS REAR OF
VEHICLE.

(g) Remove quick release pin (49) from


stabilizer lock pin (50). Remove lock pin (50). Pull stabilizer
cylinder toward rear of vehicle to start stabilizer into the downward
position.

(h) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (43), slowly retract stabilizer cylinder (48) fully. Stabilizer
will rotate into position.

2-226
TM 08780-10

(i) Using cable release handle (51),


remove quick release cable (47) from stabilizer cylinder (48).

(j) Install vertical stabilizer lock pin


(50) and quick release pin (49).

(k) Using NEAR SIDE stabilizer control


(43), extend stabilizer cylinder (48) until stabilizer is
approximately three inches (76 mm) above the ground.

NOTE
To provide greater stability, never lift any tire off of the ground.

(l) Using both NEAR SIDE and FAR


SIDE stabilizer controls (43 and 52), extend stabilizer cylinders
until both rear springs are off their spring seats.

2-227
TM 08780-10

(m) Place both stabilizer cylinder lock


valves (35 and 45) in the LOCK position.

d. Unstowing Crane

WARNING

CRANE OPERATIONS HAVE INHERENT HAZARDS THAT


CANNOT BE MECHANICALLY SAFEGUARDED.
OPERATOR AND ASSISTING PERSONNEL ARE
REQUIRED TO WEAR HARD HATS AND SAFETY SHOES.

CAUTION

EXTENSION BOOMS MUST BE FULLY RETRACTED


BEFORE UNSTOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN
CAUSE CRANE DAMAGE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

2-228
TM 08780-10

NOTE
• If any unwanted crane movement (creep) occurs during
operation, notify Organizational Maintenance that the
crane requires adjustment.

• Use manual controls to unstow crane.

(1) Remove retaining pin (53) and stowage pin


(54) from crane.

(2) Using Folding Boom control (16), lift


folding boom (55) off of boom rest (56). Folding boom brackets
(57) must be off of rest (56) so that crane can be unstowed.

2-229
TM 08780-10

2-230
TM 08780-10

(3) Push main boom control (17) up to raise


main boom (58) to 86 degrees as indicated by indicator (59) on
main boom (58).

(4) Use Folding Boom control (16) to raise


folding boom (55) to clear any objects when crane is rotated.

NOTE
Crane can now be operated from the manual controls or from the
remote control. To select remote control, refer to step (10).

2-231
TM 08780-10

(5) Use main boom control (17) to position


main boom (58) at 45 degrees as indicated by indicator (59) on
main boom. For maximum lifting capacity, refer to capacity
information data plate located on main control panel, folding boom
and remote control.

(6) Use Folding Boom control (16) to raise


folding boom (55) into the horizontal position. This is the
maximum lifting position.

2-232
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

BE CAREFUL WHEN RETRACTING EXTENSION BOOMS


IF FOLDING BOOM IS ABOVE THE HORIZONTAL
POSITION. LOAD MAY SWING AND CONTACT THE
CRANE.

(7) Use Extension Boom control (15) to extend


or retract extension booms (60).

(8) Use Rotation control (18) to rotate crane


clockwise or counterclockwise.

(9) Unstow hook (61) by pulling back on latch


(62) and lifting off of pin (63).

(10) Use of remote control.

2-233
TM 08780-10

(a) Turn control switch (5) to REMOTE.


Place strap (64) over head around neck. Hook buckle (65) on belt.
Adjust strap (64) as necessary.

NOTE
One of two deadman switches (23) must be depressed to activate
remote controls.

2-234
TM 08780-10

(b) Depress one of the two deadman


switches (23).

(c) Move extension boom control (27)


up to extend or down to retract extension booms.

(d) Move folding boom control (28) up


to raise or down to lower folding boom.

(e) Move main boom control (29) up to


raise or down to lower main boom.

(f) Move rotation control (30) up to


rotate crane clockwise or down to rotate crane counterclockwise.

e. Emergency Operating Procedures

NOTE
Manual controls must be used to operate crane when an
electrical failure has occurred.

(1) Electrical Failure. In the event of electrical


failure, all crane movement will stop. Operate crane as follows:

(a) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(b) Pull emergency manual shut down


valve (66) CLOSED.

(c) Complete crane operation with


manual controls.

(d) Notify Organizational Maintenance


immediately.

(2) Hydraulic Failure. If hydraulic failure


occurs, notify Organizational Maintenance immediately.

2-235
TM 08780-10

f. Stowing Crane

(1) Lift hook (61) and secure on stowage pin


(63). Make sure latch (62) closes so hook is secure.

NOTE
Use manual controls to stow crane.

(2) Using Rotation Control (18), rotate crane to


align boom stowage plates (67).

2-236
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

EXTENSION BOOMS MUST BE FULLY RETRACTED


BEFORE STOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN
CAUSE CRANE DAMAGE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

(3) Use Boom Extension control (15) to fully


retract both extension booms (60).

2-237
TM 08780-10

(4) Use main boom control (17) to raise main-


boom (58) to 86 degrees as indicated on indicator (59).

(5) Use Folding Boom control (16) to slowly


fold boom (55). Hold control down until folding boom will not
travel any further.

(6) Use Main Boom control (17) to slowly


lower main boom (58) to stowed position.

(7) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(8) With control switch in the OFF position, lift


Folding Boom control (16) so that brackets (57) are down on boom
rest (56).

(9) Push controls (15, 16, 17, and 18) up and


down all the way to release hydraulic pressure.

2-238
TM 08780-10

(10) Install stowage pin (54) and retaining pin


(53).

g. Stowing Stabilizers

(1) Turn control switch (5) to MANUAL.

(2) Unlock Left and Right stabilizer cylinder


lock valves (35 and 45).

2-239
TM 08780-10

(3) At main control panel (4), use Near side and


Far side stabilizer controls (43 and 52) to fully retract stabilizer
cylinders (38 and 48).

CAUTION

FAILURE TO REMOVE SAFETY PIN (40) BEFORE


RETRACTING STABILIZER WILL CAUSE CABLE (37) TO
BREAK.

2-240
TM 08780-10

(4) Remove quick release pin (39) and safety


pin (40) from Right side stabilizer (38).

(5) Turn cable release handle (41) and insert


stabilizer cable (37). Make sure cable is secure on handle pin.

(6) At Right side control station (31), use


NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (33) to extend stabilizer (38).
Stabilizer will swing into stowed position.

(7) Install stabilizer safety pin (40) and quick


release pin (39).

(8) Use Near side stabilizer control (33) to


retract stabilizer (38).

2-241
TM 08780-10

(9) Place stabilizer cylinder lock out valve (35)


in the LOCK position.

(10) Secure quick release cable (37) with


retaining pin (36) as shown. Pull down on quick release cable (37)
so that all cable slack is below retaining pin (36).

(11) Place NEAR SIDE STABILIZER EXT lock


out valve (32) in the UNLOCK position.

(12) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control


(33), retract outrigger beam (34).

2-242
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE MAKE SURE


STABILIZER EXT LOCK OUT VALVE (32) IS IN THE LOCK
POSITION BEFORE MOVING VEHICLE.

(13) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out valve


(32) in the LOCK position.

CAUTION

FAILURE TO REMOVE SAFETY PIN (50) BEFORE


RETRACTING STABILIZER WILL CAUSE CABLE (47) TO
BREAK.

(14) Remove quick release pin (49) and safety


pin (50).

(15) Turn cable release handle (51) and insert


quick disconnect cable (47). Make sure cable is secure on handle
pin.

2-243
TM 08780-10

(16) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (43)


to extend stabilizer cylinder (48). It will swing into the stowed
position.

(17) Install stabilizer safety pin (50) and quick


release pin (49).

(18) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (43)


to retract stabilizer (48).

(19) Place STABILIZER lock out valve (45) in


the LOCK position.

2-244
TM 08780-10

(20) Secure stabilizer cable (47) with retaining


pin (46) as shown. Pull down on quick release cable (47) so that
all cable slack is below retaining pin (46).

2-245
TM 08780-10

(21) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out


valve (42) in the UNLOCK position.

(22) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (43)


to retract outrigger beam (44).

2-246
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE MAKE SURE


STABILIZER EXT LOCK OUT VALVE (42) IS IN THE LOCK
POSITION BEFORE MOVING VEHICLE.

(23) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out valve


(42) in the LOCK position.

(24) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(25) Push controls (52 and 43) up and down (all


the way) to release hydraulic pressure.

(26) Push selector valve (3) to the STEERING


position. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(27) If remote control (6) was used, coil up cable


(7) approximately one foot in diameter. Place cable (7) and remote
control (6) in stowage compartment as shown. Secure
compartment door.

2-247
TM 08780-10

2-17. MK15A1 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MHC)


OPERATION

a. General Description. During operation, the material


handling crane (MHC) has four basic functions: telescoping,
outriggers, swing and hoist. The boom can rotate 318 degrees with
a 42 degree dead spot at the main control panel. The crane has a
lifting capacity of 9,000 lbs (4,086 kgs) at 15 feet (4.6m) (see
lifting capacity chart located at control panel for further
information).

The crane is operated by hydraulics supplied by the MK48/48A1


through the crane's main control panel. The main control panel
provides the controls to manually operate all functions of the crane
and outrigger jacks.

Each control on the crane's main control panel is proportional. The


more travel of the control, the faster the selected crane movement.
The crane may also be operated by a remote control unit with the
same operating functions, except for outrigger jack cylinder
controls, as the main control. Left and right retractable outrigger
jack cylinders are provided to stabilize, support and level the
vehicle while the crane is operated. An additional outrigger jack
cylinder control is provided, separate from the main control panel,
on the passenger (right) side of the vehicle. Built within the

2-248
TM 08780-10

crane's hydraulic system are several safety features that protect the
equipment and operating personnel. They are as follows:

• Hold valves will prevent a load from falling in the event of


pressure loss because of hydraulic line failure.

• A suspended load on the crane can be lowered when


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48A1 if external
hydraulic lines from the MK48/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery
vehicle are attached to the quick disconnect couplings at
the front of the crane trailer. Should hydraulic failure occur
in the crane's trailer, the suspended load can be lowered by
adjusting the cylinder hold valve. This procedure should be
done by Organizational Maintenance personnel.

• An overload protection system that prevents lifting greater


loads, at a given distance, than the crane can handle. All
functions that decrease overload remain functional: hoist
down, telescope in and swing left or right.

b. Determine Required Crane Settings from Range


Diagram

(1) Use Area Definition Chart below or on


MHC main control panel to determine position of crane.

2-249
TM 08780-10

(2) Use Load Chart below or on MHC main


control panel for load capacities.

NOTE
When either boom length or load radius or both are between
values listed below, the smallest load shown at either the next
larger boom length or radius must be used.

ON OUTRIGGERS
FRONT, SIDE & REAR - 318˚
RADIUS BOOM LENGTH FT (M)
FT (M) 7.33 14.25 15.25 16.50 18.42
(2.23) (4.34) (4.65) (5.03) (5.81)
4.00 11000
(1.22) (4988)
7.00 11000
(2.13) (4988)
8.00 11000 11000
(2.44) (4988) (4988)
9.00 11000 11000 10000
(2.74) (4988) (4988) (4535)
10.00 11000 11000 10000 9000
(3.05) (4988) (4988) (4535) (4082)
12.00 10000 10000 10000 9000
(3.66) (4535) (4535) (4535) (4082)
14.00 9400 9400 9000 8000
(4.27) (4264) (4264) (4082) (3628)
15.00 9000 8400 7900
(4.57) (4082) (3810) (3583)
16.00 8000 7500
(4.88) (3628) (3401)
18.20 5900
(5.55) (2676)
Capacities in Pounds (Kilograms)

Load Chart

c. Prepare Crane for Use

(1) Start engine.

(2) Position vehicle on level ground so all


loading and unloading can be done from one position.

2-250
TM 08780-10

(3) Place transmission shifter (1) in N (Neutral).

(4) Pull parking brake valve (2) OUT. Chock


wheels as necessary to secure vehicle.

(5) Shut down engine. Turn engine start switch


to ON. Engine warning buzzer will sound. This is normal.

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD
RESULT.

(6) Pull selector valve (3) mounted on right


fender of MK48/48A1 power unit to AUXILIARY
HYDRAULICS position. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(7) Start engine.

(8) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


ON.

(9) Position MHC TILT ALARM switch (5) to


ON.

2-251
TM 08780-10

d. Deploying Outrigger Jacks

WARNING

ENSURE AREA IS CLEAR ON BOTH SIDES OF VEHICLE


BEFORE EXTENDING OUTRIGGER BEAMS AND JACKS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-252
TM 08780-10

(1) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to OUT position


until outriggers are fully extended.

NOTE
Both outrigger pads are installed on outriggers the same way.
Right side is shown.

(2) Remove two outrigger pads (7) from


brackets located under tool stowage box (8).

(3) Remove two retaining pins (9) from


outrigger pad (7).

(4) Clear all dirt and debris from socket (10) in


outrigger pad (7) and from the end of the outrigger jack cylinder
(11).

(5) Position the outrigger pad (7) directly below


the outrigger jack cylinder (11).

2-253
TM 08780-10

(6) Perform steps (3) (4) and (5) to set up


outrigger pad (7) on other side.

WARNING

• KEEP HANDS AND FEET CLEAR OF OUTRIGGERS


DURING OPERATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

• THE ENGINE DURING OPERATION WILL CREATE


BLOWING DUST. EYE PROTECTION MUST BE
WORN WHILE OPERATING CRANE CONTROLS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

2-254
TM 08780-10

(7) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) to DOWN


position and lower outrigger jack cylinder (11) until ball end is
seated in outrigger pad (7).

(8) Install retaining pins (9) on outrigger pad


(7).

(9) Move RH O/R JACK lever (13) to down


position and lower outrigger jack cylinder (11) until ball end is
seated in outrigger pad (7).

(10) Install retaining pins (9) on outrigger pad


(7).

WARNING

CRIBBAGE AND/OR BLOCKAGE SHOULD NOT BE USED


UNDER THE OUTRIGGER PADS TO PREVENT SINKING
INTO THE SOIL. FAILURE OF SUCH DEVICES COULD
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

2-255
TM 08780-10

NOTE
• To provide greater stability, never lift any tire off the
ground.

• Lower outrigger jacks individually as necessary to level


the truck side-to-side.

(11) Using both LH O/R JACK and RH O/R


JACK levers (12 and 13), lower jack cylinders until both rear
springs are off their spring seats.

e. Unstowing Crane

(1) Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position and


HOIST lever (15) to DOWN position until boom (16) is at a
45-degree angle as indicated on boom angle indicator (17).

2-256
TM 08780-10

(2) Ensure hook block (18) is disconnected from


stowage hook (19).

WARNING

KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES AND


OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING CRANE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

NEVER TELESCOPE BOOM AND LIFT LOAD UNLESS


MAST IS FULLY RAISED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-257
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time to
maintain boom at approximately a 30-degree angle.

(3) Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position and


MAST lever (20) to UP position until mast (21) is fully raised.
Hold MAST lever (21) in UP position for 2-3 seconds to ensure
erection cylinder (22) is fully erected.

f. Connect Remote Control

WARNING

THE CRANE MUST BE OPERATED WITH REMOTE


CONTROL IF OPERATOR IS NOT ABLE TO KEEP LOAD IN
SIGHT AT ALL TIMES DURING OPERATION. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

(1) Remove crane remote control (23) and cable


(24) from stowage box (25).

2-258
TM 08780-10

NOTE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT straps may be crisscrossed in either
front or rear for operator comfort.

(2) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


OFF.

(3) Connect cable (24) to crane remote control


(23).

(4) Connect other end of cable (24) to


REMOTE CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (26).

(5) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


ON.

2-259
TM 08780-10

(6) Position EMERGENCY STOP switch (27)


on crane remote control (23) to ON.

g. Rotate and Telescope Boom

WARNING

• KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES


AND OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING THE
CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• ENSURE THAT AREA IS CLEAR OF PERSONNEL


BEFORE ROTATING BOOM. BOOM MUST BE

2-260
TM 08780-10

ROTATED SLOWLY ENOUGH SO OPERATOR HAS


COMPLETE CONTROL OF LOAD. IF OPERATOR
CANNOT SEE LOAD DURING OPERATION,
OPERATE CRANE WITH REMOTE CONTROL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

ENSURE CRANE DOES NOT CONTACT A-FRAME WHILE


ROTATING OR OPERATING CRANE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO CRANE OR
VEHICLE.

NOTE
Operate crane control levers using even pressure. Moving lever
slightly will cause slow movement of crane. Moving lever to full
travel will cause faster movement of the crane.

(1) Move SWING lever (28) to CW


(Clockwise) position to move boom (16) to the right.

(2) Move SWING lever (28) to CCW (Counter-


Clockwise) position to move boom (16) to the left.

2-261
TM 08780-10

WARNING

OPERATOR MUST KEEP CONTROL OF LOAD AT ALL


TIMES. ATTACH GUIDE LINES TO LOAD AS REQUIRED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

KEEP HOOK ASSEMBLY AT LEAST 2 FT (0.6M) FROM


END OF BOOM. IF HOOK ASSEMBLY HITS END OF
BOOM, CRANE WILL LOSE POWER FOR SEVERAL
SECONDS AND CABLE OR HOOK ASSEMBLY MAY BE
DAMAGED.

NOTE
Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same time.

2-262
TM 08780-10

(3) Move HOIST lever (15) to DOWN position


to pay out cable (29) and TELESCOPE lever (30) to OUT position
to extend boom (16).

h. Raise and Lower Load

(1) Refer to range diagram on MHC main


control panel to determine correct boom angle setting.

(2) Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position until


boom angle indicator (17) shows correct boom angle as determined
in step (1).

2-263
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

• DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE SLACK TO BUILD-UP


WHEN PAYING OUT CABLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• DO NOT ALLOW THE WEIGHT OF THE HOOK TO


BE REMOVED FROM THE CABLE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT

• USE ONLY A STRAIGHT PULL WHEN LIFTING


LOAD. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(3) Operate SWING lever (28) and


TELESCOPE lever (30) to center end of boom (16) directly over
load.

(4) Remove safety pin (31) from hook assembly


latch (32).

2-264
TM 08780-10

(5) Operate HOIST lever (15) to pay in or pay


out cable (29) and connect hook block (18) to load.

WARNING
• ENSURE THAT HOOK LATCH IS CLOSED AND
SAFETY PIN IS INSTALLED BEFORE ATTEMPTING
TO RAISE LOAD. A HOOK LATCH THAT IS NOT
CLOSED AND LOCKED IN POSITION COULD
ALLOW LOAD TO BECOME DISENGAGED FROM
HOOK, ALLOWING LOAD TO FALL. INJURY OR
DEATH COULD RESULT.

• USE EXTREME CARE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO


RAISE LOAD WITH DAMAGED HOOK LATCH OR
SAFETY PIN. HAVE ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE REPAIR DAMAGED PARTS AS
SOON AS MISSION IS COMPLETED.

(6) Install safety pin (31) in hook assembly


latch (32).

WARNING

ENSURE THERE ARE AT LEAST TWO WRAPS OF CABLE


ON HOIST DRUM AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

2-265
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

• DO NOT JERK HOIST LEVER. LOAD MAY BOUNCE


AND RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR
LOAD.

• DO NOT LIFT MORE THAN MAXIMUM LOAD


RATING FOR CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• ENSURE BOOM AND LOAD ARE CLEAR OF


VEHICLE SIDES WHEN LOADING AND
UNLOADING CARGO. HITTING SIDE OF VEHICLE
WITH BOOM OR LOAD MAY DAMAGE CRANE,
LOAD, OR VEHICLE.

• DO NOT LOWER BOOM BELOW HORIZONTAL


WITH A LOAD SUSPENDED FROM THE HOOK, OR
RAISE A LOAD FROM BELOW HORIZONTAL USING
THE BOOM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(6) Move HOIST lever (15) to UP position to


lift load. Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position to lift load higher
as required.

(7) Move HOIST lever (15) to DOWN position


to lower load. Move BOOM lever (14) to DOWN position to
lower load further as required.

(8) When lifting operations are completed,


disconnect hook block (18) from load and install safety pin (31) in
hook assembly latch (32).

2-266
TM 08780-10

i. Stow Crane

CAUTION

BOOM MUST BE POSITIONED IN LINE WITH


OUTRIGGER BEAM AND FULLY RETRACTED BEFORE
LOWERING. OBSERVE BOOM DURING LOWERING TO
ENSURE NO CONTACT IS MADE WITH RIGHT REAR
FENDER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
• Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same
time.

• Reel in cable until approximately 2 ft. (0.6m) of cable


hangs from boom.

(1) Move HOIST lever (15) to UP position to


reel in cable (29) and TELESCOPE lever (30) to IN position to
retract boom (16).

2-267
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Position boom so that cable and hook assembly are on
passenger's side of vehicle.

(2) Operate SWING lever (28) to position boom


(16) in line with outrigger beam (33).

(3) Operate BOOM lever (14) so that boom


angle indicator (17) reads approximately 30-degrees.

2-268
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time so that
30-degree reading is maintained on boom angle indicator.

(4) Move MAST lever (20) to DOWN position


and fully lower mast (21).

(5) Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position and


raise boom (16) until boom angle indicator (17) reads
approximately 45 degrees.

(6) Move HOIST lever (15) to UP position until


hook block (18) is near stowage hook (19).

CAUTION

OBSERVE HOOK BLOCK DURING LOWERING TO


ENSURE THAT HOOK BLOCK REMAINS ATTACHED TO
STOWAGE HOOK. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-269
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Operate HOIST lever and BOOM lever at the same time to keep
hook block attached to stowage hook.

(7) Move boom lever (14) to DOWN position


and HOIST lever (15) to UP position and fully lower boom (16).

j. Disconnect Remote Control

(1) Position EMERGENCY STOP switch (27)


on crane remote control (23) to OFF.

(2) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


OFF.

(3) Remove cable (24) from RH REMOTE


CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (26).

(4) Remove cable (24) from crane remote


control (23).

2-270
TM 08780-10

(5) Stow cable (24) and crane remote control


(23) in stowage box.

NOTE
Perform step (6) if crane operation is still required.

(6) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4)


and TILT ALARM switch (5) to ON.

k. Stow Outrigger Beams/Jack Cylinders and Shut


Down Crane

(1) Remove two retaining pins (9) from both


outrigger pads (7).

NOTE
Operate LH O/R JACK lever and RH O/R JACK lever at the
same time.

(2) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) and RH O/R


JACK lever (13) to UP position until outrigger jack cylinders (11)
are fully retracted.

(3) Install two retaining pins (9) in outrigger


pads (7).

(4) Stow two outrigger pads (7) on brackets


located on bottom of tool stowage boxes (8).

2-271
TM 08780-10

(5) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to IN position until


outrigger beams are fully retracted.

(6) Position MAIN POWER switch (4) to OFF.

(7) Position crane TILT ALARM switch (5) to


OFF.

2-272
TM 08780-10

2-18. MK15/15A1 A-FRAME LIFT AND TOW


OPERATIONS

a. General Description. The A-Frame is used to lift


and tow all LVS series vehicles from the front or rear, loaded or
unloaded. It is also capable of lifting and towing the following
vehicles: HMMWV and MTVR. Refer to paragraph 2-38 for front
flat towing and limited rear flat towing procedures.

The Hydraulic Cylinder is the A-frame's means of lifting. It is


operated by a control located with the crane controls. The
Hydraulic Cylinder may also be operated by the remote control.

2-273
TM 08780-10

On LVSA1 vehicles, the Hydraulic Cylinder can only be operated


manually from the auxiliary control panel located on the left rear
fender.

b. Basic Lift and Tow Precautions

WARNING

WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED


VEHICLE, CERTAIN PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES
MUST BE FOLLOWED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
VEHICLE OR COMPONENTS. FAILURE TO USE
STANDARD TOWING PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
WHILE LIFTING AND TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
COULD RESULT IN AN UNSAFE OPERATING CONDITION.

(1) Except in an extreme emergency, do NOT


lift and tow an LVS vehicle without first disconnecting and
securing the driveline of the disabled vehicle being lifted and
towed. Refer to paragraph 2-42, section e, Preparation for Towing.

CAUTION

EXCEEDING THE 5 MILES PER HOUR (8 KPH) SPEED


LIMIT OR THE ONE HALF MILE (.8 KM) TOWING LIMIT
WITH DISABLED VEHICLE'S DRIVELINE STILL
CONNECTED WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE
VEHICLE'S TRANSMISSION.

(2) In emergencies when time or tactical


situation does not permit disconnecting the driveline of the
disabled vehicle, limited lifting and towing can be performed. In
such instances, the disabled vehicle must not be lifted and towed
more than one half a mile (.8 km). Also, towing speed must not
exceed 5 miles per hour (8 kph).

2-274
TM 08780-10

WARNING
LIFT AND TOW OPERATIONS MUST ALWAYS BE
CONDUCTED AT A SPEED WHICH THE OPERATOR
DETERMINES TO BE SAFE UNDER EXISTING
CONDITIONS. IN NO EVENT SHOULD THE OPERATOR
EXCEED 15 MPH (24 KPH) WHEN LIFTING AND TOWING
A DISABLED VEHICLE.

(3) After preparation for lift and tow is made


and the drive train components are disconnected and properly
secured, do not tow at speeds over 15 mph (24 kph).

(4) Prepare A-frame for lift and tow. See


paragraph 2-18, section d.

(5) Front Lift and Tow. On vehicles to be lifted


and towed from the front, install articulation joint roll stops and
lockout strut (paragraph 2-18, Section e), tow bar (paragraph 2-18,
section f) and pivot beam (paragraph 2-18, section g).

(6) Rear Lift and Tow. On vehicles to be lifted


and towed from the rear, install articulation joint roll stops and
lockout strut (paragraph 2-18, section e) and tow bar (paragraph
2-18, section f).

c. Preparation for Lift and Tow

CAUTION

Equipment damage could occur if the following GCW (Gross


Combination Weight) ratings are exceeded.

On Highway Off Highway


154,000 lbs. 105,000 lbs.
(69916 kg) (47670 kg)

2-275
TM 08780-10

(1) Prepare the disabled vehicle for lift and tow.


Refer to paragraph 2-42, section e.

(2) Position rear of wrecker directly in line with


disabled vehicle. Allow adequate working space.

(3) Place transmission shifter (1)in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

d. A-frame Preparation for Lift and Tow

(1) Remove and stow retaining strap (3).

2-276
TM 08780-10

(2) Remove two tie down rings (4) from the


vehicle's frame. Install and tighten the two tie down rings (4) into
cargo bed as shown.

NOTE
A-frame support chains must be hooked to the cargo bed first,
rather than the A-frame. Otherwise, the A-frame support chains
cannot be installed.

(3) Remove two A-frame support chains (5)


from stowage compartment. Attach hooked ends of chains (5) to
tie down rings (4) as shown.

2-277
TM 08780-10

NOTE
A-frame must be in the most upright position in order to attach
support chains.

(4) Remove one A-frame support strap (6) from


A-frame (7).

(5) Remove pin (8) and shackle (9) from A-


frame (7). Place shackle (9) through the free end of A-frame
support chain (5) and attach to A-frame (7) with pin (8).

(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) to install the other


A-frame support chain (5).

2-278
TM 08780-10

(7) Remove pin (10).

(8) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

2-279
TM 08780-10

e. Articulation Joint Roll Stop and Lockout Strut


Installation

(1) Install both articulation joint roll stops (15)


at the articulation joint (16).

2-280
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

To avoid equipment damage, lockout strut must be installed before


the disabled vehicle is lifted either from the front or rear.

NOTE
• Lockout strut (17) is installed at the articulation joint on
the left side of the vehicle being lifted and towed.

• Disabled vehicle could have to be repositioned in order to


install lockout strut (17).

• Perform step (2.1) only when operating an LVSA1 series


vehicle.

(2) Remove articulation joint lockout strut (17)


from the front of vehicle being lifted and towed.

(2.1) Remove sensor cap (17.1).

(3) Position lockout strut (17) on lockout


mounts (18) located at the articulation joint on the left side of the
vehicle being lifted and towed. Secure lockout strut (17) with pin
(19) and retainer (20).

2-281
TM 08780-10

f. Tow Bar Installation

WARNING

TOW BAR IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY TWO


PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(1) Remove tow bar assembly (21) from


position on top of rear stowage compartment. Remove brace (22)
from side stowage compartment.

NOTE
For lifting and towing, the tow bar (21) should not be extended.

(2) Install brace (22) on tow bar (21). Secure


brace with pins (23) and retaining pins (24).

2-282
TM 08780-10

(3) Attach clevises (25) to upper tow eyes (26)


of wrecker using pins (27) and retaining pins (28).

(4) Attach towbar (21) to clevises (25) using pins (29) and
retaining pins (30).

2-283
TM 08780-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

(5) Start engine. Pull selector valve (31) out to


the AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC position. Make sure valve is
fully engaged.

2-284
TM 08780-10

NOTE
• A-frame can be operated by either the manual or remote
control.

• LVSA1 A-frame cylinder can only be operated by manual


control. Steps (6), (7) and (8) not required on LVSA1
vehicles.

(6) Choose the method of operating the A-frame


cylinder by placing control switch (32) in either the MANUAL or
REMOTE position.

(7) If using the REMOTE position, remove


remote control unit (33) from stowage compartment and connect.
While depressing one of the two deadman switches (34 or 35),
move control (36) to left to raise cylinder or right to lower.

2-285
TM 08780-10

(8) If using the MANUAL position, move


control (37) up to raise cylinder or down to lower.

NOTE
Perform step (8.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(8.1) Move control (37.1) up to raise cylinder or


down to lower.

(9) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) enough to wrap and secure small lift chains (14)
around tow bar brace (22). Raise A-frame cylinder (13) to remove
slack.

NOTE
Perform step (9.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

2-286
TM 08780-10

(9.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) enough to wrap and secure small lift chains (14)
around tow bar brace (22). Raise A-frame cylinder (13) to remove
slack.

g. Install Pivot Beam

WARNING
PIVOT BEAM IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY
TWO PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(1) Remove pivot beam (38) from position in


front stowage compartment on wrecker cargo body.

2-287
TM 08780-10

(2) Install pivot beam (38) on front tow eyes


(39) of the disabled vehicle. Secure beam to eyes with pins (40)
and retaining pins (41).

h. Front Lift and Tow of Disabled Vehicle

(1) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

2-288
TM 08780-10

WARNING
COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFT AND
TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND
A GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,
USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE
PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND
UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS-ONE THAT MEANS
BACK UP SLOWLY AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(2) Back up wrecker until tow bar (21) lunette is


approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pivot beam (38).

(3) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Adjust tow bar (21)

2-289
TM 08780-10

height using A-frame control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (21) is
aligned with pivot section of the pivot beam (38).

NOTE
Perform step (3.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(3.1) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC position. Adjust tow bar (21) height
using A-frame control (37.1) so that tow bar (21) is aligned with
pivot section of the pivot beam (38).

(4) Install pivot beam shackle (42) through the


lunette on the tow bar (21).

NOTE
Adjust tow bar height as needed to align parts.

(5) Extend the tow bar (21) by removing


retaining pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pivot
section of the pivot beam (38), making sure holes in pivot beam
and pivot beam shackle (42) are aligned.

2-290
TM 08780-10

(6) Install shackle pin (45) from the bottom and


secure with retaining pin (46)

CAUTION

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER AS


DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(7) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


unhook small lifting chains (14).

WARNING
DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES
COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.

(8) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully
compressed.

NOTE
Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin
holes in tow bar (21).

2-291
TM 08780-10

(9) Align pinholes in tow bar (21) and install


pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

(10) Remove long lifting chains (47) from


stowage. Thread grab hook end of long lifting chains (47) up
between the disabled vehicles skid plate (48) and the pivot beam
(38). Hook the grab hooks in the angle pockets on the pivot beam
(38).

NOTE
Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required
to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

2-292
TM 08780-10

(11) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).
Hook the small chain at the 13th link from the grab hook ends of
the long lifting chains (47).

(12) Install scuff pad (49) on the disabled


vehicle's skid plate (48). Attachment hooks (50) fit on the upper
inside edge of skid plate (48).

WARNING
DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES WHILE LIFTING.
TOWED VEHICLE COULD ROLL FORWARD, CRUSHING
YOU BETWEEN THE VEHICLES.

2-293
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, LOCK OUT STRUT


MUST BE IN PLACE BEFORE LIFT IS MADE.

(13) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

NOTE
Use shackles (51) and pins (52) from the lower tow eyes of the
wrecker.

(14) Attach towing cable (53) ring ends to lifting


eyes on the pivot beam (38) using shackles (51) and pins (52).

(15) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) fully,


allowing full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing
cable (53).

(16) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting


chains (47).

2-294
TM 08780-10

(17) Remove pin (11), shackle (12) and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13).

(18) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

NOTE
Step (19) not required for LVSA1 series vehicles.

(19) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF position.

2-295
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE GLAD


HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE COUPLING.

NOTE
• If the disabled vehicle's air system is inoperable, the
brakes must be manually released. Refer to paragraph 2-
37.

• Ball valve (57) must be open to release disabled vehicle's


parking brakes.

(20) If the disabled vehicle's air or brake system


is operable, connect air lines (54) to glad hands (55) at rear of
wrecker. Insert air lines (54) through the front grille of the disabled
vehicle and wrap them about 2 1/2 times to prevent lines from
dragging on the ground. Connect air lines (54) to front glad hands
(56) of disabled vehicle. Service-to-service (blue-to-blue).
Emergency-to-emergency (red-to-red). Open ball valve (57).

2-296
TM 08780-10

(21) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

(22) Push TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (58)


and parking brake valve (2) in to charge towed vehicle's air
system.

NOTE
Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 km) when towing a disabled vehicle.

(23) Push disabled vehicle's parking brake valve


into release parking brakes. Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive

2-297
TM 08780-10

- 3. Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Vehicle is now


ready to tow.

i. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

2-298
TM 08780-10

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Insure valve is fully
engaged.

(3) Remove pin (10).

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

2-299
TM 08780-10

(5) Pull TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (58)


out.

(6) Remove air lines (54) from glad hands (55)


on wrecker and glad hands (56) on disabled vehicle.

(7) Remove long lifting chains (47) from


stowage. Thread grab hook end of chains (47) up between the
disabled vehicles skid plate (48) and the pivot beam (38). Hook
the grab hooks in the angle pockets on the pivot beam (38).

NOTE
Step (8) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(8) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(9) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 13th link from the grab hook end.

NOTE
Perform step (9.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

2-300
TM 08780-10

(9.1) Using control (37.1) lower A-frame cylinder


(13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long lifting
chains (47) at the 13th link from the grab hook end.

(10) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(11) Remove towing cable (53) from pivot beam


(38) by removing pins (52) and shackles (51). Stow shackles and
pins.

2-301
TM 08780-10

(12) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook and stow long lifting
chains (47).

(13) Remove and stow scuff pad (49).

(14) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

2-302
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Perform step (14.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(14.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

(15) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

(16) Remove and stow retaining pin (46) and


shackle pin (45).

2-303
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Step (17) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(17) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF position.

(18) Release parking brake valve (2) and drive


wrecker forward.

(19) Remove and stow pivot beam shackle (42).

(20) Remove and stow all towing equipment.


Refer to paragraph 2-18, section r.

2-304
TM 08780-10

j. MK48/48A1/14/14A1 Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE
After removing air line retaining clamp (60) mounting hardware,
replace mounting hardware on clamps to avoid loss.

(1) Remove air line retaining clamp (60)


mounting hardware and allow air lines (61) and wire harness (62)
to hang.

2-305
TM 08780-10

(2) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(63).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

(3) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

NOTE
Step (4) not required for LVSA1 series vehicles.

(4) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(5) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (64).

2-306
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Perform step (5.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(5.1) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (37.1) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (64).

(6) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

WARNING

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFTING AND


TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND
A GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,
USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE
PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND

2-307
TM 08780-10

UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS – ONE THAT MEANS


BACK UP SLOWLY AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(7) Back up wrecker until tow bar (21) lunette is


approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pintle hook (64) of
the disabled vehicle.

(8) Install lift bracket (65) as shown.

(9) Turn pintle hook (64) on disabled vehicle so


that movable piece of the hook faces towards the ground. Unlock
and open pintle hook (64). If necessary refer to paragraph 2-33,
section e.

NOTE
Adjust tow bar (21) height as needed to align parts.

(10) Extend tow bar (21) by removing retaining


pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pintle hook (64).

(11) Close and lock pintle hook (64). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

2-308
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER (13) AS


DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(12) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


unhook small lifting chains (14).

WARNING

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES


COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.

(13) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully
compressed.

NOTE
Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin
holes in tow bar (21).

(14) Align pin holes in tow bar (21) and install


pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

2-309
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required
to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

(15) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).
Hook the small chains at the 8th link from the grab hook ends of
the long lifting chains (47).

2-310
TM 08780-10

CAUTION

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, LOCK OUT STRUT


MUST BE IN PLACE BEFORE LIFT IS MADE

(16) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(17) Attach towing cable (53) ends to rear tow


eyes (66) using shackles (67) and pins (68).

NOTE
Ring ends of towing cable (53) fit into slotted area in the lift
bracket (65).

(18) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (13) allowing


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing cables
(53). Ring ends of towing cables (53) must fit into slots in the lift
bracket (65).

(19) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting


chains (47).

2-311
TM 08780-10

(20) Remove pin (11), shackle (12) and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting
chains (14).

(21) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

2-312
TM 08780-10

NOTE
Step (22) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(22) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED


VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS
CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE
DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR IF
CAUTION IS NOT USED.

(23) Cage disabled vehicles brakes. Refer to


paragraph 2-41, section c.

2-313
TM 08780-10

(24) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 kph) when lifting and towing a
disabled vehicle.

(25) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.


Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Disabled vehicle is
now ready for rear lift and tow.

k. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

2-314
TM 08780-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

(3) Remove pin (10).

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

2-315
TM 08780-10

(5) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(63).

NOTE
Step (6) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(6) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

2-316
TM 08780-10

(7) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

NOTE
Perform step (7.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(7.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

(8) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(9) Remove towing cable (53) from rear tow


eyes (66) by removing pins (68) and shackles (67). Stow shackles
and pins.

2-317
TM 08780-10

(10) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove and stow long
lifting chains (47).

2-318
TM 08780B-10

(11) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

NOTE
Perform step (11.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(11.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

(12) Unlock and open pintle hook (64). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

(13) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (64).

NOTE
Perform step (13.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(13.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (64).

(14) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Step (15) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(15) Turn control switch (32) to OFF position.

2-319
TM 08780B-10

(16) Release parking brake valve (2). Place


transmission shifter (1) in Drive and drive wrecker forward.

(17) Remove and stow lift bracket (65).

2-320
TM 08780B-10

(18) Install airline retaining clamp (60) mounting


hardware holding airlines (61) and wire harness (62) to rear
crossmember (63).

(19) Remove and stow all towing equipment.


Refer to paragraph 2-18, section r.

2-321
TM 08780B-10

l. MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE
After removing air line retaining clamp (69) mounting hardware
and marker light bracket (70) replace mounting hardware to
avoid loss.

(1) Remove air line retaining clamp (69)


mounting hardware and marker light bracket (70) from rear
crossmember (71).

(2) Hook strap (72) ends on glad hand chain


(73) and brace (74). Pull strap tight to hold marker light bracket
(70) in position.

2-322
TM 08780B-10

(3) Install tong lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(71) of the disabled vehicle.

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

2-323
TM 08780B-10

(4) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

NOTE
Step (5) not required for LVSA1 series vehicles.

(5) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(6) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (20) is at the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (75).

NOTE
Perform step (6.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(6.1) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (37.1) so that tow bar (20) is at the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (75).

2-324
TM 08780B-10

(7) Push selector valve (31) to STEERING


position.

WARNING

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFTING AND


TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,
USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE
PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND
UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS - ONE THAT MEANS
BACK UP SLOWLY AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(8) Back up wrecker until tow bar(21) lunette is


approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pintle hook (75) of
the disabled vehicle.

(9) Turn pintle hook (75) on disabled vehicle so


that movable piece of the hook faces towards the ground. Unlock
and open pintle hook (75). If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33,
section e.

NOTE
Adjust tow bar (21) height as needed to align parts.

(10) Extend tow bar (21) by removing retaining


pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pintle hook (75).

2-325
TM 08780B-10

(11) Close and lock pintle hook (75). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

CAUTION

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER (13) AS


DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(12) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


unhook small lifting chains (14).

WARNING

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES


COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU ALL BETWEEN THEM.

(13) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully
compressed.

NOTE
Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin
holes in tow bar (21).

2-326
TM 08780B-10

(14) Align pinholes in tow bar (21) and install


pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

NOTE
Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required
to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

(15) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).
Hook the small chains at the 8th link from the grab hook ends of
the long lifting chains (47).

2-327
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, LOCKOUT STRUT


MUST BE IN PLACE BEFORE LIFT IS MADE.

(16) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(17) Attach towing cable (53) ring ends to rear


tow eyes (76) using shackles (77) and pins (78).

(18) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (13) allowing


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing cables
(53).

2-328
TM 08780B-10

(19) Unhook, remove and stow the long lifting


chains (47).

(20) Remove pin (11), shackle (12), and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting
chains (14).

(21) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

2-329
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (22) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(22) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED


VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS
CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE

2-330
TM 08780B-10

DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.


POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR IF
CAUTION IS NOT USED.

(23) Cage disabled vehicles brakes. Refer to


paragraph 2-41, section c.

(24) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 KPH) when lifting and towing a
disabled vehicle.

(25) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.


Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Disabled vehicle is
now ready for rear lift and tow.

2-331
TM 08780B-10

m. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR
IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

2-332
TM 08780B-10

(3) Remove pin (10).

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

(5) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(71).

2-333
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (6) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(6) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(7) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

NOTE
Perform step (7.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(7.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end,

2-334
TM 08780B-10

(8) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(9) Remove towing cable (53) from rear tow


eyes (76) by removing pins (78) and shackles (77). Stow shackles
and pins.

2-335
TM 08780B-10

(10) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove, and stow long
lifting chains (47).

2-336
TM 08780B-10

(11) Using control (36 or 37) adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

NOTE
Perform step (11.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(11.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame cylinder


(13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be wrapped around
tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

(12) Unlock and open pintle hook (75). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

(13) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (75).

NOTE
Perform step (13.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(13.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (75).

(14) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

2-337
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (15) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(15) Turn control switch (32) to the off position.

(16) Release parking brake valve (2). Place


transmission shifter (1) in Drive and drive wrecker forward.

2-338
TM 08780B-10

(17) Remove and stow strap (72).

(18) Install marker light bracket (70) and air line


retaining clamp (69) mounting hardware on disabled vehicles rear
crossmember (71).

(19) Remove and stow all towing equipment.


Refer to paragraph 2-18, section r.

n. MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE
After removing air line retaining clamp (79) mounting hardware,
replace mounting hardware to avoid loss.

2-339
TM 08780B-10

(1) Remove airline retaining clamp (79)


mounting hardware from rear cross-member (80) on disabled
vehicle. Allow air lines (81) and wire harness (82) to hang.

(2) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(80) of the disabled vehicle.

2-340
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

(3) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

2-341
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (4) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(4) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(5) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame so


that tow bar (21) is the same height as the disabled vehicle's pintle
hook (83).

NOTE
Perform step (5.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(5.1) Adjust tow bar (21) using control (37.1) so


that tow bar (21) is the same height as the disabled vehicle's pintle
hook (83).
(6) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING
position.

2-342
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFTING AND


TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,
USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE
PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND
UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS - ONE THAT MEANS
BACK UP SLOWLY AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(7) Back up wrecker until tow bar (21) lunette is


approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pintle hook (83) of
the disabled vehicle.

2-343
TM 08780B-10

(8) Turn pintle hook (83) on disabled vehicle so


that movable piece of the hook faces towards the ground. Unlock
and open pintle hook (83). If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33,
section e.

NOTE
Adjust tow bar (21) height as needed to align parts.

(9) Extend tow bar (21) by removing retaining


pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pintle hook (83).

(10) Close and lock pintle hook (83). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

CAUTION

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER (13) AS


DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(11) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


unhook small lifting chains (14).

WARNING

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES


COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.

(12) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully
compressed.

NOTE
Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin
holes in tow bar (21).

(13) Align pin holes in tow bar (21) and install


pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

2-344
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required
to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

(14) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).
Hook the small chains at the 8th link from the grab hook ends of
the long lifting chains (47).

2-345
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE LOCKOUT STRUT


MUST BE IN PLACE BEFORE LIFT IS MADE.

(15) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(16) Attach towing cable (53) ends to rear tow


eyes (84) using shackles (85) and pins (86).

(17) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (13) allowing


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing cables
(53).

(18) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting


chains (47).

2-346
TM 08780B-10

(19) Remove pin (11), shackle (12) and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting
chains (14).

(20) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

2-347
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (21) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(21) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED


VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS
CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE
DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR IF
CAUTION IS NOT USED.

2-348
TM 08780B-10

(22) Cage disabled vehicles brakes. Refer to


paragraph 2-41, section c.

(23) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 kph) when lifting and towing a
disabled vehicle.

(24) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.


Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Disabled vehicle is
now ready for rear lift and tow.

2-349
TM 08780B-10

o. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

2-350
TM 08780B-10

(3) Remove pin (10).

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

(5) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(80) of the disabled vehicle.

2-351
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (6) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(6) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(7) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

NOTE
Perform step (7.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(7.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

2-352
TM 08780B-10

(8) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(9) Remove towing cable (53) from rear tow


eyes (84) by removing pins (86) and shackles (85). Stow shackles
and pins.

(10) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove, and stow long
lifting chains (47).

(11) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

2-353
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Perform step (11.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(11.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

2-354
TM 08780B-10

(12) Unlock and open pintle hook (83). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

(13) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (83).

NOTE
Perform step (13.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(13.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (83).

(14) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Step (15) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(15) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

(16) Release parking brake valve (2). Place


transmission shifter (1) in Drive and drive wrecker forward.

2-355
TM 08780B-10

(17) Install air line retaining clamp (79)


mounting hardware on rear crossmember (80) of disabled vehicle.

(18) Remove and stow all towing equipment


Refer to paragraph 2-18, section r.

2-356
TM 08780B-10

p. MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Rear Lift and Tow

(1) Deploy rear landing leg (87). Refer to


paragraph 2-15.

NOTE
After removing air line retaining clamp (88) mounting hardware,
replace mounting hardware to avoid loss.

(2) Remove air line retaining clamp (88)


mounting hardware from rear crossmember (89) of the disabled
vehicle. Allow air lines (90) and wire harness (91) to hang.

WARNING

LANDING LEG IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


TWO PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(3) Remove cotter pins (92), washers (93), pin


(94), and remove rear landing leg (87). Replace cotter pins,
washers, and pin in landing leg. Stow landing leg.

2-357
TM 08780B-10

(4) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(89) of the disabled vehicle.

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

2-358
TM 08780B-10

(5) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

NOTE
Step (6) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(6) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(7) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (95).

NOTE
Perform step (7.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

2-359
TM 08780B-10

(7.1) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (37.1) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (95).

(8) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

WARNING

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFTING AND


TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND
A GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,
USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE
PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND
UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS-ONE THAT MEANS
BACK UP SLOWLY, AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(9) Back up wrecker until tow bar (21) lunette is


approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pintle hook (95) of
the disabled vehicle.

2-360
TM 08780B-10

(10) Turn pintle hook (95) on disabled vehicle so


that movable piece of the hook faces towards the ground. Unlock
and open pintle hook (95). If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33,
section e.

NOTE
Adjust tow bar (21) height as needed to align parts.

(11) Extend tow bar (21) by removing retaining


pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pintle hook (95).

(12) Close and lock pintle hook (95). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

CAUTION

FOR LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY, REAR MARKER


LIGHTS MAY BE DAMAGED DURING TOWING
OPERATION AND MUST BE REMOVED.

2-361
TM 08780B-10

(12.1) Remove two capscrews (95.1), lockwashers


(95.2) and rear marker light mounting bracket (95.3) from crane.
Secure rear marker light mounting bracket (95.3) as needed.

CAUTION

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER (13) AS


DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(13) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


unhook small lifting chains (14).

WARNING

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES


COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.

(14) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully
compressed.

2-362
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin
holes in tow bar (21).

(15) Align pin holes in tow bar (21) and install


pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

NOTE
Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required
to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach tow cable.

(16) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).
Hook the small chains at the 8th link from the grab hook ends of
the long lifting chains (47).

2-363
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO GLAD HANDS, MAKE SURE LONG


LIFTING CHAINS (47) CLEAR GLAD HANDS BEFORE
LIFTING DISABLED VEHICLE.

(17) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(18) Attach towing cable (53) ends to rear tow


eyes (96) using shackles (97) and pins (98).

2-364
TM 08780B-10

(19) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (13) allowing


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing cables
(53).

2-365
TM 08780B-10

(20) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting


chains (47).

(21) Remove pin (11), shackle (12), and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting
chains (14).

(22) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

NOTE
Step (23) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(23) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

2-366
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED


VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS
CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE
DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR IF
CAUTION IS NOT USED.

(24) Cage disabled vehicles brakes. Refer to


paragraph 2-41, section c.

(25) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 kph) when lifting and towing a
disabled vehicle.

(26) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.


Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Disabled vehicle is
now ready for rear lift and tow.

2-367
TM 08780B-10

q. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

2-368
TM 08780B-10

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

(3) Remove pin (10).

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from


A-frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes
of small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder 0 3) with pin (11).

2-369
TM 08780B-10

(5) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(89).

NOTE
Step (6) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(6) Turn switch (32) to either MANUAL or


REMOTE.

(7) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

NOTE
Perform step (7.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(7.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end.

2-370
TM 08780B-10

(8) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(9) Remove towing cable (53) from rear tow


eyes (96) by removing pins (98) and shackles (97). Stow shackles
and pins.

2-371
TM 08780B-10

(10) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook and stow long lifting
chains (47).

(11) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

NOTE
Perform step (11.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

2-372
TM 08780B-10

(11.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

(12) Unlock and open pintle hook (95). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

(13) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (95).

NOTE
Perform step (13.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(13.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (95).

(14) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE
Step (15) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(15) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

2-373
TM 08780B-10

(16) Release parking brake valve (2). Place


transmission shifter (1) in Drive and drive wrecker forward.

NOTE
Perform step (16.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(16.1) Install rear marker light mounting bracket


(95.3) to crane with two capscrews (95.1), and lockwashers (95.2).

2-374
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Be sure air line clamp nearest landing leg is installed on top of
the crossmember (89) with head of bolt on bottom of
crossmember.

(17) Install air line retaining clamp (88)


mounting hardware on rear crossmember (89) of the disabled
vehicle.

WARNING

LANDING LEG IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


TWO PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(18) Install landing leg (87) using pin (94),


washers (93), and cotter pins (92).

(19) Remove and stow all towing equipment.


Refer to paragraph 2-18, section r.

2-375
TM 08780B-10

r. Removal of Towing Equipment

NOTE
Perform step (1.1) only if operating an LVSA1 series vehicle.

(1) Remove retainers (20), pins (19), and


lockout strut (17) from mounts (18).

(1.1) Connect sensor cap (17.1).

2-376
TM 08780B-10

(2) Remove both articulation joint roll stops


(15) from the articulation joint (16).

WARNING

PIVOT BEAM IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


TWO PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

NOTE
Perform step (3) only if disabled vehicle was lifted and towed
from the front.

2-377
TM 08780B-10

(3) Remove retaining pins (41), pins (40), and


pivot beam (38).

(4) Lower A-frame cylinder (13) and unhook


small lifting chains (14).

(5) Remove pin (11), shackle (12), and small


lifting chains (14).

(6) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

2-378
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

TOW BAR IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY TWO


PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(7) Remove retaining pins (30), pins (29) and


tow bar (21).

(8) Remove retaining pins (23) and pins (24).


Remove brace (22) from tow bar (21).

2-379
TM 08780B-10

(9) Remove retaining pins (28), pins (27) and


clevises (25).

(10) Install one A-frame support strap (6) on A-


frame (7). Take up all slack in strap (6) to support weight of A-
frame.

(11) Remove pin (8), shackle (9) and support


chain (5) from the side of the A-frame that is not being supported
by strap.

(12) Install pin (8), and shackle (9) back on


A-frame (7). Install remaining support strap (6) and support A-
frame (7) by eliminating all slack.

(13) Remove strap (6) that was used to first


support the A-frame (7) for removing support chain (5).

2-380
TM 08780B-10

(14) Remove pin (8), shackle (9), and support


chain (5) from A-frame (7).

(15) Install pin (8) and shackle (9) back on A-


frame. Install last support strap (6) and take up all slack to support
A-frame (7).

(16) Install retaining strap (3) as shown.

(17) Remove hooked ends of support chains (5)


from ties down rings.

(18) Remove tie down rings (4) from cargo bed


and install back on vehicle's frame.

2-381
TM 08780B-10

(19) Stow and secure all chains and towing


equipment.

2-19. LIFT TOWING THE 7-TON TRUCK BY THE LVS


WRECKER

a. General Description

(1) The LVS Wrecker can flat tow and lift and
tow the 7-Ton Truck. The A-frame of the wrecker is used to lift
and tow vehicles from the front or rear loaded or unloaded.

(2) The following procedures are provided to


give specific details for lift towing the 7-Ton Truck with the LVS
Wrecker. The additional items required to perform rear lift and
tow are the LVS Towing Kit P/N 3250986 which includes the Tow
Bar Adapter P/N 3205644, Pin P/N 1377810, and Snapper Pin P/N
3364032. The items required to perform front lift and tow are the
7-Ton Truck Adapter P/N 3406259, Pin P/N 3390992, and Klik
Pin P/N 3406240. The 7-Ton Truck Wire Rope Assembly
(Towing Cable) NSN 4010-01-498-1903 is used in both
procedures.

2-382
TM 08780B-10

b. Basic Lift and Tow Precautions

(1) Follow the same procedures outlined in this


manual for the LVS except for the special procedures that are
resident to the 7-Ton Truck only:

CAUTION

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY OCCUR IF THE FOLLOWING


GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT (GCW) RATINGS ARE
EXCEEDED.

On Highway Off Highway


154,000 lbs 105,000 lbs
(69,916 kg) (47,670 kg)

(2) Front Lift and Tow. When lifting and


towing a 7-Ton Truck from the front, the 7-Ton Truck towing
cable, and the heavy duty tow bar must be installed on the LVS
Wrecker and the pivot beam must be installed on the 7-Ton Truck.

(3) Rear Lift and Tow. When lifting and towing


a 7-Ton Truck from the rear, the light duty tow bar, and the 7-Ton
towing cable must be installed on the LVS Wrecker.

c. Preparation of 7-Ton Truck to be Front Lifted and


Towed

Turn battery disconnect switch of disabled vehicle to OFF position


(Refer to TM 10629-10).

CAUTION

EXCEPT IN AN EXTREME EMERGENCY, DO NOT FRONT


LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED 7-TON TRUCK WITHOUT
FIRST DISCONNECTING THE PROP SHAFT BETWEEN
THE TRANSFER CASE AND AXLE NO. 2 DRIVELINE OF
THE DISABLED VEHICLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-383
TM 08780B-10

d. Front Lift and Tow of Disabled Vehicle

(1) When installing the pivot beam, the


following caution must be applied.

CAUTION

SHACKLE PIN (18) SHOULD BE INSTALLED FROM TOP


ONLY ON 7-TON TRUCK. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(2) Install shackle pin (18) on tow bar (11) and


pivot beam (3) from top and secure with retaining pin (19).

(3) Install 7-Ton Truck towing cable to


A-frame assembly before hooking up cable. (7-Ton Truck
towing cable is longer than the LVS towing cable.)

(4) Extend A-frame cylinder (20)


enough to hook small lifting chains (21) to long lifting
chains (7). Hook small chain at the 18th link from the grab
hook ends of long lifting chains (7).

2-384
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
At this point, the vehicle should be hooked up, lifted and waiting
installation of airlines and safety chains.

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED


VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS
CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE
DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

(5) If disabled vehicle’s air system is


inoperable, brake chambers on axles No. 2 and No. 3 must be
caged.

2-385
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

ENSURE INTER-VEHICLE AIRLINES ARE NOT CROSSED.


FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION

• WHEN CONNECTED, AIRLINES MUST ALLOW FOR


ALL POTENTIAL MOVEMENT BETWEEN THE
TOWING VEHICLE AND THE DISABLED VEHICLE.

• IF AIRLINES HAVE EXCESSIVE SLACK WHEN


CONNECTED, THEY SHOULD BE LOOSELY
WRAPPED AROUND TOW BAR OR BUMPER TO
TAKE UP A PORTION OF THE SLACK.

(6) Install two shackles (32.1) and pins (32.2)


on lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

2-386
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

WHEN SECURING HOOK OF SAFETY CHAIN TO A LINK


OF THE SAFETY CHAIN, THE OPEN SIDE OF THE HOOK
MUST POINT DOWN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
• When connecting safety chains, ensure safety chains
cross between wrecker and disabled vehicle.

• When routing safety chain around lower control arm of


disabled vehicle and securing chain to itself, keep chain
as tight as possible.

(7) Wrap one end of 16 ft (5 m) safety chain


(32.4) around lower right control arm (32.5) of disabled vehicle
and secure hook (32.6) of safety chain (32.4) to safety chain (32.4)
using small shackle (32.7).

NOTE
Adjust safety chain slack so safety chain just touches ground.

(8) Route other end of safety chain (32.4)


through left rear shackle (32.1) of wrecker and secure hook (32.8)
of safety chain (32.4) to appropriate link of safety chain (32.4)
using small shackle (32.7).

(9) Repeat steps (6) and (7) for opposite sides of


disabled vehicle and wrecker.

(10) Position loose end of long lifting chain (7)


up under disabled vehicle to prevent long lifting chain (7) from
dragging on ground.

2-387
TM 08780B-10

e. Lowering Vehicle

NOTE
When lowering the vehicle, follow the same procedures as
outlined in this manual except apply the following steps that are
specific to the 7-Ton Truck only.

(1) Remove two small shackles (32.7) from


hooks (32.6 and 32.8). Remove two safety chains (32.4) from
lower control arms (32.5) of disabled vehicle and shackles (32.1)
of wrecker and stow.

(2) Remove and stow two pins (32.2) and


shackles (32.1) from lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

2-388
TM 08780B-10

f. Preparation of 7-Ton Truck for Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE
Follow the same procedures outlined in this manual except for
the special instructions that are resident to the 7-Ton Truck only.

(1) Turn off battery disconnect switch of


disabled vehicle. (Refer to TM 10629-10).

CAUTION

EXCEPT IN AN EXTREME EMERGENCY, DO NOT REAR


LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED 7-TON TRUCK WITHOUT
FIRST DISCONNECTING THE PROP SHAFT BETWEEN
THE TRANSFER CASE AND AXLE NO. 1 OF THE
DISABLED VEHICLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(2) Install steering column lock (refer to


TM 10629-10).

g. Rear Lift and Tow Procedure

WARNING

LIGHT DUTY TOW BAR MUST BE USED FOR REAR LIFT


AND TOW OF 7-TON TRUCK. THE 7-TON TOWING CABLE
MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE A-FRAME PULLEY FOR
THIS PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

(1) Attach two adapters (50) to rear upper tow


eyes (51) with two pins (52) and snap pins (53).

(2) Install light duty tow bar (54) and two


adapters (50) with two pins (55) and snap pins (56).

2-389
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

ENSURE STEERING COLUMN LOCK IS INSTALLED ON 7-


TON TRUCK PRIOR TO PERFORMING REAR LIFT AND
TOW (REFER TO TM 10629-10). FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
After removing receptacle mounting hardware, replace hardware
on receptacle to help prevent loss.

(3) Remove two locknuts (57), screws (58), and


receptacle (59) from cross member (60). Push receptacle and
attached wires in towards center of vehicle.

2-390
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

WHEN INSTALLING LIFTING CHAINS, ENSURE HOOKS


DO NOT CATCH OR PINCH ANY WIRES. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(4) Install long lifting chains (7) making sure


grab hooks are hooked on gussets of rear cross member (60).

(5) Attach 7-Ton Truck Towing Cable (24) end


to rear tow eyes (63 and 68) using two shackles (64) and pins (65).

(6) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (20) allowing


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by 7-Ton Truck
towing cable (24).

2-391
TM 08780B-10

(7) Attach two shackles (32.1) and pins (32.2)


on lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

2-392
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

WHEN SECURING HOOK OF SAFETY CHAIN TO A LINK


OF THE SAFETY CHAIN, THE OPEN SIDE OF THE HOOK
MUST POINT DOWN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
• When routing safety chain around the rear axle lower
control arm of disabled vehicle and securing chain to
itself, keep chain as taught as possible.

• When connecting safety chains, ensure safety chains


cross between wrecker and disabled vehicle.

(8) Wrap one end of 16 ft (5 m) safety chain


(32.4) around lower right control arm (62.1) of disabled and secure
hook (32.6) of safety chain (32.4) to safety chain (32.4) using
small shackle (32.7).

2-393
TM 08780B-10

(9) Route one end of safety chain (32.4) through


right rear shackle (32.1) of wrecker and secure hook (32.8) of
safety chain (32.4) to appropriate link of safety chain (32.4) using
small shackle (32.7).

(10) Secure hook (32.6) of safety chain (32.4) to


appropriate link of safety chain (32.4) so both runs of chain have
enough slack so it just touches the ground.

(11) Repeat steps (9) and (10) for opposite sides


of disabled vehicle and wrecker.

h. Lowering Vehicle

NOTE
After following the procedures in the manual to lower the
vehicle, the following procedures apply.

(1) Remove two small shackles (32.7) from


hooks (32.6 and 32.8).

(2) Remove and stow two safety chains (32.4)


from lower control arms (62.1) of disabled vehicle and shackles
(32.1) of wrecker.

(3) Remove and stow two pins (32.2) and


shackles (32.1) from lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

2-394
TM 08780B-10

(4) Remove long lifting chains (7) from gussets


of rear cross member (60).

(5) Remove 7-Ton Truck towing cable (24)


from rear tow eyes (63 and 68) by removing pins (65) and shackles
(64). Stow shackles and pins.

2-395
TM 08780B-10

2-19.1. LIFT TOWING THE LVSR BY THE LVS


WRECKER

a. General Description.

(1) The LVS Wrecker can lift and tow the


LVSR. The A-frame of the wrecker is used to lift and tow vehicles
from the front or rear while unloaded.

(2) The following procedures are provided to


give specific details for lift towing the LVSR with the LVS
Wrecker. The items required to perform front lift and tow are the
LVS to LVSR Adapter P/N 3699844, Pin P/N 3390992, and Klik
Pin P/N 3406240. The additional items required to perform rear
lift and tow are the LVS Towing Kit P/N 3250986 which includes
the Tow Bar Adapter P/N 3205644, Pin P/N 1377810, and Snapper
Pin P/N 3364032. The LVS towing cable PN 1591680 (short
cable) is used in both procedures.

b. Basic Lift and Tow Precautions

(1) Follow the same procedures outlined in this


manual for the LVS except for the special procedures that are
resident to the LVSR only:

CAUTION

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF THE


FOLLOWING GCW(GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT)
RATINGS ARE EXCEEDED.

On Highway Off Highway


154,000 lbs 105,000
(69916 kg) (47670 kg)

(2) Front Lift and Tow. When lifting and

Change 1 2-395.1
TM 08780B-10

towing a LVSR from the front, the LVS towing cable, and the
heavy duty tow bar must be installed on the LVS wrecker and the
LVS to LVSR adapter NSN 2510-01-568-7223 must be installed
on the LVSR.

(3) Rear Lift and Tow. When lifting and towing


a LVSR from the rear, the heavy duty tow bar, and the LVS
towing cable must be installed on the LVS Wrecker.

c. Preparation of LVSR to be Front Lifted and Towed

Turn battery disconnect switch of disabled vehicle to OFF position


(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

CAUTION

EXCEPT IN AN EXTREME EMERGENCY, DO NOT FRONT


LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED LVSR WITHOUT FIRST
DISCONNECTING THE PROP SHAFT BETWEEN THE
TRANSFER CASE AND AXLE NO. 3 OF THE DISABLED
VEHICLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

d. Front Lift and Tow of Disabled Vehicle

(1) Install LVS to LVSR adapter (38) on front


tow eyes (39) of the disabled vehicle. Secure beam to eyes with
pins (40) and retaining pins (41).

2-395.2 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

SHACKLE PIN (18) SHOULD BE INSTALLED FROM TOP


ONLY ON LVSR. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(2) Install shackle pin (18) on tow bar (11) and


LVS to LVSR Adapter (3) from top and secure with retaining pin
(19).

(3) Install LVS towing cable to A-frame


assembly before hooking up cable.

(4) Install scuff pad (49) on the disabled


vehicle's skid plate (48). Attachment hooks (50) fit on the upper
inside edge of skid plate (48).

(5) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


hook small lifting chains (14) to long lifting chains (47). Hook
small chain at the appropriate link from the grab hook ends of long
lifting chains (47).

Change 1 2-395.3
TM 08780B-10

(6) Install limp home strut on #2 axle of


disabled vehicle (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(7) Remove propeller shaft between transfer


case and axle No. 3 of disabled vehicle (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(8) Disconnect ABS system on disabled vehicle


(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(9) Release parking brake on disabled vehicle


(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(10) Place transfer case of disabled vehicle in


neutral position (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

2-395.4 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES WHILE LIFTING.


TOWED VEHICLE COULD ROLL FORWARD, CRUSHING
YOU BETWEEN THE VEHICLES.

(11) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

NOTE

Use shackles (51) and pins (52) from the lower tow eyes of the
wrecker.

(12) Attach towing cable (53) ring ends to lifting


eyes on the LVS to LVSR Adapter (38) using shackles (51) and
pins (52).

NOTE

Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required


to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

(13) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) fully,


allowing full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing
cable (53).

Change 1 2-395.5
TM 08780B-10

(14) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting


chains (47).

(15) Remove and stow scuff pad (49).

(16) Remove pin (11), shackle (12) and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting
chains (14).

(17) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

2-395.6 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE GLAD


HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE COUPLING.

NOTE

If the disabled vehicle's air system is inoperable, the brakes must


be manually released. Refer to TM 11313-OR.

(18) If the disabled vehicle's air or brake system


is operable, connect air lines (54) to glad hands (55) at rear of
wrecker. Connect air lines (54) to front glad hands (56) of disabled
vehicle. Service-to-service (blue-to-blue). Emergency-to-
emergency (red-to-red). Ensure air lines are suspended at least 18
inches off the deck. Open ball valve (57).

(19) Connect intravehicular electrical cable.

Change 1 2-395.7
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Step (20) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(20) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

(20) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

(21) Push TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (58)


and parking brake valve (2) in to charge towed vehicle's air
system.

2-395.8 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 km) on road or 5 MPH (1.6 km) off
road when towing a disabled LVSR.

(22) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive - 3.


Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Vehicle is now
ready to tow.

e. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2). Pull TRAILER AIR SUPPLY
valve (58) out.

Change 1 2-395.9
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Insure valve is fully
engaged.

(3) Remove pin (10).

2-395.10 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

(5) Remove air lines (54) from glad hands (55)


on wrecker and glad hands (56) on disabled vehicle.

(6) Install scuff pad (49) on the disabled


vehicle's skid plate (48). Attachment hooks (50) fit on the upper
inside edge of skid plate (48).

(7) Remove long lifting chains (47) from


stowage. Thread grab hook end of chains (47) up between the
disabled vehicles skid plate (48) and the LVS to LVSR Adapter
(38). Hook the grab hooks in the angle pockets on the LVS to
LVSR Adapter (38).

Change 1 2-395.11
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Step (8) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(8) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(9) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the appropriate link from the grab hook end.

NOTE

Perform step (9.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(9.1) Using control (37.1) lower A-frame cylinder


(13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long lifting
chains (47) at the appropriate link from the grab hook end.

2-395.12 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

(10) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(11) Remove towing cable (53) from LVS to


LVSR Adapter (38) by removing pins (52) and shackles (51). Stow
shackles and pins.

(12) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook and stow long lifting
chains (47).

Change 1 2-395.13
TM 08780B-10

(13) Remove and stow scuff pad (49).

(14) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

NOTE

Perform step (14.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(14.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

2-395.14 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

(15) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

(16) Remove and stow retaining pin (46) and


shackle pin (45).

NOTE

Step (17) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(17) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

(18) Release parking brake valve (2) and drive


wrecker forward.

(19) Remove and stow LVS to LVSR Adapter


shackle (42).

(20) Remove and stow all towing equipment used


for the lift and tow of the LVSR.

Change 1 2-395.15
TM 08780B-10

f. LVSR Rear Lift and Tow

CAUTION

REAR LIFT AND TOW PROCEDURES ARE FOR SHORT


DISTANCES ONLY. LIMIT REAR LIFT AND TOW TO
DISTANCES OF LESS THAN ONE MILE (1.6 KM) OR
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT COULD RESULT.

TURNING RADIUS IS REDUCED WHEN PERFORMING


REAR LIFT AND TOW. AVOID SHARP TURNING
OPERATIONS OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT COULD
RESULT.

(1) Remove rear work light (Refer to TM


11313-OR) and stow in cab of disabled vehicle.

(2) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(63).

2-395.16 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

(3) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

Change 1 2-395.17
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Step (4) not required for LVSA1 series vehicles.

(4) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(5) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (64).

32
NOTE

Perform step (5.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(5.1) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame


control (37.1) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the
disabled vehicle's pintle hook (64).

(6) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

2-395.18 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFTING AND


TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND
A GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,
USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE
PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND
GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND
UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS – ONE THAT MEANS
BACK UP SLOWLY AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(7) Back up wrecker until tow bar (21) lunette is


approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pintle hook (64) of
the disabled vehicle.

(8) Turn pintle hook (64) on disabled vehicle so


that movable piece of the hook faces towards the ground. Unlock
and open pintle hook (64). If necessary refer to paragraph 2-33,
section e.

Change 1 2-395.19
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Adjust tow bar (21) height as needed to align parts.

(9) Extend tow bar (21) by removing retaining


pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pintle hook (64).

(10) Close and lock pintle hook (64). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

CAUTION

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER (13) AS


DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(11) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to


unhook small lifting chains (14).

WARNING

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES COULD


ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.

(12) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully

2-395.20 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

compressed.
NOTE

Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin


holes in tow bar (21).

(13) Align pin holes in tow bar (21) and install


pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

(14) Remove front drive shaft of disabled vehicle


(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(15) Disconnect ABS system of disabled vehicle


(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(16) Cage #3 axle brakes if required (Refer to


TM 11313-OR).

(17) Release parking brake on disabled vehicle


(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(18) Place transfer case of disabled vehicle in


neutral (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

NOTE

Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required


to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

(19) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to

Change 1 2-395.21
TM 08780B-10

hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).
Hook the small chains at the appropriate link from the grab hook
ends of the long lifting chains (47).

WARNING

FAILURE TO SECURE THE STEERING WHEEL COULD


RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

(20) Secure the steering wheel of the disabled


vehicle with a cargo strap. Ensure that the wheels on the disabled
vehicle are pointing straight ahead.

(21) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(22) Attach LVS towing cable (53) ends to rear


tow eyes (66) using shackles (67) and pins (68).

2-395.22 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Ring ends of towing cable (53) fit into slotted area in the lift
bracket (65).

(23) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (13) allowing


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing cables
(53). Ring ends of towing cables (53) must fit into slots in the lift
bracket (65).

(24) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting

Change 1 2-395.23
TM 08780B-10

chains (47).

(25) Remove pin (11), shackle (12) and small


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting
chains (14).

(26) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder


(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and
secure in place with pin (10).

NOTE

Step (27) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(27) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF


position.

2-395.24 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED


VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS
CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE
DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR IF
CAUTION IS NOT USED.

(28) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 km) on road or 5 MPH (1.6 km)off


road when lifting and towing a disabled LVSR.

(29) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.

Change 1 2-395.25
TM 08780B-10

Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Disabled vehicle is


now ready for rear lift and tow.

g. Lowering Vehicle

(1) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N)


and apply parking brake valve (2).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(2) Pull selector valve (31) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully
engaged.

2-395.26 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

(3) Remove pin (10).

(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from A-


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of
small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on
cylinder (13) with pin (11).

(5) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure


the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember
(63).

Change 1 2-395.27
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Step (6) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(6) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL


or REMOTE.

(7) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the appropriate link from the grab hook end.

NOTE

Perform step (7.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(7.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long
lifting chains (47) at the appropriate link from the grab hook end.

2-395.28 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

(8) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

(9) Remove towing cable (53) from rear tow


eyes (66) by removing pins (68) and shackles (67). Stow shackles
and pins.

(10) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) and lower

Change 1 2-395.29
TM 08780B-10

disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove and stow long


lifting chains (47).

(11) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

NOTE

Perform step (11.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(11.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame


cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be
wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

(12) Unlock and open pintle hook (64). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

(13) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (64).

2-395.30 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

NOTE

Perform step (13.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(13.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame


cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (64).

(14) Push selector valve (31) to the STEERING


position.

NOTE

Step (15) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(15) Turn control switch (32) to OFF position.

(16) Release parking brake valve (2). Place


transmission shifter (1) in Drive and drive wrecker forward.

Change 1 2-395.31
TM 08780B-10

(17) Remove and stow all towing equipment used


for the lift and tow of the LVSR.

2-395.32 Change 1
TM 08780B-10

2-20. MK15/15A1 WINCH OPERATION

a. General Description. On LVS vehicles, the


recovery winch is controlled and operated by either the manual
control, located at the crane control panel, or by the remote unit.
On LVSA1 series vehicles, the recovery winch can be operated by
remote control only. On both LVS and LVSA1 series vehicles, the
recovery winch has two speeds that are determined automatically
by the weight of the load. The winch is capable of a straight line
pull of 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg) or an angled pull of 10,000
pounds (4,540 kg). See data plate on left rear fender for further
load information. A side pull relief valve, mounted on main
control panel, keeps hydraulic pressure within safe limits when

2-396
TM 08780B-10

making side pulls. This prevents damage to equipment. Bottom


and side rollers on the A-frame support the winch cable during
operation. The operator and equipment are also protected by the
following safety features:

• A brake valve that applies a braking force on the winch and


prevents loads from falling or becoming uncontrolled
during operation.
• A fail-safe brake within the winch that applies
automatically anytime hydraulic pressure is lost.

b. Preparation for Winch Operation

WARNING

HEARING PROTECTION MUST BE WORN DURING


WINCHING OPERATION.

(1) When possible, position rear of vehicle in


direct line with load or object being winched.

(2) Move shifter (1) to N (neutral). Engage


parking brake (2). Shut off engine. Turn engine start switch (3) to
ON.

2-397
TM 08780B-10

(3) Chock front and back of wheels on the


number four axle.

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(4) Pull selector valve (4) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Insure valve is fully
engaged.

(5) Install lockout strut. Refer to paragraph 2-


18.f.

2-398
TM 08780B-10

c. Selection of Controls

NOTE
All winch controls, manual or remote, are proportional controls.
The more pressure on the control, the faster the selected winch
movement.

(1) Use manual controls as follows:

(a) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(b) Work manual deck winch control (6)


up and down. Make sure it has full travel.

(c) Start engine. Turn control switch (5)


to MANUAL. Winch is now ready for operation. Refer to section
d.

(2) Use remote controls as follows:

(a) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.


Remove remote control (7) from stowage compartment.

2-399
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
One of two deadman switches must be depressed to activate
remote control.

(b) With control switch (5) in REMOTE,


depress one of the deadman switches (8 or 9), and use remote deck
winch control (10) to operate control (6). Make sure mechanical
linkage has full travel. If not, notify Organizational Maintenance.

(c) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(d) Start engine. Turn control switch (5)


to remote. Winch is now ready for operation.

d. Selection of Controls (MK15A1 Series Vehicles


Only)

NOTE
The recovery winch on LVSA1 series vehicles is controlled by
remote control only.

(1) Remove remote control (1) from stowage


compartment (2).

(2) Plug remote control cable (3) into receptacle


(4) located on auxiliary hydraulics control panel (5).

(3) Start engine. Winch is now ready to


operate.

2-400
TM 08780B-10

e. Attaching and Pulling Load

WARNING

• DO NOT HANDLE WINCH CABLE UNLESS


NECESSARY AND NEVER WITH BARE HANDS.
ALWAYS WEAR LEATHER GLOVES WHEN
HANDLING CABLES. NEVER ALLOW CABLE TO
RUN THROUGH HANDS. BROKEN WIRES CAN
CAUSE INJURIES.

• DO NOT HOLD ONTO WINCH CABLE IF TENSION


IS REQUIRED TO GUIDE THE CABLE BACK ON
THE SPOOL. THE ASSISTANT WILL HOLD THE
CLEVIS, NOT THE CABLE. NEITHER THE

2-401
TM 08780B-10

OPERATOR NOT THE ASSISTANT SHOULD STAND


WITHIN ARMS LENGTH OF THE SPOOL WHEN
THE CABLE IS BEING RETRIEVED.

• DO NOT OPERATE WINCH WITH LESS THAN FIVE


COILS OF CABLE. CABLE CLAMP WILL NOT HOLD
UNDER DIRECT STRAIN.

(1) Using manual control (6) or remote control


(7), pay out winch cable while assistant pulls cable to object being
winched.

NOTE
Perform step (1.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(1.1) Using remote control (7.1), pay out winch


cable while assistant pulls cable to object being winched.

(2) To rig load, attach utility chains or cable


slings to shackles or pintle on load being recovered. Rig the load
carefully to prevent possible damage to load when winch cable is
rewound.

NOTE
On LVSA1 series vehicles, the relief valve is located on the
auxiliary hydraulic control panel. Operation has not changed.

2-402
TM 08780B-10

(3) Note position of winch cable. If cable is


more than 10 degrees right or left of vehicle center line as shown,
side pull relief valve (11) must be used. Do not exceed 23 degrees
on a downward pull.

(4) Place relief valve (11) up for straight pulls


and down for side pulls. Do not exceed 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg)
for straight pulls and 10,000 pounds (4,540 kg) for side pulls.

WARNING

DIRECT ALL PERSONNEL TO STAND CLEAR OF WINCH


CABLE AND LOAD DURING WINCHING OPERATION. A
SNAPPED CABLE OR SHIFTING LOAD CAN BE
EXTREMELY DANGEROUS.

(5) Start winch pull. If wrecker does not hold, it


will be necessary to install ground spades. Shut down engine and
refer to section e.

2-403
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STOW HOOK, DO NOT


OVERWIND WINCH CABLE.

(6) After winching operation is complete, use


winch control (6) or (10) to rewind cable. Stow winch cable on
stow hook and take up slack in winch cable.

NOTE
Perform step (6.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(6.1) After winching operation is complete, use


winch control (7.1) to rewind winch cable. Stow winch cable on
stow hook and take up slack in winch cable.

2-404
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Step (7) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(7) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(8) Push selector valve (4) to the STEERING


position.

(9) Remove wheel chocks.

(10) Clean and stow any other equipment used.

2-405
TM 08780B-10

f. Ground Spade Operations

(1) Remove two tie down rings (12) from the


vehicle's frame. Install the two tie down rings (12) into cargo bed.

NOTE
A-frame support chains must be hooked to the cargo bed first,
rather than the A-frame. Otherwise, the A-frame support chains
cannot be installed.

(2) Remove two A-frame support chains (13)


from stowage compartment. Attach hooked ends of chains (13) to
tie down rings (12).

NOTE
A-frame must be in the most upright position possible in order to
attach support chains.

(3) Remove one A-frame support strap (14)


from A-frame (15).

(4) Remove pin (16) and shackle (17) from A-


frame (15). Place shackle (17) through the free end of A-frame
support chain (13) and attach to A-frame (15) with pin (16).

2-406
TM 08780B-10

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) to install the other


A-frame support chain (13).

(6) Remove pin (18).

WARNING

GROUND SPADES AND TUBES ARE VERY HEAVY. TO


PREVENT INJURY, USE TWO PEOPLE TO HANDLE
SPADES.

(7) Remove left and right spades (19) from on


top of rear stowage compartment.

(8) Remove two ground spade tubes (20) from


the back of rear stowage compartment.

2-407
TM 08780B-10

(9) Install clevises (21) on spade tubes (20)


using pins (22) and retainers (23).

(10) Install clevises (21) on wrecker tow eyes


(24) using pins (25) and retainers (26).

(11) Connect spades (19) to tubes (20) using pins


(27) and retainers (28).

(12) Connect spades (19) together, using pins


(29) and retainers (30).

2-408
TM 08780B-10

(13) Using two short chains (31) and two lifting


shackles (32), install the two lifting shackles (32) onto the large
eyelets (33) of the chains. Connect shackles to holes provided in
spades (19) with pins (34).

(14) Start engine.

2-409
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
• A-frame can be operated by either the manual or the
remote control.

• LVSA1 A-frame can only be operated by manual control.


Steps (15) through (17) not required on LVSA1 series
vehicles.

(15) Choose the method of operating the A-frame


cylinder by placing control switch (5) in either the MANUAL or
REMOTE position.

(16) If using the REMOTE position, depress one


of the two deadman switches (8 or 9), move control (35) to the left
to raise cylinder and right to lower.

(17) If using the MANUAL position, move


control (36) up to raise cylinder or down to lower.

NOTE
Perform step (17.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(17.1) Using control (36.1) located on the auxiliary


hydraulic control panel (36.2), move control up to raise the
cylinder or down to lower.

2-410
TM 08780B-10

(18) Using control (35 or 36), lower wrecker


cylinder (37) about half of the cylinder travel. Remove pin (38)
and shackle (39) from cylinder (37). Using two long chains (40)
with large eyelets and hooks, connect eyelets to shackle (39) on
cylinder (37) with pin (38).

NOTE
Perform step (18.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(18.1) Using control (36.1), lower wrecker cylinder


(37) about half of the cylinder travel. Remove pin (38) and
shackle (39) from cylinder (37). Using two long chains (40) with
large eyelets and hooks, connect eyelets to shackle (39) on cylinder
(37) with pin (38).

(19) Connect hooked ends of chains (40) from


wrecker cylinder to ground spade chains (31). Install two small
shackles (41) on hooks so that the attached chains will not come
apart.

2-411
TM 08780B-10

(20) Install chain spreader bar (42) three links


down from wrecker cylinder on both chains (40).

(21) Start winching procedures. If back of


wrecker lifts off ground, reposition ground spades. Release
tension on winch cable. Raise wrecker cylinder to raise ground
spades.

(22) Lower wrecker cylinder (37) and ground


spades (19). Make pull. Repeat steps (11) and (12) as necessary.

(23) Complete winching operation.

2-412
TM 08780B-10

g. Stowage of Ground Spades After Operation

(1) Lower wrecker cylinder (37) and remove


spreader bar (42) from between lifting chains (40).

(2) Remove two small shackles (41) from lifting


chains (40). Separate chains (40 and 31).

(3) Remove pin (38) and shackle (39). Remove


chains (40) from shackle (39). Reinstall pin (38) and shackle (39)
on cylinder (37).

(4) Remove two pins (34), shackles (32), and chains


(31-) from spade assembly.

2-413
TM 08780B-10

(5) Remove retainers (30) and pins (29) holding


spades (19) together.

(6) Remove two retainers (28) and pins (27)


holding spade tubes (20) to ground spades (19). Stow spades (19)
on cargo body.

(7) Remove tubes (20) and shackles (21) from


tow eyes (24) by removing retainers (26) and pins (25).

(8) Remove shackles (21) from tubes (20) by


removing retainers (23) and pins (22). Stow parts.

h. Stowage of A-frame for Travel

(1) Install one A-frame support strap (14) on A-


frame and winch (16). Take up all slack in strap (14) to support
weight of A-frame.

2-414
TM 08780B-10

(2) Remove pin (16), shackle (17), and support


chain (13) from the side of the A-frame that is not being supported
by strap.

(3) Install pin (16) and shackle (17) back on A-


frame (15). Install remaining support strap (14) and support A-
frame (15) by eliminating all slack.

(4) Remove strap (14) that was used to first


support the A-frame (15) for removing support chain (13).

(5) Remove pin (16), shackle (17), and support


chain (13) from A-frame (15).

2-415
TM 08780B-10

(6) Install pin (16), and shackle (17) back on A-


frame. Install last support strap (14) and take up all slack to
support A-frame (15).

(7) Remove hooked ends of support chains (13)


from tie down rings (12).

(8) Remove tie down rings (12) from cargo bed


and install back on vehicle's frame.

(9) Stow and secure all chains and equipment.

(10) Remove lockout strut. Refer to paragraph 2-


18 i.

2-416
TM 08780B-10

2-21. MK15/15A1 AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS FOR TOOL


USAGE

a. Preparation for Use

(1) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out to length needed.


Then slowly allow hose to retract several inches. This will apply
the hose reel lock.

(2) Match up quick disconnect couplings (2 and


3) with tool ends (4 and 5).

(3) Push couplings (2 and 3) onto tool ends (4


and 5). Couplings will click when they are securely attached.

2-417
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
If coupling sleeves cannot be rotated, the couplings are not fully
engaged with tool.

(4) Rotate safety lock sleeves (6 and 7). This


will prevent hoses from being accidentally disconnected.

(5) Place transmission shifter (8) in (N) neutral,


apply PARKING BRAKE valve (9), and start engine.

2-418
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(6) Pull SELECTOR VALVE (10) out.

b. Setting Controls

NOTE
Step (1) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(1) Move crane control switch (11) to


MANUAL.

CAUTION

NEVER EXCEED GALLON PER MINUTE (GPM) RATING


MARKED ON TOOLS. DAMAGE TO TOOL WILL RESULT.

NOTE
Before setting flow control valve, check the following table for
the tools required GPM range.

2-419
TM 08780B-10

TABLE 2-9. TOOL GPM FLOW RANGES


TOOL REQUIRED OPTIMUM
FLOW FLOW
ONE INCH IMPACT

7-9 GPM 9 GPM

HALF-INCH IMPACT

4-12 GPM 10 GPM

HALF-INCH DRILL

4-12 GPM –

CHAIN SAW

7-9 GPM 8 GPM

2-420
TM 08780B-10

(2) Set flow control valve (12) as follows:

(e) Rotate thumb screw (13)


counterclockwise.

(f) Move handle (14) to the required


GPM range for the tool being used. This is indicated on dial plate
(15), which reads 0-10 GPM and corresponds with the tool.

(g) Lock handle (14) at desired setting


by turning thumb screw (13) clockwise. Do not over tighten
thumb screw (13).

(3) Push AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (16)


fully up to its detent position, labeled pressure.

NOTE
• On LVSA1 series vehicles, AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
lever is on the auxiliary control panel located on the
driver side (left) rear fender.

• Perform step (3.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(3.1) Push AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever


(16.1) up to ON position.

2-421
TM 08780B-10

c. Tool Operation

WARNING

• ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN


OPERATING HYDRAULIC POWER TOOLS.

• USE GLOVES WHEN OPERATING POWER TOOLS.


TOOLS WILL BECOME HOT AFTER A SHORT
PERIOD.

• DO NOT OPERATE HYDRAULIC TOOLS NEAR


ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES OR ELECTRIC
POWER LINES. CONTACT OR NEAR CONTACT
WITH ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES OR
ELECTRIC POWER LINES COULD CAUSE SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH BY ELECTROCUTION.

(1) One inch drive, impact

(a) Set controls. Refer to section b.

(b) Push lever (18) up for clockwise


rotation. Push lever (18) down for counterclockwise rotation.

(c) To operate impact, pull trigger (17).

(d) To stop impact, release trigger (17).

2-422
TM 08780B-10

(2) Half-inch drive impact

(a) Set controls. Refer to section b.

(b) To operate impact, pull trigger (19).

(c) Push spool (20) right for clockwise


rotation, and left for counterclockwise rotation.

(d) To stop impact, release trigger (19).

(e) To install adapter (21), pull outward


on retainer sleeve (22) and insert adapter (21). Release sleeve (22)
to lock adapter.

(3) Half-inch drill

(a) Set controls. Refer to section b.

(b) Push spool (24) right for clockwise


rotation, and left for counterclockwise rotation.

(c) To operate drill, pull trigger (23).

(d) To stop drill, release trigger (23).

2-423
TM 08780B-10

(4) Chain saw

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE WHEN HANDLING AND


OPERATING CHAIN SAW. KEEP ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR
OF OPERATING AREA.

NOTE
Chain saw will not operate until safety catch is depressed.

(a) Set controls. Refer to section b.

(b) To operate saw, grasp handle so that


safety catch (22) will be depressed.

(c) Pull trigger (23).

(d) To stop chain saw, release trigger


(23).

2-424
TM 08780B-10

d. After Operations

(1) Pull AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (16)


down.

NOTE
Perform step (1.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(1.1) Pull AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever


(16.1) down to OFF position.

2-425
TM 08780B-10

(2) Rotate thumb screw (13) counterclockwise


and move handle (14) to 0 GPM. Rotate thumb screw clockwise to
lock handle.

NOTE
Step (3) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(3) Move control switch (11) to OFF.

(4) Shut down engine.

(5) Push SELECTOR VALVE (10) in.

(6) Rotate safety lock sleeves (6 and 7).


Remove couplings (2 and 3) from tool.

2-426
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

NEVER ALLOW HOSE TO FREELY WIND ON REEL BY


ITSELF. DAMAGE TO REEL WILL RESULT.

(7) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out several inches,


and slowly walk hose in on reel.

2-22. MK15 AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS FOR


ADDITIONAL CRANE USAGE

a. Preparation for Coupling

CAUTION

WHEN SUPPLYING HYDRAULICS TO ANOTHER


VEHICLE, THE HYDRAULIC FLUID OF BOTH VEHICLES
WILL MIX. THE FLUID LEVEL IN THE HYDRAULIC

2-427
TM 08780B-10

RESERVOIR MUST, THEREFORE, BE CHECKED SO THAT


IT DOES NOT BECOME OVER FILLED.

(1) Position vehicle as close as possible to


trailer requiring hydraulics.

(2) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out to length needed.


Then slowly allow hose to retract several inches. This will apply
the hose reel lock.

(3) Remove adapters (2 and 3) from stowage


compartment.

(4) Match up quick disconnect couplings (4 and


5) with adapters (2 and 3).

(5) Push couplings (4 and 5) onto adapters (2


and 3). The couplings will click when they are securely attached.

2-428
TM 08780B-10

(6) Rotate safety lock sleeves (6 and 7). This


will prevent hoses from being accidentally disconnected.

(7) Remove hydraulic hoses (8 and 9), between


front power unit and trailer, as follows:

(a) Pull back on quick disconnect


coupling sleeve (10). Grasp hose (8) and pull away.

(b) Repeat step (a) for remaining


hydraulic hose (9).

(c) Insert protective plugs (11) in quick disconnect


couplings (10).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK.

(8) Attach hydraulic hose (1) to trailer hoses (8


and 9). Make sure that the hydraulic hoses are properly engaged
and secure

(9) Pull SELECTOR VALVE (12) out.

2-429
TM 08780B-10

(10) Place transmission shifter (13) in (N)


neutral. Apply PARKING BRAKE valve (14), and start engine.

b. Setting Controls

NOTE
Step (1) not required on LVSAI series vehicles. (1) Move control
switch (15) to MANUAL.

2-430
TM 08780B-10

(2) Set flow control valve (16) as follows:

(a) Rotate thumb screw (17)


counterclockwise.

NOTE
Increasing the flow control valve setting does not increase
hydraulic power.

(b) Move handle (18) to 5 as indicated


on dial plate (19).

(c) Lock handle (18) in the setting by


turning thumb screw (17) clockwise. Do not over tighten thumb
screw (17).

(3) Push AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (20)


fully up to its detent position, labeled PRESSURE.

2-431
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
• On LVSA1 series vehicles, AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
lever is part of the auxiliary control panel, located on the
left rear fender.

• Perform step (3.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(3.1) Push AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever


(20.1) up to the ON position.

(4) If an electrical failure has occurred in the


trailer being slaved, the crane's Emergency Manual Shut Down
Valve must be closed as shown.

CLOSE THIS VALVE IF AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE


HAS OCCURRED ON THE MK15 BEING SLAVED.

2-432
TM 08780B-10

CLOSE THIS VALVE IF AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE


HAS OCCURRED ON THE MK17 BEING SLAVED.

NOTE
Perform step (4.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(4.1) If an electrical failure has occurred in the


trailer being slaved, push and hold the crane's MANUAL
OVERRIDE pushbutton switch.

2-433
TM 08780B-10

PUSH AND HOLD THIS VALVE CLOSED IF AN


ELECTRICAL FAILURE HAS OCCURRED ON
THE MK15A1 BEING SLAVED.

PUSH AND HOLD THIS VALVE CLOSED IF AN


ELECTRICAL FAILURE HAS OCCURRED ON
THE MK17A1 BEING SLAVED

c. After Operations

(1) Pull AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (20)


down.

NOTE
Perform step (1.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

2-434
TM 08780B-10

(1.1) Pull AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever


(20.1) down to OFF position.

(2) Rotate thumb screw (17) counterclockwise


and move handle (18) to 0. Rotate thumb screw (17) clockwise to
lock handle.

NOTE
Step (3) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(3) Move control switch (15) to OFF.

(4) Push SELECTOR VALVE (12) in. Shut


engine down.

2-435
TM 08780B-10

(5) Remove hydraulic hose (1) from trailer


hoses (8 and 9) by pulling back on adapter sleeves.

(6) Remove protective plugs (11) from quick


disconnect couplings (10) and insert trailer hoses (8 and 9).

(7) Remove adapters (2 and 3) from hydraulic


hose (1) by rotating safety locks (6 and 7), then pulling back on
quick disconnect sleeves.

2-436
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

NEVER ALLOW HOSE TO FREELY WIND ON REEL BY


ITSELF. DAMAGE TO REEL WILL RESULT.

(8) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out several inches


and slowly walk hose in on reel.

2-23. MK16/16A1 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION

a. General Description. The fifth wheel accepts a


3-1/2 inch (88.9 mm) kingpin and is rated at 46,000 pounds
(20,884 kg). It has primary and secondary locks that provide
positive trailer locking in any one of the three following
conditions:

CAUTION

TO PREVENT VEHICLE DAMAGE, NEVER USE THE


FULLY LOCKED OUT MODE WHEN OPERATING IN OFF-
HIGHWAY CONDITIONS.

(1) Fully Locked Out. This mode is only


intended for use when the center of gravity of the towed vehicle is
significantly above the surface of the fifth wheel and operating on
highway conditions where highway speeds of 55 MPH may be
attained.

2-437
TM 08780B-10

(2) Fully Oscillating. This is the primary


operating mode and is intended for use in all applications where
the center of gravity of the load is at or below the surface of the
fifth wheel. It is also used in all off-highway conditions.

(3) Half Oscillation. This mode is used at the


discretion of the operator and is intended for unique situations
where the side-to-side articulation needs to be limited to 30
degrees on each side.

b. Pivot Lock Adjustment

(1) Highway adjustment (fully locked out).

(a) Loosen four capscrews (1) on left


cover plate (2).

(b) Rotate lockplate (3) in position with


rib on fifth wheel (4).

(c) Tighten four capscrews (1) securely.

(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) on right side


cover plate.

2-438
TM 08780B-10

(2) Off-highway adjustment (fully oscillating).

(a) Loosen four capscrews (1) on left


cover plate (2).

(b) Rotate lockplate (3) to clear fifth


wheel rib (4).

(c) Tighten four capscrews (1) securely.

(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) for right


side lockplate.

2-439
TM 08780B-10

(3) Limited Adjustment (half oscillation).

(a) Remove four capscrews (1),


lockwashers (5), washers (6), and left cover plate (2).

(b) Remove left lockout plate (3).

(c) Turn lockout plate (3) so that lower


step (7) on the plate engages fifth wheel rib (4).

(d) Install four capscrews (1),


lockwashers (5), washers (6), and cover plate (2). Tighten
capscrews (1).

(e) Repeat steps (a) thru (d) for right


side.

2-440
TM 08780B-10

c. Preparation for Coupling

(1) Position vehicle so that coupler jaws are


directly in line with the semi-trailer kingpin. Place transmission in
neutral and engage PARKING BRAKE.

(2) Adjust landing gear of semi-trailer so that


semi-trailer is slightly lower than fifth wheel.

(3) Chock wheels of semi-trailer.

(4) Open secondary (7) and primary (8) fifth


wheel locks by pulling handles OUT. Handles will lock in the
open position by lifting up.

d. Coupling

CAUTION

USE GROUND GUIDE WHEN COUPLING TO SEMI-


TRAILER. DAMAGE COULD RESULT TO VEHICLE AND
TRAILER IF NOT PROPERLY GUIDED.

2-441
TM 08780B-10

(1) Release PARKING BRAKE and shift


transmission to R (reverse). Slowly back vehicle until semi-trailer
starts up fifth wheel ramps (9). Stop vehicle. Engage PARKING
BRAKE, and shift transmission to N (neutral).

CAUTION

• BE SURE VEHICLE AIR LINES ARE PROPERLY


CONNECTED. VEHICLE SERVICE AIR LINE (BLUE
TAG) CONNECTS TO SEMI-TRAILER SERVICE AIR
LINE (BLUE TAG). VEHICLE EMERGENCY AIR
LINE (RED TAG) CONNECTS TO SEMI-TRAILER
EMERGENCY AIR LINE (RED TAG).

• TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE


GLAD HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE
COUPLING.

(2) Connect air lines (10 and 11) to semi-trailer


air lines-service to service, emergency to emergency.

2-442
TM 08780B-10

2-443
TM 08780B-10

(3) Charge semi-trailer air system by pushing in


TRAILER AIR SUPPLY VALVE (12).

(4) Release PARKING BRAKE, shift


transmission to R (reverse), and apply semi-trailer service brakes
with TRAILER HAND VALVE (13). Back vehicle under semi-
trailer until coupler laws close around semi-trailer kingpin.

(5) Test fifth wheel connection by performing


the following steps:

(a) Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY


VALVE (12) to discharge trailer air system and lockup trailer
brakes.

(b) Place transmission in D-1 gear and


slightly depress accelerator pedal. The vehicle will NOT move
forward if fifth wheel is properly connected to semi-trailer.

(c) Repeat steps (3) and (4) above if


semi-trailer is not properly connected.

(d) Notify Organizational Maintenance


if coupling failure is repeated.

(e) If coupling test proves the semi-


trailer is securely connected to the fifth wheel, shift transmission to
"N" (neutral), engage vehicle PARKING BRAKE, and recharge
the semi-trailer air system by again pushing in the TRAILER AIR
SUPPLY VALVE (12).

(6) Check to see that primary and secondary


lock handles (7 and 8) are no longer in the unlocked position.

2-444
TM 08780B-10

(7) Plug the inter-vehicle electrical cable (14)


into the receptacle on semi-trailer.

(8) Raise semi-trailer landing gear.

(9) Test all trailer lights for proper operation.

(10) Test brake system for proper operation


before driving.

e. Preparation for Uncoupling

(1) Chock wheels of semi-trailer.

(2) Engage vehicle PARKING BRAKE, and


shift transmission to N (neutral).

2-445
TM 08780B-10

(3) Lower semi-trailer landing gear until semi-


trailer just starts to raise from fifth wheel.

(4) Disconnect inter-vehicle electrical cable


(14), and secure on vehicle.

f. Uncoupling

(1) Pull secondary lock handle (7) OUT, lifting


up on handle until it locks in OUT position.

(2) Pull primary lock handle (8) OUT, lifting up


on handle until it locks in OUT position.

(2.1) Install fifth wheel support blocks (8.1) under


fifth wheel (8.2).

(3) Release PARKING BRAKE, shift


transmission to D (drive), and slowly move vehicle forward until

2-446
TM 08780B-10

fifth wheel is clear of kingpin. Close air supply valves (11.1)


located on crossmember underneath fifth wheel assembly.
Disconnect air lines (10 and 11) from semi-trailer connections.
Secure air lines on vehicle. Slowly drive vehicle out from under
semi-trailer.

(4) Remove and stow fifth wheel support blocks


(8.1) in brackets.

2-24. MK16 WINCH OPERATION

a. General Description. The heavy duty recovery


winch is controlled and operated by a remote control unit. The
winch has two speeds that are determined automatically by the
weight of the load. The winch is capable of a straight line pull of
60,00 pounds (27,240 kg) and an angled pull of 10,000 pounds
(4,540 kg). (See data plate on winch for further load information).
A side pull relief valve, mounted on the winch, keeps hydraulic
pressure within safe limits, preventing equipment or winch

2-447
TM 08780B-10

damage. The side pull rollers are used to support the winch cable
during operations. These rollers are adjustable. Rollers should be
in the inboard position for winching the MK48/48A1 and
MK16/16A1 to the M870/M870A1/M870A2 trailer. The rollers
should be in the outboard position during other operations. The
following safety features also protect the operator and equipment
from injury and damage. They are:

• A brake valve that applies a braking force on the winch,


preventing loads from falling or becoming uncontrolled
during operation.
• A fail-safe brake, within the winch, that applies
automatically anytime hydraulic pressure is lost.

b. Preparation for Winch Operation

(1) When possible, position rear of vehicle in


direct line with load or object being winched.

(2) Shift transmission (1) to N (neutral).

(3) Chock front and back of wheels on the


trailer.

2-448
TM 08780B-10

(4) Remove remote control (3) from stowage


compartment. Remove cap (4) from receptacle (5). Plug remote
control (3) into receptacle (5).

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

2-449
TM 08780B-10

(5) Pull selector valve (b) out to the


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

c. Attaching Load

WARNING

• HEARING PROTECTION MUST BE WORN WHILE


OPERATING WINCH.

• DO NOT HANDLE CABLE WITH BARE HANDS.


WEAR LEATHER GLOVES WHEN HANDLING
CABLE. DO NOT ALLOW CABLE TO RUN
THROUGH HANDS. BROKEN WIRES OR FRAYED
CABLE CAN CAUSE INJURIES.

(1) Using winch OUT switch (7), pay out winch


cable while assistant pulls cable to object being winched.

(2) Rig the load as necessary.

2-450
TM 08780B-10

d. Pulling load

WARNING

DIRECT ALL PERSONNEL TO STAND CLEAR OF WINCH


CABLE AND LOAD DURING WINCHING. A SNAPPED
CABLE OR SHIFTING LOAD CAN BE EXTREMELY
DANGEROUS.

CAUTION

• WHEN PULLING A LOAD, DO NOT OPERATE


WINCH WITH LESS THAN FIVE TURNS OF CABLE
ON WINCH DRUM. THE WINCH CABLE CLAMP
ALONE WILL NOT HOLD AGAINST A LOAD.

• TO AVOID CABLE DAMAGE, BE SURE ROLLERS


ARE INSTALLED IN OUTBOARD SET OF HOLES.

(1) If winch cable (8) is outside black lines (9),


turn side pull relief valve (10) to ON. Winch is restricted to
10,000 pounds (4,540 kg) with valve (10) in the ON position.

(2) Using winch IN switch (11), take up slack in


cable. Begin winch pull.

2-451
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

• DO NOT HOLD ON TO THE WINCH CABLE. IF


TENSION IS REQUIRED TO GUIDE THE CABLE
BACK ON THE SPOOL, THE ASSISTANT WILL
HOLD THE CLEVIS, NOT THE CABLE. NEITHER
THE OPERATOR NOR ASSISTANT SHOULD STAND
WITHIN ARMS LENGTH OF THE SPOOL WHEN
THE CABLE IS BEING RETREIVED.

• DO NOT HANDLE CABLE UNLESS NECESSARY


AND NEVER WITH BARE HANDS. ALWAYS WEAR
LEATHER GLOVES WHEN HANDLING CABLE.
NEVER ALLOW CABLE TO RUN THROUGH HANDS.
BROKEN WIRES CAN CAUSE INJURIES.

CAUTION

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STOW HOOK DO NOT OVER


WIND WINCH CABLE.

2-452
TM 08780B-10

(3) After winching operation is complete,


rewind winch cable and attach clevis (13) to stowage hook (12).
Take up slack in winch cable.

(4) Disconnect remote control cable from


receptacle (5). Install cap (4) on receptacle. Stow remote control
(3) in stowage compartment.

(5) Push selector valve (6) into the STEERING


POSITION.

(6) Remove wheel chocks.

(7) Clean and stow any other equipment used,


including slings or utility chains.

2-453
TM 08780B-10

2-25. MK17 CRANE OPERATION

a. General Description. While the vehicle is moving,


the Material Handling Crane (MHC) is secure in its folded position
by a pin. When unfolded, the crane has four basic functions. They
are the main boom, folding boom, and two extension booms. The
main boom column can rotate 350 degrees with a 10 degree dead
spot at the main control panel. The crane can lift 9,000 pounds
(4,086 kg) when extended 15 feet (4.51 m) outward (see lifting
capacity chart located at control panel for further information).

The crane is operated by hydraulics supplied by the MK48/48A1


through the main control panel. The main control panel provides
the controls to manually operate all functions of the crane and
stabilizer.

Each control is proportional. The more travel of the control, the


faster the selected crane movement. The crane may also be
operated by a remote control unit with the same operating
functions, except for stabilizer controls, as the main control. Left
and right stabilizers are provided to stabilize, support, and level the

2-454
TM 08780B-10

vehicle while the crane is operating. An additional stabilizer


control is provided, separate from the main control panel, on the
left side of the vehicle. Built within the hydraulic system of the
crane are several safety features that protect the equipment and
operating personnel. They are as follows:

• Check valves will prevent a load from falling in the event


of pressure loss because of hydraulic line failure.

• A suspended load on the crane can be lowered when


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48/48A1 if external
hydraulic lines from the MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Wrecker/
Recovery vehicle are attached to the quick disconnect
couplings at the front of the crane trailer. Should a
hydraulic failure occur in crane's trailer, the suspended load
can be lowered by adjusting the cylinder hold valve. This
procedure should only be done by Organizational
Maintenance personnel.

• The crane is equipped with an overload protection system


that prevents lifting greater loads, at a given distance, than
the crane can handle. All functions that decrease overload
remain functional.

2-455
TM 08780B-10

b. Pre-operational Safety Checks

(1) When possible, position vehicle on firm,


level ground.

(2) Place transmission shifter (1) in N (neutral).


Pull PARKING BRAKE valve (2) OUT.

(3) Shut down engine. Turn engine start switch


to ON. Engine warning buzzer will sound. This is normal.

WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR
IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING
WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.

(4) Pull selector valve (3), mounted on right


fender of power unit, to AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.
Make sure valve is fully engaged.

2-456
TM 08780B-10

(5) Remove remote control (6) and cable (7)


from stowage compartment (8).

(6) Connect one end of the remote control cable


(7) to receptacle (10) and secure with latch (4). Close stowage
compartment door.

2-457
TM 08780B-10

(7) Connect other end of cable (7) to remote


control receptacle (18) and secure with latch (19).

(8) Turn control switch (5) to REMOTE. Red


indicator light (20) on remote control (6) should be ON indicating
control is ready for operation.

NOTE
• One of the two deadman switches (21) must be depressed
to activate remote control.

• Any failure of the remote control Pre-Operational check


will not prevent the use of crane. This, however, prevents
the use of any remote control operation until repairs have
been made.

2-458
TM 08780B-10

2-459
TM 08780B-10

(9) Depress one of the two deadman switches


(21) on remote control. Green indicator light (22) should be ON
indicating connection between the remote control and main control
panel has been made.

(10) Depress one of the deadman switches (21)


and hold. Check that control levers (14, 15, 16 and 17) are locked
into the center (neutral) position, and that these levers are in a
straight line. If any lever will not lock or does not line up, notify
Organizational Maintenance.

(11) While depressing deadman switch (21),


move control levers (23, 24, 25, and 26) of the remote control in
both directions. Make sure main control panel levers agree with
the remote control and are functioning properly. If controls do not
agree or are not functioning properly, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

(12) Turn control switch (5) OFF.

2-460
TM 08780B-10

c. Deploying Stabilizers

NOTE
All crane controls, manual and remote, are proportional. The
more travel of the control, the faster the selected crane
movement.

(1) Start engine and turn control switch (5) to


MANUAL.

2-461
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

STAY CLEAR OF STABILIZERS WHILE IN OPERATION TO


AVOID BEING CRUSHED.

(2) Using control station (27) at right rear of


trailer, deploy right stabilizer as follows:

(a) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve


(28) in the UNLOCK position.

(b) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (29), slowly extend outrigger beam (30) fully.

(c) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve


(28) in the LOCK position.

(d) Place Stabilizer Cylinder lock valve


(31) in the UNLOCK position.

2-462
TM 08780B-10

(e) Pull retaining pin (32) to free quick


release cable (33).

NOTE
There must be a minimum of one to two inches of slack in cable
to allow stabilizer to rotate into the working position.

(f) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (29), slowly extend stabilizer cylinder (34) until there is
approximately one to two inches (25-50 mm) of slack in quick
release cable (33).

2-463
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF


STABILIZERS WHEN PULLING TOWARDS REAR OF
VEHICLE.

(g) Remove quick release pin (35) from


stabilizer cylinder lock pin (36). Remove lock pin (36). Pull
stabilizer (34) towards rear of vehicle to start stabilizer in the
downward position.

(h) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (29), slowly retract stabilizer cylinder (34) fully. Stabilizer
will rotate into position.

(i) Using cable release handle (37),


remove quick release cable (33) from stabilizer cylinder (34).

(j) Install stabilizer cylinder lock pin


(36) and quick release pin (35).

(k) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (29), extend stabilizer cylinder (34) until it is
approximately three inches above the ground.

2-464
TM 08780B-10

(6) At main control station (4), deploy left


stabilizer as follows:

(a) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve


(38) in the UNLOCK position.

(b) Using NEAR SIDE stabilizer control


(39), slowly extend outrigger beam (40) fully.

(c) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve


(38) in the LOCK position.

2-465
TM 08780B-10

(d) Place stabilizer cylinder lock valve


(41) in the UNLOCK position.

(e) Pull retaining pin (42) to free quick


release cable (43).

2-466
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
There must be a minimum of one to two inches of slack in cable
to allow stabilizer to rotate into the working position.

(f) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (39), slowly extend stabilizer cylinder (44) until there is
approximately one to two inches (25-50 mm) of slack in quick
release cable (43).

WARNING

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF


STABILIZER WHEN PULLING TOWARDS REAR OF
VEHICLE.

(g) Remove quick release pin (45) from


stabilizer lock pin (46). Remove lock pin (46). Pull stabilizer (44)
towards rear of vehicle to start stabilizer in the downward position.

(h) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER


control (39), slowly retract stabilizer cylinder (44) fully. Stabilizer
will rotate into position.

2-467
TM 08780B-10

(i) Using cable release handle (47),


remove quick release cable (34) from stabilizer cylinder (44).

(j) Install stabilizer lock pin (46) and


quick release pin (45).

(k) Using NEAR SIDE stabilizer control


(34), extend stabilizer cylinder (44) until it is approximately three
inches above the ground.

2-468
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

IF THE MK48/48A1/17/17A1 HAS A CARGO LOAD IN


EXCESS OF 31,000 LBS (14,074 KG), STABILIZER SHOULD
BE EXTENDED ONLY UNTIL ENGINE LABORS OR
INCREASES IN RPMS. THIS MAY OR MAY NOT RESULT
IN REAR SPRINGS COMING OFF OF THEIR SEATS AS
INDICATED IN STEP (l), BELOW. IN SUCH CASES,
UNLOAD HALF OF THE CARGO AND REPEAT STEP (1)
BEFORE UNLOADING REMAINDER OF THE CARGO.

NOTE
To provide greater stability never lift any tire off of the ground.

(l) Using both NEAR SIDE and FAR


SIDE stabilizer controls (39 and 48), extend stabilizer cylinder
until both rear springs are off their spring seats.

(m) Place both stabilizer cylinder lock


valves (31 and 41) in the LOCK position.

2-469
TM 08780B-10

d. Unstowing Crane

WARNING

CRANE OPERATIONS HAVE INHERENT HAZARDS THAT


CANNOT BE MECHANICALLY SAFE-GUARDED.
OPERATOR AND ASSISTING PERSONNEL ARE
REQUIRED TO WEAR HARD HATS AND SAFETY SHOES.

CAUTION

EXTENSION BOOMS MUST BE FULLY RETRACTED


BEFORE UNSTOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN
DAMAGE CRANE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

NOTE
• If any unwanted crane movement (creep) occurs during
operation, notify Organizational Maintenance that the
crane requires adjustment.

• Use manual controls to unstow crane.

2-470
TM 08780B-10

(1) Remove retaining pin (49) and stowage pin


(50).

(2) Use Folding Boom control (15) to lift


folding boom (51) off of boom rest (52). Folding boom brackets
(53) must be off of rest (52) so that crane can be unstowed.

(3) Use main boom control (16) to raise main


boom (54) to 86 degrees as indicated by indicator (55) on main
boom (54).

2-471
TM 08780B-10

(4) Use Folding Boom control (15) to raise


folding boom (51), to clear any objects when crane is rotated.

NOTE
Crane can now be operated from the manual controls or from the
remote control. To select remote control, refer to step (10) below.

(5) Use main boom control (16) to position


main boom (54) at 45 degrees, as indicated by indicator (55) on
main boom, for maximum lifting capacity. Refer to one of the
capacity information data plates. They are located on the main
control panel, folding boom, and remote control.

(6) Use Folding Boom control (15) to raise or


lower folding boom (51) in the horizontal position. This is the
maximum lifting position.

CAUTION

BE CAREFUL WHEN RETRACTING EXTENSION BOOMS


IF FOLDING BOOM IS ABOVE THE HORIZONTAL
POSITION. LOAD MAY SWING AND CONTACT THE
CRANE.

2-472
TM 08780B-10

(7) Use Extension Boom control (14) to extend


or retract extension booms (56).

(8) Use Rotation control (17) to rotate crane


clockwise or counterclockwise.

(9) Unstow hook (57) by pulling back on latch


(58) and lifting off of pin (59).

2-473
TM 08780B-10

(10) Use of remote control.

(a) Place strap (60) over head-around


neck. Hook buckle (61) on belt. Adjust strap (60) as necessary.

NOTE
One of the two deadman switches (21) must be depressed to
activate remote controls.

(b) Depress one of the two deadman


switches (21).

(c) Move extension boom control (23)


up to extend or down to retract extension booms.

(d) Move folding boom control (24) up


to raise or down to lower folding booms.

2-474
TM 08780B-10

(e) Move main boom control (25) up to


raise or down to lower main boom.

(f) Move rotation control (26) up to


rotate crane clockwise or down to rotate crane counterclockwise.

NOTE
When the MK48/48A1/17/17A1 is towing a trailer, always unload
the vehicle payload first and then unload the trailer payload.
Always load the trailer payload first and then load the vehicle
payload.

e. Emergency Operating Procedures

NOTE
Manual controls must be used to operate crane when an
electrical failure has occurred.

(1) Electrical Failure. In the event of electrical


failure, all crane movement will stop. Operate crane as follows:

(a) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(b) Pull Emergency Manual Shut Down


valve (62) CLOSED.

(c) Complete crane operation with


manual controls.

2-475
TM 08780B-10

(d) Notify Organizational Maintenance


immediately.

(2) Hydraulic Failure. If hydraulic failure


occurs, notify Organizational Maintenance immediately.

f. Stowing Crane

(1) Lift hook (57) and secure on stowage pin


(59). Make sure latch (58) closes so hook is secure.

2-476
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Use manual controls to stow crane.

(2) Use Rotation Control (17) to align boom


stowage plates (63).

CAUTION

EXTENSION BOOMS MUST BE FULLY RETRACTED


BEFORE STOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN
DAMAGE CRANE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

2-477
TM 08780B-10

(3) Use Boom Extension control (14) to fully


retract both extension booms (56).

(4) Use main boom control (16) to raise main


boom (54) to 86 degrees as indicated on indicator (55).

(5) Use Folding Boom control (15) to slowly


fold boom (51). Hold control down until folding boom will not
travel any further.

(6) Use Main Boom Control (16) to slowly


lower main boom (54) to stowed position.

(7) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

2-478
TM 08780B-10

(8) With control switch (5) in the OFF position,


lift Folding Boom Control (15) so that brackets (53) are down on
boom rest (52).

(9) Push controls (14, 15, 16 and 17) all the way
up and down to release hydraulic pressure.

(10) Install stowage pin (50) and retaining pin


(49).

g. Stowing Stabilizers

(1) Turn control switch (5) to MANUAL.

2-479
TM 08780B-10

(2) Unlock left and right Stabilizer Cylinder


lock out valves (31 and 41).

(3) At main control panel (4), use NEAR SIDE


and FAR SIDE stabilizer controls (39 and 48) to fully retract
stabilizer cylinders (34 and 44).

CAUTION

FAILURE TO REMOVE SAFETY PIN (36) BEFORE


RETRACTING STABILIZER CYLINDER WILL CAUSE
CABLE (33) TO BREAK.

(4) Remove quick release pin (35) and stabilizer


lock pin (36) from right side stabilizer (34).

2-480
TM 08780B-10

(5) Turn cable release handle (37) and insert


quick disconnect cable (33). Make sure cable is secure on handle
pin.

(6) At Right side control station, use NEAR


SIDE STABILIZER control (29) to extend stabilizer cylinder (34).
Stabilizer cylinder (34) will swing into stowed position.

(7) Install stabilizer lock pin (36) and quick-


release pin (35).

(8) Use Near side stabilizer control (29) to


retract stabilizer cylinder (34).

(9) Place Stabilizer Cylinder lock out valve (31)


in the LOCK position.

(10) Secure quick release cable (33) with


retaining pin (32) as shown. Pull down on quick release cable (33)
so that all cable slack is below retaining pin (32).

(11) Place NEAR SIDE STABILIZER EXT


lockout valve (31) in the UNLOCK position.

2-481
TM 08780B-10

(12) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control


(29), retract outrigger beam (30).

CAUTION

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE, MAKE SURE


STABILIZER EXT LOCK OUT VALVE (28) IS IN THE LOCK
POSITION BEFORE MOVING VEHICLE.

(13) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out valve


(28) in the LOCK position.

CAUTION

FAILURE TO REMOVE SAFETY PIN (46) BEFORE


RETRACTING STABILIZER CYLINDER WILL CAUSE
CABLE (34) TO BREAK.

(14) Remove quick release pin (45) and stabilizer


lock pin (46).

2-482
TM 08780B-10

(15) Turn cable release handle (47) and insert


quick disconnect cable (34). Make sure cable is secure on handle
pin.

(16) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (39)


to extend stabilizer cylinder (44). Stabilizer will swing into the
stowed position.

(17) Install stabilizer safety pin (46) and quick


release pin (45).

(18) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (39)


to retract stabilizer cylinder (44).

CAUTION

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE, MAKE SURE


STABILIZER EXT LOCK OUT VALVE (41) IS IN THE LOCK
POSITION BEFORE MOVING VEHICLE.

2-483
TM 08780B-10

(19) Place STABILIZER lock out valve (41) in


the LOCK position.

(20) Secure quick release cable (34) with


retaining pin (42) as shown. Pull down on quick release cable (34)
so that all cable slack is below retaining pin (42).

(21) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out valve


(38) in the UNLOCK position.

(22) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (39)


to retract outrigger beam (40).

(23) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out valve


(38) in the LOCK position.

(24) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(25) Push controls (39 and 48) all the way up and
down to release hydraulic pressure.

2-484
TM 08780B-10

(26) Push selector valve (3) to the STEERING


POSITION. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(27) If remote control (6) was used, coil up cable


(7) approximately one foot in diameter. Place cable (7) and remote
control (6) in stowage compartment as shown. Secure
compartment door.

2-26. MK17A1 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MHC)


OPERATION

a. General Description. During operation, the material


handling crane (MHC) has four basic functions: telescoping,
outriggers, swing and hoist. The boom can rotate 318 degrees with
a 42 degree dead spot at the main control panel. The crane has a
lifting capacity of 9,000 lbs (4,086 kgs) at 15 feet (4.6m) (see
lifting capacity chart located at control panel for further
information).

The crane is operated by hydraulics supplied by the MK48/48A1


through the crane's main control panel. The main control panel
provides the controls to manually operate all functions of the crane
and outrigger jacks.

Each control on the crane's main control panel is proportional. The


more travel of the control, the faster the selected crane movement.
The crane may also be operated by a remote control unit with the

2-485
TM 08780B-10

same operating functions, except for outrigger and mast controls,


as the main control. Left and right retractable outrigger jack
cylinders are provided to stabilize, support, and level the vehicle
while the crane is operated. An additional outrigger jack cylinder
control is provided, separate from the main control panel, on the
passenger (right) side of the vehicle. Built within the crane's
hydraulic system are several safety features that protect the
equipment and operating personnel. They are as follows:

• Hold valves will prevent a load from falling in the event of


pressure loss because of hydraulic line failure.

• A suspended load on the crane can be lowered when


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48A1 if external
hydraulic lines from the MK48/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery
vehicle are attached to the quick disconnect couplings at
the front of the crane trailer. Should hydraulic failure occur
in the crane's trailer, the suspended load can be lowered by
adjusting the cylinder hold valve. This procedure should be
done by Organizational Maintenance personnel.

• An overload protection system that prevents lifting greater


loads, at a given distance, than the crane can handle. All
functions that decrease overload remain functional: hoist
down, telescope in, and swing left or right.

b. Determine Required Crane Settings from Range


Diagram

(1) Use Area Definition Chart below or on


MHC main control panel to determine position of crane.

2-486
TM 08780B-10

(2) Use Load Chart below or on MHC main


control panel for load capacities.

NOTE
When either boom length or load radius or both are between
values listed below, the smallest load shown at either the next
larger boom length or radius must be used.

ON OUTRIGGERS
FRONT, SIDE & REAR - 318˚
RADIUS BOOM LENGTH FT (M)
FT (M) 7.33 14.25 15.25 16.50 18.42
(2.23) (4.34) (4.65) (5.03) (5.81)
4.00 11000
(1.22) (4988)
7.00 11000
(2.13) (4988)
8.00 11000 11000
(2.44) (4988) (4988)
9.00 11000 11000 10000
(2.74) (4988) (4988) (4535)
10.00 11000 11000 10000 9000
(3.05) (4988) (4988) (4535) (4082)
12.00 10000 10000 10000 9000
(3.66) (4535) (4535) (4535) (4082)
14.00 9400 9400 9000 8000
(4.27) (4264) (4264) (4082) (3628)
15.00 9000 8400 7900
(4.57) (4082) (3810) (3583)
16.00 8000 7500
(4.88) (3628) (3401)
18.20 5900
(5.55) (2676)
Capacities in Pounds (Kilograms)

Load Chart

2-487
TM 08780B-10

c. Prepare Crane for Use

(1) Start engine.

(2) Position vehicle on level ground so all


loading and unloading can be done from one position.

(3) Place transmission shifter (1) in N (Neutral).

(4) Pull parking brake valve (2) OUT. Chock


wheels as necessary to secure vehicle.

(5) Shut down engine. Turn engine start switch


to ON. Engine warning buzzer will sound. This is normal.

WARNING

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.
STEERING WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD
RESULT.

(6) Pull selector valve (3) mounted on right


fender of MK48 power unit to AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS
position. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(7) Start engine.

2-488
TM 08780B-10

(8) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


ON.

(9) Position MHC TILT ALARM switch (5) to


ON.

d. Deploying Outrigger Jacks

WARNING

ENSURE AREA IS CLEAR ON BOTH SIDES OF VEHICLE


BEFORE EXTENDING OUTRIGGER BEAMS AND JACKS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-489
TM 08780B-10

(1) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to OUT position


until outriggers are fully extended.

NOTE
Both outrigger pads are installed on outriggers the same way.
Left side is shown.

(2) Remove two outrigger pads (7) from


brackets located under tool stowage box (8).

(3) Remove two retaining pins (10) from


outrigger pad (7).

(4) Clear all dirt and debris from socket (9) in


outrigger pad (7) and from the end of the outrigger jack cylinder
(11).

(5) Position the outrigger pad (7) directly below


the outrigger jack cylinder (11).

2-490
TM 08780B-10

(6) Perform steps (3) (4) and (5) to set up


outrigger pad (7) on other side.

WARNING

• KEEP HANDS AND FEET CLEAR OF OUTRIGGERS


DURING OPERATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

• THE ENGINE DURING OPERATION WILL CREATE


BLOWING DUST. EYE PROTECTION MUST BE
WORN WHILE OPERATING CRANE CONTROLS.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.

(7) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) to DOWN


position and lower outrigger jack cylinder (11) until ball end is
seated in outrigger pad (7).

(8) Install retaining pins (9) on outrigger pad


(7).

2-491
TM 08780B-10

(9) Move RH O/R JACK lever (13) to down


position and lower outrigger jack cylinder (11) until ball end is
seated in outrigger pad (7).

(10) Install retaining pins (9) on outrigger pad


(7).

WARNING

CRIBBAGE AND/OR BLOCKAGE SHOULD NOT BE USED


UNDER THE OUTRIGGER PADS TO PREVENT SINKING
INTO THE SOIL. FAILURE OF SUCH DEVICES COULD
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

NOTE
• To provide greater stability never lift any tire off the
ground.

• Lower outrigger jacks individually as necessary to level


the truck side-to-side.

2-492
TM 08780B-10

(11) Using both LH O/R JACK and RH O/R


JACK levers (12 and 13), lower jack cylinders until both rear
springs are off their spring seats.

e. Unstowing Crane

WARNING

DO NOT DISCONNECT CABLE FROM STOWAGE RING


UNTIL BOOM IS RAISED TO A 45-DEGREE ANGLE. HOOK
ASSEMBLY COULD FALL. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

2-493
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

• DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE SLACK TO BUILD-UP


WHEN PAYING OUT CABLE. CABLE MAY GET
TANGLED ON DRUM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• DO NOT ALLOW WEIGHT OF HOOK TO BE


REMOVED FROM THE CABLE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
Operate HOIST lever and BOOM lever at the same time until
hook is suspended freely over the stowage ring.

(1) Move HOIST lever (14) to DOWN position


and BOOM lever (15) to UP position until boom (16) is at a
45-degree angle as indicated on boom angle indicator (17).

(2) Remove safety pin (18) from hook assembly


latch (19).

(3) Disconnect hook block (20) from stowage


ring (21).

2-494
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES AND


OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING CRANE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

NEVER TELESCOPE BOOM AND LIFT LOAD UNLESS


MAST IS FULLY RAISED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time to
maintain boom at approximately a 30-degree angle.

(4) Move BOOM lever (15) to DOWN position and


MAST lever (22) to UP position until boom angle is approximately
30-degrees.

2-495
TM 08780B-10

(5) Move BOOM lever (15) to UP position and


MAST lever (22) to UP position until mast (23) is fully raised.
Hold mast lever (22) in UP position for 2-3 seconds to ensure
erection cylinder is fully erected.

2-496
TM 08780B-10

f. Connect Remote Control

WARNING

THE CRANE MUST BE OPERATED WITH REMOTE


CONTROL IF OPERATOR IS NOT ABLE TO KEEP LOAD IN
SIGHT AT ALL TIMES DURING OPERATION. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

(1) Remove crane remote control (24) and cable


(25) from stowage box (26).

(2) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


OFF.

(3) Connect cable (25) to crane remote control


(24).

2-497
TM 08780B-10

(4) Connect other end of cable (25) to


REMOTE CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (27).

(5) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to


ON,

(6) Position EMERGENCY STOP switch (28)


on crane remote control (24) to ON.

2-498
TM 08780B-10

g. Rotate and Telescope Boom

WARNING

• KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES


AND OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING THE
CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• ENSURE THAT AREA IS CLEAR OF PERSONNEL


BEFORE ROTATING BOOM. BOOM MUST BE
ROTATED SLOWLY ENOUGH SO OPERATOR HAS
COMPLETE CONTROL OF LOAD. IF OPERATOR
CANNOT SEE LOAD DURING OPERATION,
OPERATE CRANE WITH REMOTE CONTROL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
Operate crane control levers using even pressure. Moving lever
slightly will cause slow movement of crane. Moving lever to full
travel will cause faster movement of the crane.

2-499
TM 08780B-10

(1) Move SWING lever (29) to CW position to


move boom (16) to the right.

(2) Move SWING lever (29) to CCW position


to move boom (16) to the left.

WARNING

OPERATOR MUST KEEP CONTROL OF LOAD AT ALL


TIMES. ATTACH GUIDE LINES TO LOAD AS REQUIRED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

KEEP HOOK ASSEMBLY AT LEAST 2 FT (0.6M) FROM


END OF BOOM. IF HOOK ASSEMBLY HITS END OF
BOOM, CRANE WILL LOSE POWER FOR SEVERAL
SECONDS AND CABLE OR HOOK ASSEMBLY MAY BE
DAMAGED.

NOTE
Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same time.

2-500
TM 08780B-10

(3) Move HOIST lever (14) to DOWN position


to pay out cable (30) and TELESCOPE lever (31) to OUT position
to extend boom (16).

h. Raise and Lower Load

(1) Refer to range diagram on MHC main


control panel to determine correct boom angle setting.

(2) Move BOOM lever (15) to UP position until


boom angle indicator (17) shows correct boom angle as determined
in step (1).

2-501
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

• DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE SLACK TO BUILD-UP


WHEN PAYING OUT CABLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• USE ONLY A STRAIGHT PULL WHEN LIFTING


LOAD. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(3) Operate SWING lever (29) and


TELESCOPE lever (31) to center end of boom (16) directly over
load.

(4) Operate HOIST lever (14) to pay in or pay


out cable (30) and connect hook block (20) to load.

2-502
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

• ENSURE THAT HOOK LATCH IS CLOSED AND


SAFETY PIN IS INSTALLED BEFORE ATTEMPTING
TO RAISE LOAD. A HOOK LATCH THAT IS NOT
CLOSED AND LOCKED IN POSITION COULD
ALLOW LOAD TO BECOME DISENGAGED FROM
HOOK, ALLOWING LOAD TO FALL. INJURY OR
DEATH COULD RESULT.

• USE EXTREME CARE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO


RAISE LOAD WITH DAMAGED HOOK LATCH OR
SAFETY PIN. HAVE ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE REPAIR DAMAGED PARTS AS
SOON AS MISSION IS COMPETED.

(5) Install safety pin (18) in hook assembly


latch (19).

2-503
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

ENSURE THERE ARE AT LEAST TWO WRAPS OF CABLE


ON HOIST DRUM AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

• DO NOT JERK HOIST LEVER. LOAD MAY BOUNCE


AND RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR
LOAD.

• DO NOT LIFT MORE THAN MAXIMUM LOAD


RATING FOR CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• ENSURE BOOM AND LOAD ARE CLEAR OF


VEHICLE SIDES WHEN LOADING AND
UNLOADING CARGO. HITTING SIDE OF VEHICLE
WITH BOOM OR LOAD MAY DAMAGE CRANE,
LOAD, OR VEHICLE.

• DO NOT LOWER BOOM BELOW HORIZONTAL


WITH A LOAD SUSPENDED FROM THE HOOK, OR
RAISE A LOAD FROM BELOW HORIZONTAL USING
THE BOOM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(6) Move HOIST lever (14) to UP position to


lift load. Move BOOM lever (15) to UP position to lift load higher
as required.

(7) Move HOIST lever (14) to DOWN position


to lower load. Move BOOM lever (15) to DOWN position to
lower load further as required.

2-504
TM 08780B-10

i. Stow Crane

CAUTION

BOOM MUST BE POSITIONED IN LINE WITH


OUTRIGGER BEAM AND FULLY RETRACTED BEFORE
LOWERING. OBSERVE BOOM DURING LOWERING TO
ENSURE NO CONTACT IS MADE WITH RIGHT REAR
TENDER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
• Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same
time.

• Reel in cable until approximately 2 ft. (0.6m) of cable


hangs from boom.

(1) Move HOIST lever (14) to UP position to


reel in cable (30) and TELESCOPE lever (31) to IN position to
retract boom (16).

2-505
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Position boom so that cable and hook assembly are on
passenger's side of vehicle.

(2) Operate SWING lever (29) to position boom


(16) in line with outrigger beam (34).

(3) Operate BOOM lever (15) so that boom


angle indicator (17) reads approximately 30-degrees.

2-506
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time so that
45-degree reading is maintained on boom angle indicator.

(4) Move BOOM lever (15) and MAST lever


(22) to DOWN position until mast (23) is fully lowered and boom
is at 45°.

(5) Move HOIST lever (14) to DOWN position


and connect hook block (20) to stowage ring (21).

(6) Install safety pin (18) in hook assembly


latch (19).

(7) Move HOIST lever (14) to UP position and


BOOM lever (15) to DOWN position until boom (16) is fully
lowered, and all slack is removed from cable (30).

2-507
TM 08780B-10

j. Disconnect Remote Control

(1) Position EMERGENCY STOP switch (28)


on crane remote control (24) to OFF.

(2) Position MAIN POWER switch (4) to OFF.

(3) Remove cable (25) from REMOTE


CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (27).

(4) Remove cable (25) from crane remote


control (24).

(5) Stow cable (25) and crane remote control


(24).

NOTE
Perform step (6) if crane operation is still required.

(6) Position MAIN POWER switch (4) to ON.

2-508
TM 08780B-10

k. Stow Outrigger Beams/Jack Cylinders and Shut


Down Crane

(1) Remove two retaining pins (9) from both


outrigger pads (7).

NOTE
Operate LH O/R JACK lever and RH O/R JACK lever at the
same time.

(2) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) and RH O/R


JACK lever (13) to UP position until outrigger jack cylinders (11)
are fully retracted.

(3) Install two retaining pins (9) in outrigger


pads (7).

(4) Stow two outrigger pads (7) on bracket


located on bottom of tool stowage boxes (8).

2-509
TM 08780B-10

(5) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to IN position until


outrigger beams (34) are fully retracted.

(6) Position MAIN POWER switch (4) to OFF.

(7) Position crane TILT ALARM switch (5) to


OFF.

2-27. MK17/17A1 CARGO SIDE PANEL OPERATION

a. Lowering and Raising Troop Seats

(1) To lower troop seats unbuckle straps (1) and


fold out seat supports (2) as shown. Place supports so that they
contact the side panels and cargo bed.

2-510
TM 08780B-10

(1.1) For LVSA1 series vehicles only, pin seat


supports (2) using quick release pins (2.1).

(2) To raise troop seats, fold up seat and


supports (2). Secure seats with straps (1).

(2.1) To raise troop seats on LVSA1 series


vehicles, remove quick release pins (2.1), and fold up seat supports
(2). Secure seats with straps (1).

b. Lowering Side Panels

WARNING

TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY, MAKE SURE TROOP


SEATS ARE SECURED BEFORE LOWERING SIDE
PANELS.

NOTE
Side panels can be lowered individually or in groups of two.
Lowering should be done by two people.

(1) Remove lock pin (3) from corner of cargo


box.

2-511
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

IF VEHICLE IS PARKED ON A GRADE, SIDE PANELS MAY


SLIDE OFF HINGES AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE.

(2) Lift latch (4) to release panel. Have


assistant help lower side panel.

(3) To lower two side panels at once, make sure


latch (4) is securing both side panels, then remove lock pins (3)
from each corner of cargo box. Carefully lower panels.

c. Raising Side Panels

(1) Raise side panel into position and install


lock pin (3).

(2) Push latch (4) down, locking both side


panels together.

(3) If two panels were lowered, raise panels and


secure with corner lock pins (3).

2-512
TM 08780B-10

d. Removal and Stowage of Side Panels

(1) Lower side panels individually. Refer to


section b.

WARNING

• TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY, MAKE SURE


TROOP SEATS ARE SECURED BEFORE REMOVING
SIDE PANELS.

• SIDE PANELS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT


PERSONAL INJURY, THEY SHOULD BE REMOVED
BY TWO PEOPLE.

(2) Once side panel is lowered, raise the panel


so that the hinge (5) is clear of stud (6).

(3) Slide side panel (7) off hinge pins (8).

2-513
TM 08780B-10

(4) Stand side panel (7) against tailgate (9) with


hinges down and troop seat resting on tailgate.

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for remaining three


side panels.

(6) Remove front gate (10) and stand against


side panels with top of gate on bed and legs up.

2-514
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Three straps secure side panels. One long strap wraps around
panels and two short straps go around each corner.

(7) Wrap tie down strap (11) around tailgate (9)


so that hooked end and free end are in front of gate (10) as shown.

(8) Slide free end of tie down strap (11) through


slot in ratchet (12).

2-515
TM 08780B-10

(9) Attach hooked end (13) of tie down strap on


ratchet bolt (14).

(10) Pull free end of strap (11) to take up slack.

(11) Lift up ratchet handle (15) and work back


and forth until strap tightly secures panels. Close ratchet handle
(15) fully to engage safety lock.

(12) Attach hooked end of tie down strap (16) to


tailgate stake (17) as shown.

(13) Wrap strap (16) over side panels and gate.

(14) Attach hooked end of ratchet (18) on cargo


bed as shown.

(15) Slide free end of strap (16) through slot in


ratchet (18) and take up slack in strap.

2-516
TM 08780B-10

(16) Work ratchet handle (19) back and forth


until strap tightly secures panels. Close ratchet handle (19) fully to
engage safety lock.

(17) Repeat steps (12) thru (16) to


secure side panels on opposite corner of vehicle.

e. Unloading and Installation of Side Panels

(1) Pull back on ratchet release handle (20) and


fold ratchet (18) open. Create slack in strap (16).

(2) Disconnect hooked ends of ratchet (18) and


strap (16) on the bed and tailgate stake (17). Remove strap (16)
from ratchet (18).

2-517
TM 08780B-10

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for the remaining


corner strap.

(4) Pullback on ratchet release handle (21) and


fold ratchet open. Create slack in strap (11).

(5) Disconnect hooked end (13) from ratchet


bolt (14). Remove strap (11) from ratchet (18).

(6) Install front gate (10).

2-518
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

SIDE PANELS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT PERSONAL


INJURY, THEY SHOULD BE INSTALLED BY TWO PEOPLE.

(7) Remove side panel from cargo bed. Align


side panel (7) with hinge pins (8).

(8) Raise side panel so that hinge (5) will clear


stud (6). Slide side panel onto hinge pins (8).

(9) Repeat steps (7) and (8) for remaining three


side panels (7).

(10) Raise side panels. Refer to section c.

2-28. MK17/17A1 CARGO COVER KIT

a. Installation

NOTE
The following procedures for installation and removal of the
cargo cover kit require two people.

(1) On the right side of the vehicle, remove hair


pin (1) and retaining pin (2).

2-519
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

TO AVOID INJURY, HAVE ASSISTANT SUPPORT THE


WEIGHT OF BOWS (3) WHILE SUPPORT ROD (4) IS BEING
REMOVED.

(2) Have assistant hold bows (3) up to relieve


pressure on support rod (4). Remove support rod (4) and have
assistant lower bows.

2-520
TM 08780B-10

(3) Lift the ends of each bow (3) out of the


pocket in stowage bracket (5). Set bows off to one side.

2-521
TM 08780B-10

(4) On the left side of the vehicle, remove hitch


pins (6) and end brackets (7). Remove stakes (8) from stowage
compartments (9 and 10). Set stakes off to one side.

2-522
TM 08780B-10

(5) Install stakes (8) in pocket (11) in top edge


of cargo side panels.

(6) Install bows (3) on stakes (8).

(7) Using wrenches, install capscrews (12) and


locknuts (13).

(8) Repeat steps (1) thru (3) for remaining six


bow and stake assemblies.

2-523
TM 08780B-10

(9) Pull rope (14) through top center eyelet (15),


on end curtain (16), until both ends of rope are even.

(10) Place end curtain (16) on top bow and stake


assembly (17) so stitching will be on the inside.

(11) Hold end curtain (16) while assistant laces


rope (14) around bow and stake, going through remaining eyelets
(15).

(12) Run end of rope (14) through bottom corner


eyelets and tie down hook (18) on side panel.

(13) Tie bottom ropes (19) to tie down hooks


(20) on end panel.

(14) Repeat steps (5) thru (9) to install rear end


curtain on bow and stake assembly.

2-524
TM 08780B-10

(15) Place cargo cover (21) on middle of center


bow (22).

(16) Hold cargo cover (21) steady


while assistant unfolds cargo cover to front and rear bows.

(17) Unfold cargo cover (21) one side at a time


until both sides are down.

2-525
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

DO NOT TIE ROPES TOO TIGHT. CARGO COVER MAY


TEAR.

(18) Tie front corner tie down rope (22) to tie


down hook (20) as shown.

2-526
TM 08780B-10

(19) Pull all slack out of cargo cover (21).

(20) Repeat steps (14) and (15) on remaining


three corners.

(21) Tie remaining side ropes (23) on the


remaining tie down hooks (24) along each side of the truck.

b. Removal

(1) Untie both front corner tie down ropes (22)


from front tie down hooks (20).

(2) Untie ropes (23) from all tie down hooks


(24) on each side of truck.

(3) Remove cargo cover (21) from truck.

(4) Spread out cargo cover (21) on smooth, dry


surface so stitching is facing down.

2-527
TM 08780B-10

(5) Fold one side of cargo cover (21) toward


center in two folds. Make each fold about two feet wide.

(6) Fold other side of cargo cover (21) toward


center in two folds.

(7) Fold both sides of cargo cover (21) together.

(8) Fold one end of cargo cover (21) toward


center in two folds. Make each fold about three feet wide.

2-528
TM 08780B-10

(9) Fold other end of cargo cover (21) toward


center in two folds.

(10) Fold both sides of cargo cover (21) together.

(11) Untie bottom tie down ropes (19) from tie


down hooks (20) on both sides of truck.

(12) Untie corner tie down ropes (14) from tie


down hooks (18) on both sides of truck.

(13) Hold tailgate curtain (16) while assistant


unties rope (14) from bow and stake assembly (17) and tailgate
curtain (16). Remove tailgate curtain (16).

2-529
TM 08780B-10

(14) Repeat steps (11) thru (13) to remove rear


end curtain.

(15) Spread out end curtain (16) on smooth, dry


surface so stitching is facing down.

(16) Fold one side of curtain (16) toward center


in two folds.

(17) Fold other side of curtain (16) toward center


in two folds. Fold both sides of curtain (16) together.

2-530
TM 08780B-10

(18) Repeat steps (15) thru (17) for front end


curtain.

(19) Tie both end curtains (16) and cargo cover


(21) with straps (23).

(20) Using wrenches, remove capscrews (12) and


locknuts (13).

(21) Remove bow (3) from stakes (8).

(22) Repeat steps (20) and (21) for remaining


bows and stakes.

2-531
TM 08780B-10

(23) Pull all stakes (8) out of slots in cargo side


panel (11).

(24) From beneath the vehicle, place the ends of


each bow (3) into pocket of stowage bracket (5). Keep all bows
(3) between plates (24).

2-532
TM 08780B-10

(25) Have assistant hold the free ends of bows (3)


up. Insert support rod (4) into frame and push it in until it reaches
the other side of frame.

2-533
TM 08780B-10

(26) Have assistant lower bows (3) to rest on


support rod (4). Install hair pin (1) and retaining pin (2).

2-534
TM 08780B-10

(27) Insert eight of the fourteen stakes (8) into


compartment (9). Arrange stakes as shown.

(28) Insert the remaining six stakes (8) into


compartment (10) as shown.

NOTE
End bracket (7), with two hitch pins (6), covers compartment
(10).

2-535
TM 08780B-10

(29) Position two end brackets (7) on


compartments (9 and 10) and install hitch pins (6).

2-536
TM 08780B-10

2-29. ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOADING PROCEDURES

WARNING

TRANSPORTING, HANDLING AND LOADING OF ANY


EXPLOSIVES AND/OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MUST BE
DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND
FEDERAL REGULATIONS. MOTOR VEHICLE
OPERATOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ARE PROVIDED IN THE
MOTOR VEHICLE DRIVERS HANDBOOK FOR
AMMUNITION, EXPLOSIVES AND HAZARDOUS
MATERIAL, NAVSEA SWO-20-AF-ABK-101.

a. General. Logistic Vehicle System trailers are


designed to transport standardized containers. These special
containers are manufactured to meet specifications of the
International Standards Organization/American National Standards
Institute (ISO/ANSI). There are three sizes of such containers
available for use with the LVS. They are:

• 8' X 8' X 20' containers (MK14/14A1 only)


• 8' X 8' X 10' containers (MK14/14A1 and MK17/17A1
only)
• 8' X 4' X 6' container pallets (MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1,
and MK17/17A1 only)

2-537
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT PARTS DAMAGE, REMOVE CARGO SIDES


FROM MK48/48A1/17/17A1 BEFORE LOADING ISO/ANSI
CONTAINERS. IT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW WHICH
CONTAINERS CAN/SHOULD BE USED WITH YOUR LVS
TRAILER. IT IS ALSO IMPORTANT TO KNOW WHERE ON
THE TRAILER BED TO INSTALL VARIOUS CONTAINERS
AND CONTAINER COMBINATIONS. TABLE 2-8 (LVS
ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOADING COMBINATIONS)
SHOWS ALL POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS AND LOCATIONS
FOR THE VARIOUS CONTAINER LOADS.

2-538
TM 08780B-10

TABLE 2-10. LVS ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOAD COMBINATIONS


VEHICLE CONTAINER COMBINATION/INSTALLATION
MODEL SIZE USE LOCATIONS
MK48/48A1/ 20 Ft.
14/14A1 Container

10 Ft.
Container

6 Ft. Container
Pallets

MK48/48A1 6 Ft. Container


15/15A1 Pallets

MK48/48A1/ 10 Ft.
17/17A1 Container

6 Ft. Container
Pallets

2-539
TM 08780B-10

b. Container Lockdowns. Four types of container


lockdowns are used with LVS trailers to secure containers for
travel. They are:

• Fixed Cargo Bed Container Locks (1)


• Portable Lock Assemblies (2)
• Pallet-Container Vertical Stacking Locks (3)
• Pallet-Container Horizontal Interconnecting Locks (4)

Fixed cargo bed container locks (1) are found at each corner of the
MK14/14A1 trailer bed only. Portable lock assemblies (2) are
used to install 10-foot containers and 6-foot container pallets

2-540
TM 08780B-10

directly to trailer beds. Pallet-container stacking locks (3 and 4)


are used only to secure 6-foot container pallets on top of one
another and to interconnect.

• Refer to paragraph 2-28, section c, for instructions on use


of the fixed cargo bed container locks (1)
• Refer to paragraph 2-28, section d, for instructions on use
of portable lock assemblies (2)
• Refer to paragraph 2-28, section e, for instructions on use
of pallet-container locks (3 and 4).

c. Fixed Cargo Bed Container Locks

NOTE
Fixed cargo bed container locks (1) are located at each corner of
the MK14/14A1 Container Hauler Trailer only.

(1) Lift cover plate (5) upward from cargo bed


(6).

(2) Grasp handle (7) and push up to swing fixed


cargo bed container lock (1) into an upright position.

(3) Close cover plate (5).

2-541
TM 08780B-10

(4) Repeat steps (1) thru (3) above for each


fixed lock being used during operation.

NOTE
Triangle portion (8) of fixed cargo bed container lock (1) must be
lined up with the lock base (9) before lowering ISO/ANSI
container (10).

(5) Direct ISO/ANSI container (10) to be


lowered into cargo bed (6). Make certain each corner of
ISO/ANSI container (10) lines up with each fixed cargo bed
container lock (1).

(6) With ISO/ANSI container (10) in position,


secure the container for travel by turning handle (7) one quarter
turn. Make certain handle (7) is locked in place by the handle lock
(11). Repeat this step for each lockdown being used.

2-542
TM 08780B-10

(7) To release ISO/ANSI container (10), lift


upon handle lock (11) and turn handle (7) one quarter turn.

(8) After ISO/ANSI container (10) has been


removed, lift cover plate (5). Grasp handle (7) and pull downward
to lower fixed cargo bed container lock (1) into its trailer housing.
Close cover plate (5). Repeat this step for each fixed cargo bed
container lock (1) used.

d. Portable Lock Assemblies

NOTE
Portable lock assemblies (2) are used to secure 6-foot container
pallets and 10-foot containers to the beds of MK14/14A1,
MK15/15A1 and MK17/17A1 trailers. The portable lock
assemblies (2) are used in combination with the fixed cargo bed
container lock (1) on MK14/14A1 trailers.

(1) Lower assembly lock pin (12) through keyed


fitting hole (13).

(2) Install assembly lockdown (14) into keyed


fitting hole (13). Turn assembly lockdown (14) until center tab-
lock (15) lines up with and falls into inboard key (16). From
beneath the cargo bed, grasp the underside of the assembly
lockdown (14) and pull downward, making certain center tab-lock
(15) is fully seated.

(3) Repeat the above two steps at all locations


on the trailer bed where portable lock assemblies (2) are to be
used.

2-543
TM 08780B-10

2-544
TM 08780B-10

(4) Direct the ISO/ANSI container (10) into


position on cargo bed (6). Make certain each corner of the
container lines up with the positioned lockdowns (portable lock
assemblies and/or fixed cargo bed container locks).

(5) With ISO/ANSI container (10) in position,


secure container for travel by inserting assembly lock pin (12)
through container (10) and into lockdown assembly (14). Turn
lock pin (12) so that handle points downward.

(6) To release ISO/ANSI containers (10) from


portable lock assemblies, turn assembly lock pin (12) and remove
lock pin from assembly lockdown (14).

(7) To remove portable lock assemblies (2)


from trailer beds (6), push up on tab lock (15) until assembly
lockdown (14) is released from its lock position. Turn assembly
lockdown (14) until the lockdown key lines up with key holes on
trailer bed. Lift to remove portable lock assemblies.

2-545
TM 08780B-10

e. Pallet Container Stacking and Interconnecting


Locks

NOTE
Pallet container stacking locks consist of vertical stacking locks
(3) and interconnecting locks (4). The base pallet containers (17)
are first secured to the vehicle bed using a combination of the
fixed cargo container locks and portable lock assemblies, as
required. The stacking and interconnecting locks (3 and 4) are
then used to secure pallets stacked on top of the base pallets.

WARNING

DO NOT STACK PALLETS ON LVS TRAILERS MORE THAN


TWO CONTAINERS HIGH. PALLETS STACKED HIGHER
THAN TWO-HIGH WILL DANGEROUSLY AFFECT

2-546
TM 08780B-10

VEHICLE STABILITY ON OR OFF THE ROAD. REFER TO


TABLE 2-10 FOR ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOAD
COMBINATIONS USED WITH LVS.

NOTE
If required, install vertical stacking locks (3) as follows:

(1) To lock the vertical stacking locks (3):

(a) Insert lock pin (18) into hole (19)


indicated by the arrow casting (20). Push on pin. This will cause
the head of the lock to rotate, connecting the two containers
together.

(b) Remove lock pin (18) and insert at


an angle into hole (21) in container corner post.

2-547
TM 08780B-10

2-548
TM 08780B-10

(c) Back lock pin (18) into facing


container corner post hole (22) and insert into locking hole (23).

(d) Twist lock pin (18) so that curved


portion of pin rests against corner post.

2-549
TM 08780B-10

(2) To unlock the vertical stacking locks (3):

(a) Twist lock pin (18) so that curved


portion of pin is in a vertical position.

(b) Back lock pin (18) into hole in


facing corner post and remove pin (18) from locking hole (23).

(c) Move lock pin (18) forward, turn at


an angle, and remove from corner posts.

(d) Insert lock pin (18) into hole (24)


opposite arrow casting (20). Push on pin. This will cause the
head of lock to rotate.

(e) Remove lock pin (18) from hole


(24).

(3) To lock the interconnecting locks (4),


alternately turn hex head locking bolts (25) clockwise. Tighten
securely.

2-550
TM 08780B-10

(4) To unlock the interconnecting locks (4),


alternately turn right hex head locking bolts (25) counterclockwise
to fully extend horizontal brace (26). Repeat for left hex head
locking bolt.

2-30. CARGO TIEDOWN RINGS AND RATCHET


STRAPS

WARNING

TRANSPORTING, HANDLING AND LOADING OF ANY


EXPLOSIVES AND/OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MUST BE
DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND
FEDERAL REGULATIONS. MOTOR VEHICLE
OPERATOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ARE PROVIDED IN THE
MOTOR VEHICLE DRIVERS HANDBOOK FOR
AMMUNITION, EXPLOSIVES AND HAZARDOUS
MATERIAL, NAVSEA SWO-20-AF-ABK-101.

a. General. Cargo tiedown rings (1) can be used in


conjunction with six foot ISO/ANSI container pallets if needed or
as separate rigging rings for transportation of cargo not contained
in ISO/ANSI containers.

2-551
TM 08780B-10

b. Installation

(1) Insert either wedged end (2) of cargo


tiedown ring (1) into elongated slot on trailer bed.

(2) Once inserted, twist cargo tiedown ring (1)


one quarter turn. Ring should be facing in the direction of the
cargo.

2-552
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Rigging procedure below is one way of securing cargo for travel.
This procedure shows how ratchet straps (3) can be used with
cargo tiedown rings (1).

(3) Rig hooked end of strap (4) to tiedown ring


(1). Route strap over the cargo toward opposite tiedown ring (1).

2-553
TM 08780B-10

(4) Rig hooked end of ratchet (5) to opposite


tiedown ring and thread end of strap (4) through ratchet (5) as
shown. Pull end of strap (4) through ratchet (5) to remove all
slack.

(5) Crank ratchet (5) as required to secure


cargo.

NOTE
Tie up loose end of strap (4) as necessary to keep end of strap
from lying loose on the cargo bed.

(6) To release ratchet tension on strap (4), pull


back on handle release (6) and fully open ratchet (5) and pull strap
(4) back out of ratchet.

2-554
TM 08780B-10

2-31. RUN FLAT AND SAND TIRE KITS

a. General. Run flat or sand tires maybe used as


optional equipment. These tires are described below.

CAUTION

TO PREVENT TIRE DAMAGE, DO NOT EXCEED 20 MILES


PER HOUR OR A DISTANCE OF 20 MILES ON A
FLATTENED RUN FLAT TIRE.

b. Run Flat Tires. Run flat tires look and operate like
standard LVS tires. Run flat tires can be identified by the letters
RF stamped on plate clamps (1).

The space within a run flat tire is almost entirely filled by two
metal sections (2). Lubrication packets (3) are strapped to these
metal sections. When a run flat tire loses air pressure it will start
to flatten and rupture the lubrication packets. This lubrication will
allow the run flat tire to operate for a limited time until it can be
repaired. Once the lubrication packets have ruptured, the run flat
tire must be repaired by Organizational Maintenance.

2-555
TM 08780B-10

c. Sand Tires. The sand tire kit consists of nine sand


tires (4) with special wheels, a taller spare tire mounting bracket
(5), and an extension tube (6). Because the sand tires are so much
wider, the mounting bracket (5) and extension tube (6) are required
to stow and change the spare sand tire. When using the spare tire
hoist (paragraph 3-8b of this manual) extension tube (6) must be
inserted to remove the sand tire from its stowed position.

2-556
TM 08780B-10

2-32. REAR BODY TOW UNIT OPERATION

a. General. The rear body tow unit allows any of the


four trailers to be towed, once uncoupled from an MK48/48A1, by
vehicles of sufficient capacity. The rear of the tow unit bolts to the
trailer in the same way that the MK48/48A1 does. The front of the
tow unit attaches to the towing vehicle through the use of a pintle.
This connection allows any of the trailers to be towed fully loaded,
on or off road.

2-557
TM 08780B-10

Inter-vehicular air lines and an electrical cable are provided to


operate the towed trailer's brakes and lights. Safety chains are also
included. The bolts that attach the tow unit to the trailer are stored
in a box on the tow unit when not in use. The air lines and the
electrical cable are also stowed on the tow unit.

b. Installation

WARNING

• ONLY ONE EXTRA TRAILER CAN BE TOWED WITH


THE REAR BODY TOW UNIT. THERE ARE NO
BRAKE PROVISIONS FOR ADDITIONAL TRAILERS.

• CARGO WEIGHT ON REAR TOW UNIT SHALL NOT


EXCEED 12.5 TONS (11.337 MT) AND PINTLE
WEIGHT SHALL NOT EXCEED 5,000 POUNDS (2,270
KG).

• DO NOT STAND UNDER REAR BODY TOW UNIT


WHEN IT IS SUPPORTED BY A CRANE. SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH WILL RESULT IF THE TOW
UNIT IT FALLS.

(1) Using a crane or suitable lifting device, lift


rear body (1) tow unit into position. Make sure mating surfaces of
tow unit and trailer are clean.

(2) Remove 12 capscrews (2) and nuts (3) from


stowage compartments (4). Using two flanged capscrews (2),
align rear body tow unit with mating surface of trailer. Install two
flanged nuts (3) on flanged capscrews (2). Hand tighten flanged
nuts.

(3) Install remaining 11 flanged capscrews (2)


and flanged nuts (3). Hand tighten flanged nuts (3).

(4) Tighten flanged capscrews as tight as


possible. Have Organizational Maintenance torque flanged

2-558
TM 08780B-10

capscrews to 225-275 foot-pounds (305-373 N*m) as soon as


possible.

NOTE
Each air line has different size couplings that prevent them from
being hooked up wrong.

(5) Remove air line plug (6) from nipple (7).


Remove remaining three air line plugs (6).

(6) Remove cover (8) from electrical receptacle


by turning counterclockwise.

2-559
TM 08780B-10

(7) Pullback on quick disconnect coupling


sleeve (9) and remove airline (10).

NOTE
Air tanks of trailer have to be drained in order to hook up air
lines. This is due to high air pressure.

2-560
TM 08780B-10

(8) Pullback on coupling sleeve (9) and push


airline (10) onto nipple (7). Release coupling sleeve to lock air
line on nipple. Make sure air line fully engages.

(9) Repeat steps (7) and (8) for the remaining


three air lines.

(10) Attach electrical cable (11) to receptacle


(12) by engaging slots and turning clockwise.

(11) Matchmark companion flanges (13) at No. 3


axle. While supporting propeller shaft (14), remove eight
capscrews (15), nuts (16), and lockwashers (17).

2-561
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
If trailer towed in tandem is going to be used for an extended
period of time, remove propeller shaft (14), prepare for storage
and store.

(12) Secure propeller shaft (14) at both ends.


Refer to paragraph 2-42, step f.

(13) Back vehicle and attach tow eye to towing


vehicle. Raise or lower trailer landing legs to aid in hook up.
Attach two safety chains (18) to towing vehicle.

(14) Plug electrical cable (11) into inter-vehicle


receptacle of towing vehicle.

2-562
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE GLAD


HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE COUPLING.

(15) Remove service glad hands (19 and 20)


from tow unit. Attach glad hands (19 and 20) to towing vehicle-
RED to RED, BLUE to BLUE.

(16) Remove landing leg support braces and stow


in position on trailer. Raise and stow landing legs. If pulling the
MK17/17A1 trailer, raise and stow rear landing leg.

(17) Start the towing vehicle's engine and build


air pressure to 120 psi. Leave parking brake set.

(18) Charge the trailer air system by pushing


TRAILER AIR SUPPLY VALVE.

(19) Check turn signal, brake, and tail light


operation on trailer if tactical conditions allow.

(20) Release parking brake. Check for proper


service brake operation before driving.

2-563
TM 08780B-10

c. Removal

(1) Park trailer on the most level ground


available and apply parking brakes.

(2) Chock front and back of wheels on trailer.

(3) Lower landing legs and install leg braces.


On the MK17/17A1 trailer, lower rear landing leg.

(4) Disconnect glad hands (19 and 20) from


towing vehicle. Stow glad hands on tow unit.

(5) Close air supply valves (20.1) located on


crossmember.

(6) Remove electrical cable (11) from towing


vehicle.

2-564
TM 08780B-10

(7) Remove tow unit eye from vehicle's pintle.


Raise or lower trailer landing legs to aid in removal. Drive vehicle
away from trailer.

CAUTION

HAVE ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE REPLACE


LOCKWASHERS (17) AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. FAILURE
TO DO SO MAY CAUSE PROPELLER SHAFT TO COME
LOOSE.

(8) Align matchmark on companion flanges (13).


While supporting propeller shaft (14), install eight capscrews (15),
lockwashers (17) and nuts (16).

(9) Securely tighten capscrews (15) and nuts


(16).

2-565
TM 08780B-10

(10) Remove electrical cable (11) from


receptacle (12). Install cover (8) on receptacle (12).

(11) Pull back on coupling sleeve (9) and remove


air line (10) from nipple (7).

(12) Attach air line (10) to stowage nipple on tow


unit.

(13) Repeat steps (10) and (11) for remaining


three air lines.

(14) Install air line plug (6) on nipple (7). Install


remaining three air line plugs (6).

2-566
TM 08780B-10

(15) Using a crane or suitable lifting device,


support tow unit so that the mounting capscrews can be removed.

(16) Remove 12 flanged capscrews (2) and


flanged nuts (3).

(17) Separate tow unit (1) from trailer. Stow


capscrews (2) and nuts (3) in compartment (4).

2-567
TM 08780B-10

2-33. EXTENDED AND STANDARD PINTLE


OPERATION

WARNING

• THE FRONT EXTENDED PINTLE IS HEAVY AND AT


LEAST THREE PEOPLE MUST BE USED TO
INSTALL IT ON A FRONT POWER UNIT.

2-568
TM 08780B-10

• THE REAR EXTENDED PINTLE IS EXTREMELY


HEAVY AND MUST NOT BE INSTALLED,
REMOVED, OR STOWED WITHOUT USE OF A
CRANE OR OTHER SUITABLE LIFTING DEVICE.

NOTE
The front and rear extended pintle is used primarily by the
MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Dropside Cargo Vehicle. However, the
front extended pintle can be installed on any MK48/48A1 front
power unit.

a. General Description. The front and rear extended


pintle kit is designed for use in towing or pushing of the M198
howitzer. The front extended pintle allows the vehicle to push the
howitzer into firing position. It may also be used for loading of a
howitzer onto aircraft. The rear extended pintle allows the
howitzer to be towed from the rear of an MK17/17A1 dropside
cargo trailer.

b. Installing Front Extended Pintle

WARNING

FRONT EXTENDED PINTLE (1) IS HEAVY. FOR SAFETY,


THE PINTLE SHOULD BE HELD FIRMLY ON BOTH SIDES
WHILE THIRD ASSISTANT POSITIONS AND SECURES
THE PINTLE IN PLACE.

(1) With assistants holding both sides of


extended pintle (1), position ends of horizontal mounting bars (2)
on upper tow eyes (3). Secure horizontal mounting bars (2) in
place with pins (4) and quick release pins (5).

(2) To stow for travel, remove quick release pin


(6) and pin (7).

2-569
TM 08780B-10

(3) Swing extended pintle (1) upward and


secure to upper mounting bracket (8) with pin (7) and quick release
pin (6).

2-570
TM 08780B-10

c. Front Extended Pintle Operation

WARNING

FRONT EXTENDED PINTLE IS HEAVY. USE HELPER


WHEN HANDLING EXTENSION KITS.

(1) Unstowing Front Extended Pintle

(a) Using two people, remove quick


release pin (6) and pin (7) from mounting bracket (8).

(b) Lower front extended pintle (1).


Raise support arm (9) to mounting bracket (8).

2-571
TM 08780B-10

(c) Install pin (7) into support bracket


(8) and support arm (9). Install pin (7) and quick release pin (6).

(2) Stowing Front Extended Pintle

(a) Using two people, remove quick


release pin (6) from pin (7). Remove pin (7) from mounting
bracket (8) and support arm (9).

(b) Lower support arm (9).

(c) Raise front extended pintle (1) until


it reaches mounting bracket (8). Install pin (7) and quick release
pin (6).

2-572
TM 08780B-10

d. Rear Extended Pintle Operations

(1) Removal from Stowage Mount

(a) Assemble spare tire hoist with its


extension tube. Refer to paragraph 3-8, section b.

(b) Attach cable hook to the extended


pintle (10) as shown. Start lifting pintle until cable just becomes
tight.

(c) Remove four quick release pins (11) and


four mounting pins (12) from extended pintle (10).

WARNING

EXTENDED PINTLE (10) IS EXTREMELY HEAVY. ORDER


ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE WORK AREA UNTIL
LOWERING OPERATION IS COMPLETE.

(d) Lift extended pintle (10) until it is


clear of stowage mount (13). Swing extended pintle (10) to side of
vehicle and lower.

2-573
TM 08780B-10

(2) Installation

(a) Position pintle (10) so that two pins


(12) can be installed through pintle and two rear tow brackets (14).
Install pins (12) and quick release pins (15).

(b) Remove quick release pin (16) and


pin (17) from support arm (18).

(c) Raise support arm (18) to support


bracket (19). Install pin (17) and quick release pin (16).

2-574
TM 08780B-10

(3) Stowing Rear Extended Pintle

(a) Attach lifting device strap or cable to


the extended pintle (10) as shown. Start lifting pintle until
strap/cable just becomes tight.

(b) Remove quick release pin (16) and


pin (17).

(c) Remove two quick release pins (15)


from pins (12).

2-575
TM 08780B-10

(d) Remove two pins (12). Remove rear


extended pintle (10). Install pin (17) and quick release pin (16)
into support (18).

(e) Lift and position rear extended pintle


(10) over stowage mount (13).

(f) Lower extended pintle (10) onto


stowage mount. Install four pins (12) and four quick release pins
(11).

(g) Remove straps or cable used to lift


pintle.

(h) Disassemble and stow tire hoist.


Refer to paragraph 3-8, section f.

e. Operating Pintle Hook

(1) Remove cotter pin (1), pull up on pintle


latch (2), and open pintle (3).

2-576
TM 08780B-10

(2) Attach tow bar eye or other towing device to


pintle (3).

(3) Push down on latch (2) to close pintle (3).

(4) Insert cotter pin (1) to lock pintle (3).

2-34. MACHINE GUN PLATFORM AND HATCH


OPERATION

a. Platform

(1) To lower platform.

(a) Pull upward on seat back (1) and


fold it down.

(b) Slide seat (1) back to the rear


position.

2-577
TM 08780B-10

(c) Remove retainer ring (2) from stud


(3).

(d) Fold platform (4) down, placing


support leg (5) on cab floor next to seat.

(e) Fold out platform extension (6).

2-578
TM 08780B-10

(2) To raise platform.

(a) Fold in platform extension (6).

(b) Lift up platform (4) and fold in


support leg (5).

(c) Secure platform on stud (3) and


install retainer ring (2).

(d) Lift up seat back (1) and lock into


upright position.

2-579
TM 08780B-10

b. Hatch

(1) To open hatch.

(a) Using two hands, push straight up on


hatch (7) until all corners are locked in the up position.

CAUTION

TO AVOID DAMAGING ROOF VENT, MAKE SURE THAT IT


IS FULLY CLOSED BEFORE SLIDING HATCH OPEN.

(b) Slide hatch (7) all the way to the left.

(c) To keep hatch from sliding, push


down on nearside of the hatch, locking it down on roof.

2-580
TM 08780B-10

(2) Closing hatch.

(a) If hatch is locked down, pull upward


on nearside of hatch until it is locked in the up position.

(b) Slide hatch all the way to the right.

(c) Grasp straps (8) and pull downward


until hatch (7) is fully seated.

2-581
TM 08780B-10

2-35. M870/M870A1 TRAILER KIT OPERATION

a. General Description. The M870 trailer kit is


designed to allow the MK16/16A1 to utilize its on board winch to
pull the M870/M870A1 trailer up to engage the fifth wheel. The
kit consists of an adjustable set of cable guide rollers, a cable guide
plate, and two auxiliary ramp assemblies.

b. Install Cable Guide Plate

(1) Position cable guide plate (1) over pintle


hook (2).

(2) Secure cable guide plate (1) with pin (3) and
quick release pin (4).

2-582
TM 08780B-10

c. Install Auxiliary Ramp Assemblies

(1) Position auxiliary ramp (1) over rear tow


eye (2).

(2) Secure auxiliary ramp (1) with pin (3) and


quick release pin (4).

(3) Repeat for other auxiliary ramp (1).

2-583
TM 08780B-10

Section IV. Operation Under Unusual Conditions

2-36. INTRODUCTION. This section provides procedures that


should be followed when operating the vehicle under extreme
weather or terrain conditions. This section also includes operating
procedures that should be followed after certain systems and
components of the vehicle have failed or have been damaged.

2-37. OPERATING IN EXTREME COLD WEATHER

a. General. In extreme cold lubricants may thicken


and cause parts to fail. Refer to LI 2320-12/9 for proper lubricants.
Tires may freeze to the ground or may freeze flat on the bottom if
under-inflated. The operator should be alert to these possibilities
in order to prevent damage to the vehicle.

b. Before Starting. Perform all Before (B) operation


preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS). Refer to
PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-5.

c. Starting Engine

(1) For starting instructions, refer to paragraph


2-13, section c.

NOTE
Upon startup, the engine must be operated at low idle (690-700
rpm) for five minutes.

(2) After engine starts, check the following


gauges for their proper readings:

(a) Oil pressure (2) for 5-49 psi (34-337


kPa) at idle.

(b) Volt meter (3) for 26-28 volts.

(c) Air pressure gauge (4) for 120 psi


(827 kPa).

2-584
TM 08780B-10

(3) If gauges do not indicate normal readings,


shutdown engine and notify Organizational Maintenance.

d. Driving

NOTE
• In extremely cold areas it is necessary to warm gear cases,
wheel hubs and control linkages before operating the
vehicle.

• Steering may respond quicker when using lubricants


designed for cold weather.

(1) Shift transfer case (5) and transmission (6)


to desired gear ranges. If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-13,
section d.

(2) Release parking brake (7).

2-585
TM 08780B-10

(3) Drive slowly for 100 yards (91 m). This


should be enough time to warm up the gear cases and tires.

(4) Drive normally as weather and road


conditions permit.

(5) Constantly check gauges during operation


for normal reading.

e. Crane Operation

CAUTION

• WHEN STARTING THE CRANE IN EXTREME COLD,


PERFORM ALL FUNCTIONS SLOWLY AND AVOID
SUDDEN SHOCKS.

• DO NOT FULLY EXTEND ANY HYDRAULIC


CYLINDER WITHOUT FIRST WARMING IT.

• FOR NON-LVSA1 VEHICLES, ELECTRONIC


CIRCUITRY MUST BE PREHEATED BEFORE
OPERATION.

(1) For non-LVSA1 vehicles, set the Manual-


Off-Remote switch to the MANUAL position. Leave in the
MANUAL position for at least 10 minutes to preheat the electronic
circuitry.

(2) Extend each hydraulic cylinder several


inches and partially retract it. Continue to extend and retract each
hydraulic cylinder until each hydraulic cylinder is fully extended.
This action mixes the warm oil flow with the cold thick oil in the
cylinders.

f. Parking

(1) If possible, park on hard, dry ground. If not


possible, use planks or brush to make a raised, and relatively dry

2-586
TM 08780B-10

surface for vehicle's tires-guarding against worse weather and


softer ground. Keep tires out of snow, water, ice or mud, if
possible.

(2) Engage parking brake.

(3) Idle engine at 800-1,000 rpm for 4 to 5


minutes to allow turbocharger to slow down.

(4) Shut down engine.

g. After Shut-Down

(1) Perform all After (A) operation preventive


maintenance checks and services (PMCS). Refer to PMCS tables
2-1 thru 2-5.

(2) Clean vehicle of snow, ice, or mud as soon


as possible after shutdown.

(3) Fill fuel tank to guard against condensation.

(4) Check fuel separator for water. If necessary,


drain it. Refer to PMCS table 2-1.

(5) Drain water from all air reservoirs. Refer to


paragraph 3-5.

2-38. OPERATING IN HOT WEATHER

a. General. Extreme heat exists when outside


temperatures reach +95°F (+35°C) or more. The effect of extreme
heat on vehicle engine is a decrease in engine efficiency.
Operators must adjust driving to conditions when operating in
extreme heat.

2-587
TM 08780B-10

b. Before Operation

(1) Perform all Before (B) operation preventive


maintenance checks and services (PMCS). Refer to PMCS tables
2-1 thru 2-5.

(2) Check radiator (1) for insects, sand, or other


obstructions that may block air flow.

c. Driving

(1) Do not drive the vehicle continuously at


high speed. Avoid long hard pulls on steep grades.

(2) Check air filter restriction indicator (2)


frequently. If indicator shows red, park vehicle, shut off engine,
and notify Organizational Maintenance.

(3) Frequently check water temperature gauge


(3), oil pressure gauge (4), and transmission oil temperature gauge

2-588
TM 08780B-10

(5). Engine is overheating if one or more of the following


conditions exist:

• Engine coolant temperature is +230°F (+110°C) as


indicated by temperature gauge.

• Engine oil pressure drops.

• Transmission oil temperature exceeds +250°F (+121°C) as


indicated by transmission oil temperature gauge.

(4) If engine overheating occurs:

(a) Park vehicle and allow engine to


idle.

CAUTION

IF ENGINE TEMPERATURE CONTINUES TO RISE OR


DOES NOT SHOW SIGNS OF DECREASING AFTER 2
MINUTES OF IDLING, TURN ENGINE OFF AND NOTIFY
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE IMMEDIATELY.

2-589
TM 08780B-10

(b) Observe water temperature gauge


(3), transmission oil temperature gauge (5), and engine oil pressure
gauge (4) for indications that engine is steadily cooling.

(c) Shut down engine when engine


coolant reaches normal operating range of +180°F to +200°F
(+82°C to +93°C) as indicated by water temperature gauge (4).
Boil over may result if engine is shut down earlier than this.

(d) Perform troubleshooting procedure


as listed in paragraph 3-2.

(e) Proceed with operation. Report any


overheating to Organizational Maintenance at completion of
operation.

d. Parking

(1) Park vehicle under cover whenever possible


to protect tires, canvas, paint, and batteries from sun, dust and
sand.

(2) Check batteries daily. Service as required


when operating in heat.

2-39. OPERATING IN ROUGH OR UNUSUAL TERRAIN

CAUTION

OFF ROAD OPERATION MUST BE LIMITED TO 30 MPH.


EMERGENCY OPERATION (SAND, MUD, OR SNOW) MUST
BE LIMITED TO 10 MPH.

a. General. The operator must always be alert to


changes in terrain. The operator should be cautious when entering
an extremely rough area or an area that requires special
preparation.

2-590
TM 08780B-10

b. Woods and Rocky Terrain

CAUTION

MAKE SURE VEHICLE CAN CLEAR GROUND


OBSTRUCTIONS, SUCH AS STUMPS AND LARGE ROCKS,
BEFORE DRIVING OVER THEM. STUMPS AND ROCKS
CAN DAMAGE COMPONENTS UNDERNEATH VEHICLE.

(1) Fold side mirrors in far enough that rear of


vehicle can be seen, but mirrors will not be damaged by
obstructions.

(2) If possible, avoid driving over obstructions


such as stumps or large rocks.

CAUTION

MAKE SURE VEHICLE AND CARGO CAN CLEAR


OVERHANGING TREE LIMBS AND OTHER
OBSTRUCTIONS. LOW OVERHEAD OBSTRUCTIONS CAN
DAMAGE CARGO AND TOP PARTS OF VEHICLE.

(3) If possible, avoid low overhanging


obstructions such as tree limbs.

(4) Check traction and brakes. Rocks and fallen


leaves can be very slick, especially when wet.

(5) When driving over rocky terrain, be sure


spare tire on vehicle is in good repair and is properly inflated.
Refer to PMCS table 2-1.

(6) When maneuvering vehicle on a steep, rock


grade, keep vehicle pointed up and down as much as possible.
Traveling a steep, rock grade sideways may cause a loss of traction
resulting in a roll-over.

2-591
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

DO NOT APPLY JACOBS BRAKE WHEN VEHICLE IS ON


SLICK SURFACE. APPLYING JACOBS BRAKE ON SLICK
SURFACES MAY CAUSE VEHICLE TO SKID, RESULTING
IN INJURY OR DEATH.

(7) Do not use Jacobs brake in rocky or wooded


areas.

c. Operating In Mud Or Sand

CAUTION

BLOWING SAND CAN SCRATCH GLASS SURFACES. TO


PREVENT SCRATCHING, GLASS SURFACES SHOULD BE
COVERED AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE IN THESE
CONDITIONS.

(1) Cover glass surfaces, if not needed for safe


operation. To prevent scratching surface, extreme care should be
taken when cleaning glass.

NOTE
Principles of driving in sand can also be applied to driving in
mud. The best time to drive on sand is at night or early morning
when sand is damp. Damp sand gives better traction.

(2) Check air filter restriction indicator often.

(3) Fold vehicle mirrors in so that rear of


vehicle can still be seen, but will clear any obstruction.

(4) With vehicle stopped and engine idling, shift


driveline lockup control to either AXLE LOCKUP or TRANSFER
CASE LOCKUP. Shift transfer case to LOW RANGE.

(5) Shift transmission to D (drive).

2-592
TM 08780B-10

(6) Start out slowly. Do not spin wheels when


starting to move vehicle. Downshift transmission as required.

(7) Avoid straddling sand mounds, or driving


across sand mounds. Loose sand will not support vehicle.

(8) Avoid making sharp turns or sudden stops


while driving on loose sand or mud.

(9) If vehicle starts to skid, do the following:

(a) Release throttle treadle.

(b) Steer in direction of skid until


vehicle stops skidding.

(c) Depress throttle treadle slowly and


steer vehicle in a straight direction.

(10) Parking

(a) When possible, park vehicle so it


does not face into the wind.

(b) In blowing sand, cover glass surfaces


to prevent scratching.

(c) If no shelter is available, cover


radiator with canvas.

(d) Use caution while refueling to


prevent dust or sand from entering fuel tanks. Tighten filler caps
securely after refueling.

(e) Perform after operation checks.


Refer to PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-7.

2-593
TM 08780B-10

d. Operating In Snow

(1) For operation in cold weather, refer to


paragraph 2-13.

(2) If operating in extreme cold weather, refer to


paragraph 2-37.

(3) With engine idling and vehicle stopped, shift


driveline lockup control to either AXLE LOCKUP or TRANSFER
CASE LOCKUP. Shift transfer case to LOW RANGE.

(4) Shift transmission to D (drive).

(5) Start slowly. Avoid spinning wheels when


starting to move vehicle. Downshift transmission as required.

(6) Skidding, loss of traction and loss of


steering are the chief operating problems on packed snow or icy
roads. When rear end skidding occurs, do the following
immediately:

(a) Turn front wheels in direction of the


skid.

(b) Let up on throttle treadle.

(c) Apply service brakes gradually and


intermittently until control is regained.

(7) Parking

(h) Remove all built up snow, ice, or


mud from under fenders, front wheels, rear wheels, and vehicle in
general.

(i) Drain air tanks and fuel separator.

2-594
TM 08780B-10

(j) Perform after operation checks.


Refer to PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-7.

2-40. FORDING OPERATIONS

a. General. Your vehicle may have to operate in


different depths of water. Normally, all important vehicle
components will allow water fording up to 60 inches (1,524 mm)
in depth.

WARNING

DO NOT FORD WATER DEEPER THAN 60 INCHES (1,524


MM). LIMIT SPEED TO THREE TO FOUR MILES (4.8 TO
6.4 KM) PER HOUR WHILE FORDING.

b. Preparation for Fording

(1) Tighten both fuel tank caps (1).

(2) Make sure battery filler caps (2) are secure.

(3) Make sure hydraulic reservoir filler cap (3)


is secure.

2-595
TM 08780B-10

(4) Make sure cab drain plugs (4), located under


seats, are in place on both sides of the cab.

(5) Make sure flywheel pipe plug (5) is in place.

(6) Secure all loose objects on vehicle.

(7) Clean and check axle breathers for correct


operation.

c. Fording

(1) Start vehicle. Make sure engine is running


properly. If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-13 for proper starting
and engine operating instructions.

(2) With engine idling, and vehicle stopped,


shift transfer case to LOW, and transmission to (D) drive.

2-596
TM 08780B-10

(3) Find a gentle slope to enter water. Enter


water slowly, at a right angle to the shore.

(4) Maintain an even speed while fording.


Excessive speed will cause water to cover vehicle. Water spray
could enter the air intake and stall the engine.

(5) Find a gentle slope to leave water. Stop


vehicle. Shift transfer case to DIRECT.

d. After Fording

(1) If fording was in salt water, wash vehicle


with fresh water as soon as possible. Refer to paragraph 3-6.

(2) Remove cab drain plugs (4) to drain any


water that may have entered the cab.

(3) Remove flywheel pipe plug (5), allow water


to drain, then reinstall plug.

(4) Perform after operation PMCS. Refer to


PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-7.

2-41. EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE

a. General. The following procedures allow operation


or movement of the LVS when certain systems or components of
the vehicle are damaged or fail. These procedures should only be
used when vehicle cannot be repaired on location.

b. Operation With Loss Of Air Pressure

(1) If either the red or green pointer (1 or 2)


indicates less than normal operating pressure, do the following:

2-597
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

WHEN RED OR GREEN POINTER INDICATES LESS THAN


NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE, BRAKING CAPABILITY
IS REDUCED. EXTRA CARE MUST BE USED TO AVOID A
COLLISION WHICH COULD RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY
OR DEATH.

(a) Continue operation of vehicle.


Brakes will function at a reduced capacity.

(b) Leave additional distance between


vehicles. Braking distance is greatly increased.

(c) Downshift, if necessary, when


slowing vehicle.

WARNING

DO NOT USE JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE WHEN VEHICLE IS


ON SLIPPERY SURFACE. IF ENGINE BRAKE IS USED
INCORRECTLY, VEHICLE CONTROL CAN BE LOST. THIS
CAN RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.

2-598
TM 08780B-10

(d) If necessary to slow vehicle, place


Jacobs engine brake HI/LOW switch (3) in LOW and place
ON/OFF switch (4) ON.

(2) If both the red pointer (1) and the green


pointer (2) indicate zero air pressure, do the following:

(a) Downshift, if necessary, to slow


vehicle.

(b) Pull vehicle over, as clear of traffic


as possible.

WARNING

WHEN SPRING BRAKES ARE APPLIED, VEHICLE WILL


STOP QUICKLY. ALSO, IT CANNOT BE DRIVEN AGAIN
UNTIL MALFUNCTION IS REPAIRED AND THERE IS
ENOUGH AIR SUPPLY FOR OPERATION OF SERVICE
BRAKES.

(c) Pull air parking brake control valve


(5).

(d) Once vehicle stops, shut down


engine. Refer to paragraph 2-13 of this manual.

2-599
TM 08780B-10

(e) Notify Organizational Maintenance.

c. Manually Caging Spring Brake Chambers

WARNING

THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE USED WHEN


ENTIRE AIR SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE. THIS
PROCEDURE PROVIDES FOR PARTIAL CAGING
SUITABLE FOR TOWING ONLY. THIS PROCEDURE IS
FOR OPERATORS. IT IS NOT INTENDED AS COMPLETE
CAGING FOR MAINTENANCE OF THE SERVICE BRAKES.

(1) Place wheel chocks (6) behind both wheels


on front axle.

NOTE
The following procedure applies to all spring brake chambers.
There are no spring brake chambers on the front axle.

(2) Remove dust cap (7) from spring chamber


(8).

2-600
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

IF INSIDE OF SPRING BRAKE CHAMBER (8) IS CLOGGED


WITH MUD, SAND, OR DIRT, DO NOT PROCEED WITH
SPRING CAGING OPERATION UNLESS THE CHAMBER
CAN BE CLEARED. NOTIFY ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE IF CHAMBER CANNOT BE CLEARED.

(3) Visually inspect inside of spring brake


chamber (8) for mud, sand, or dirt.

(4) Remove nut (9) and washer (10) from side


of spring brake chamber (8). Remove caging bolt (11).

2-601
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

BRAKE CHAMBER CONTAINS A SPRING UNDER GREAT


PRESSURE. TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH,
NEVER WORK DIRECTLY BEHIND CHAMBER. IF
CAGING BOLT WILL NOT ENGAGE PROPERLY, SPRING
MAY BE BROKEN.

(5) Insert T-end of caging bolt (11) into hole in


brake chamber (8). T-end should be inserted through key-way of
the metal diaphragm (12) inside brake chamber (8). With caging
bolt inserted, rotate caging bolt 1/4 turn clockwise until "T" bolt
catches on stop inside diaphragm (12).

NOTE
If caging bolt (11) cannot be pulled directly out of spring brake
chamber (8) after it has been turned, bolt (11) is properly seated.

(6) With caging bolt (11) properly seated, hold


in position and install washer (10) and nut (9) onto caging bolt
(11). Tighten nut (9) until it contacts spring brake chamber (8)
finger tight.

2-602
TM 08780B-10

(7) Turn nut (9) clockwise and cage until 2 1/2


to 3 inches of the caging bolt threads extend out of the spring brake
chamber. Brake is then caged for towing.

NOTE
Measure caging (2 1/2 inches to 3 inches) from top of nut (9) to
end of bolt (11).

(8) Repeat steps (2) thru (7) for remaining five


spring brake chambers (8).

d. Operating with Loss of Hydraulic System

NOTE
Failure of hydraulic system will stop operation of any crane,
winch or hydraulic motor on vehicle. All cranes and winches are
equipped with automatic locking mechanisms that hold cranes
and winches in the position they were in before hydraulics failed.

(1) Do not attempt to continue operation of any


crane or winch. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

(2) Do not attempt to repair hydraulic system.

WARNING

INCREASED EFFORT WILL BE REQUIRED TO TURN


STEERING WHEEL IF THERE IS A FAILURE OF
HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM OR THE ENGINE STOPS
RUNNING. STOP VEHICLE AS SOON AS ROAD
CONDITIONS PERMIT. OPERATING THE VEHICLE WITH
IMPAIRED STEERING COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH.

(3) If failure occurs while driving, bring vehicle


to at a stop. Engage parking brake, shut down engine. Refer to
paragraph 2-13 of this manual.

2-603
TM 08780B-10

(4) Notify Organizational Maintenance.

e. Emergency Shut Down Procedure

(1) Open engine compartment door (13).

WARNING

ENGINE IS HOT. USE CARE TO PREVENT BURNS.

(2) Push lever (14) towards solenoid (15) as far


as it will go.

(3) Hold until engine stops.

(4) Notify Organizational Maintenance.

NOTE
Perform step (5) for LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(5) Pull and hold emergency engine stop lever


(16) until engine stops. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

2-604
TM 08780B-10

f. Crane Operation after Electrical Failure (MK15A1


and MK17A1)

WARNING

USE THIS PROCEDURE ONLY IN THE EVENT OF AN


EXTREME EMERGENCY. USING THE MANUAL
OVERRIDE SWITCH TO OPERATE THE MHC OVERRIDES
THE OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS AND ALLOWS
THE MHC TO EXCEED THE RATED CAPACITY. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. NOTIFY
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE TO HAVE PROBLEM CORRECTED.

NOTE
• Except where noted, emergency MHC operation is the
same for MK15A1 and MK17A1 vehicles.

• All MHC functions, except overload lockouts, will operate


normally when using MANUAL OVERRIDE switch.

• In the event of an electrical failure, crane can only be


operated manually from main control panel.

2-605
TM 08780B-10

(1) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1) located on MHC main control panel (2). Place HOIST
lever (3) in DOWN position and lower load as necessary.

(2) Disconnect hook (4) from load.

(3) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place TELESCOPE lever (5) in the IN position until
boom (6) is fully retracted.

CAUTION

REEL IN CABLE AS REQUIRED SO THAT HOOK BLOCK


ASSEMBLY WILL NOT CONTACT CARGO BED SIDES OR
JACK CYLINDER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(4) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in the UP position to reel in
cable (7).

NOTE
Position boom so that cable and hook block assembly are on
passenger (right) side of vehicle in line with hook block stowage
location.

(5) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE switch


(1). Place SWING lever (8) to CW or CCW position as necessary
and position hook block (4) over passenger (right) side of vehicle.
Align hook block (4) with hook block stowage location.

(6) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place MAST lever (9) in DOWN position and lower
mast (10).

2-606
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
If operating a MK17A1 MHC, perform steps (7) through (9). If
operating MK15A1 MHC, proceed to step (10).

(7) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place BOOM lever (11) in the DOWN position and
fully lower boom (6).

(8) Connect hook block (4) to stowage ring


(12).

(9) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in UP position and remove all
slack from cable (7).

2-607
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Perform steps (10) through (12) on MK15A1 only.

(10) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in DOWN position and lower
hook block (4) near hook block stowage hook (13).

CAUTION

OBSERVE HOOK BLOCK DURING LOWERING TO


ENSURE THAT HOOK BLOCK REMAINS ATTACHED TO
HOOK BLOCK STOWAGE BRACKET. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-608
TM 08780B-10

(11) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place BOOM lever (11) in DOWN position and
HOIST lever (3) in UP position and fully lower boom (6). Ensure
that hook block (4) remains attached to hook block stowage
bracket (13).

(12) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in UP position until all slack is
removed from cable (7).

(13) Remove two pins (14) from outrigger pads


(15).

(14) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE


switch (1). Place LH O/R JACK lever (16) in UP position to raise
outrigger jack cylinder (17).

2-609
TM 08780B-10

(15) Place R/H O/R JACK lever (18) in UP


position to raise outrigger jack cylinder (17).

(16) Stow outrigger jack cylinder pads (15) in


stowage brackets (19).

(17) Place O/R EXT lever (20) to IN position


until outrigger beams are fully retracted.

2-610
TM 08780B-10

2-42. FRONT FLAT TOWING PROCEDURES

a. General. This paragraph provides basic towing


precautions as well as specific instructions for preparation for
towing and front flat towing of an LVS vehicle. Refer to
paragraph 2-18 for Lift and Tow procedures.

2-611
TM 08780B-10

b. Basic Flat Towing Precautions

(1) Never prepare a disabled vehicle for flat


towing until the disabled vehicle has been safely rigged to the
towing vehicle.

(2) Use of the MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Wrecker


Recovery Vehicle for flat towing is the preferred towing method.
When the MK48/48A1/15/15A1 is unavailable, flat towing may be
accomplished with a second LVS if the wrecker's heavy duty tow
bar, short and long lifting chains and air lines are made available to
the LVS.

WARNING

DO NOT USE TOW STRAPS OR CROSS CHAINS TO FLAT


TOW ANY LVS UNIT. PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT COULD RESULT.

(3) Never rig an LVS Front Power Unit for flat


towing if it is uncoupled from its rear trailer, unless it is safely
secured to prevent tipping. An uncoupled LVS Front Power Unit
is front-heavy and unstable. In situations when only a Front Power
Unit will be recovered, rig the unit for flat towing before
uncoupling.

2-612
TM 08780B-10

(4) Except in an extreme emergency, do NOT


flat tow an LVS vehicle without first disconnecting and securing
the drive line of the vehicle being towed. Refer to section e,
Preparation for Towing.

CAUTION

EXCEEDING THE 5 MILES PER HOUR (8 KPH) SPEED


LIMIT OR THE ONE HALF MILE (.8 KM) TOWING LIMIT
WITH DISABLED VEHICLE'S DRIVE LINE STILL
CONNECTED WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE
VEHICLE'S TRANSMISSION.

(5) In emergencies when time or the tactical


situation does not permit disconnecting the drive line of the
disabled vehicle, limited flat towing can be performed. In such
instances, the disabled vehicle must not be towed more than one
half a mile (.8 km). Also, towing speed must not exceed 5 miles
per hour (8 kph).

WARNING

TOWING OPERATIONS MUST ALWAYS BE CONDUCTED


AT A SPEED WHICH THE OPERATOR DETERMINES TO
BE SAFE UNDER EXISTING CONDITIONS. IN NO EVENT
SHOULD THE OPERATOR EXCEED 15 MPH (24 KPH)
WHEN TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.

(6) After preparation for flat towing is made and


the drive train components are disconnected, do not tow at speeds
over 15 mph (24 kph).

2-613
TM 08780B-10

c. Rigging Vehicle for Front Flat Towing

CAUTION

• REAR FLAT TOW IS AVAILABLE TO REPOSITION


THE DISABLED VEHICLE FOR OTHER
RECOVERY/TOWING METHODS ONLY, AND IS NOT
INTENDED TO BE USED FOR EXTENDED
RECOVERY PURPOSES, AS DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT COULD OCCUR.

• EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF THE


FOLLOWING GCW (GROSS COMBINATION
WEIGHT) RATINGS ARE EXCEEDED.

GCW RATING
On Highway Off Highway

154,000 lbs. 105,000 lbs.


(69,916 kg) (47,670 kg)

NOTE
Hookup for rear flat tow for repositioning purposes only is the
same as the hookup for front flat tow, except that the tow bar is
reversed and attached to the lower tow eyes of the wrecker

(1) Position rear of wrecker directly inline with


front of the disabled vehicle. Allow adequate working space.

(2) Place wrecker transmission shifter (1) in


neutral (N) and apply parking brake valve (2).

2-614
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

TOW BAR IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY TWO


PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(3) Remove tow bar assembly (3) from position


on top of wrecker cargo body. Remove brace (4) from side
stowage compartment.

NOTE
For flat towing, the tow bar must be fully extended.

(4) Install brace (4) on tow bar (3). Secure


brace with pins (5) and retaining pins (6).

2-615
TM 08780B-10

(5) Install clevises (7) on upper tow eyes (8) of


the disabled vehicle. Secure with pins (9) and retaining pins (10).

(6) Attach tow bar (3) to clevises (7) using pins


(11) and retaining pins (12).

WARNING

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR TOWING


REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR, A GROUND
GUIDE, AND TWO ASSISTANTS TO SUPPORT TOW BAR
(3). OPERATORS MUST BACK IN SLOWLY, USING
EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO
THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND GROUND GUIDE
MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND UNDERSTAND TWO HAND
SIGNALS – ONE THAT MEANS BACK UP SLOWLY, AND
ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

2-616
TM 08780B-10

(7) Direct two crew members to hold tow bar


(3) in position for coupling with the rear pintle hook (13).

(8) On direction of the ground guide, the


wrecker must be backed up slowly until eye of the tow bar (3) can
be installed on the pintle hook (13).

(9) Close and lock pintle hook (13), if


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

2-617
TM 08780B-10

(10) Attach two short lifting chains (14) to lower


tow eyes (15) using shackles (16) and pins (17).

(11) Attach two long lifting chains (18) to lower


tow eyes (19) of the disabled vehicle using shackles (20) and pins
(21).

2-618
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
Chains must cross undertow bar.

(12) Cross long lifting chains (18) over each


other. Connect grab hooks of short lifting chains (14) to the
second link below the grab hook ends of the long lifting chains
(18). Install two small shackles (22) on long lifting chains (18) so
that the chain will not come apart.

2-619
TM 08780B-10

CAUTION

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE GLAD


HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE COUPLING.

NOTE
• If the disabled vehicle's air system is inoperable, the
brakes must be manually released. Refer to paragraph 2-
40, section c.

• Ball valve (26) must be open to release disabled vehicle's


parking brakes.

(13) If the disabled vehicle's air or brake system


is operable, connect air lines (23) to glad hands (24) at rear of
wrecker. Insert air lines (23) through the front grille of the
disabled vehicle and wrap them about 2 1/2 times to prevent lines
from dragging on the ground. Connect air lines (23) to front glad
hands (25) of disabled vehicle. Service-to-service (blue-to-blue).
Emergency-to-emergency (red-to-red). Open ball valve (26).

2-620
TM 08780B-10

(14) Prepare disabled vehicle for flat towing.


Refer to paragraph 2-41, section e.

(15) Push wrecker TRAILER AIR SUPPLY


valve (27) and PARKING BRAKE VALVE (2) in to charge
disabled vehicle's air system.

NOTE
Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km) when flat towing a disabled
vehicle.

(16) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.


Place transfer case shifter (28) in LOW range. Push parking brake
valve in to release disabled vehicle's parking brakes. Disabled
vehicle is now ready to flat tow.

d. Disconnecting Vehicle After Flat Towing

(1) Place wrecker transmission shifter (1) in


neutral (N) and apply parking brake valve (2).

(2) Pull TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (27)


out.

2-621
TM 08780B-10

(3) Remove airlines (23) from glad hands (24)


on wrecker and glad hands (25) on disabled vehicle.

2-622
TM 08780B-10

(4) Remove two small shackles (22) from the


long lifting chains (18).

(5) Unhook long lifting chains (18) from short


lifting chains (14). Remove pins (21), shackles (20), and long
lifting chains (18) from disabled vehicle.

(6) Remove shackles (16), pins (17), and short


lifting chains (14) from wrecker.

(7) Unlock and open pintle hook (13). If


necessary, refer to paragraph 2-32, section e.

2-623
TM 08780B-10

(8) Direct two crew members to hold tow bar


(3) in position for uncoupling with the rear pintle hook (13).

(9) On direction of the ground guide, pull the


wrecker forward and slowly lower the tow bar (3) to the ground.

(10) Remove retaining pins (12), pins (11), and


tow bar (3).

2-624
TM 08780B-10

(11) Remove retaining pins (10), pins (9), and


clevises (7).

(12) Remove retaining pins (6), pins (5), and


brace (4).

NOTE
Fully collapse tow bar for stowage in wrecker cargo body.

(13) Stow tow bar (3) and brace (4).

(14) Stow all towing equipment.

2-625
TM 08780B-10

e. Preparation for Towing

(1) Prepare cab controls of disabled vehicle.

(a) Shift transfer case shifter (28) to


neutral position. This is halfway between DIRECT (HIGH) and
LOW range.

(b) Place transmission shifter (29) in (N)


neutral position.

(c) Place drive line lockup control (30)


in the UNLOCK position.

2-626
TM 08780B-10

(2) Disconnect the drive lines of disabled


vehicle at two locations as shown below. To disconnect drive lines
perform the following procedures:

(a) At the No. 3 rear axle input flange (31),


install a tie down strap (32). Wrap the tie down strap (32) at least
once around the drive line (33). Tie ends of strap (32) to the
vehicle's chassis (34) as shown.

WARNING

SECURE THE DRIVE LINE (33) TO THE CHASSIS BEFORE


REMOVAL OF THE 8 FLANGE BOLTS (35). THE DRIVE
LINE IS VERY HEAVY.

2-627
TM 08780B-10

(b) Remove eight caps screws (35) lockwashers


(36), and nuts (37) from rear axle input flange (31).

WARNING

THE DRIVE LINE (33) IS HEAVY. USE AN ASSISTANT TO


HELP HOLD DRIVE LINE (33) WHILE IT IS BEING
SECURED OUT OF THE WAY.

(c) Push upon drive line (33)until input flange


(31) separates from the axle differential flange (38).

(d) Loosen straps (32). Direct assistant to push


drive line (33) as far up and out of the way as possible. Secure
drive line (33) in a stowed position with straps (32) as shown.

2-628
TM 08780B-10

(e) At the rear engine mount (39) on left side of


the front power unit, lower each end of a tie down strap (40) to the
work area beneath vehicle so that strap (40) is draped over the top
of engine mount (39).

NOTE
The front power unit's engine mount (39) serves as the tie down
point for securing of the drive line (41) to the vehicle for towing.

2-629
TM 08780B-10

(f) From the underside of the vehicle, wrap tie


down strap (40) at least once around the nose box drive line (41).
Secure tie down strap so that drive line is held in a safe position
during removal of capscrews (42).

(g) With drive line secured, remove 8 capscrews


(42), nuts (43), and lockwashers (44) from nosebox flange (45). If
necessary, move towing vehicle forward slightly for removal of the
capscrew (42) nearest bracket (46). Moving the disabled vehicle
forward slightly will rotate flange (45) and allow access to the final
capscrew.

WARNING

THE DRIVE LINE (41) IS HEAVY. USE AN ASSISTANT TO


HELP HOLD DRIVE LINE (41) WHILE IT IS BEING
SECURED OUT OF THE WAY.

(h) Push upon drive line (41) until flange (47)


separates from the nose box flange (45).

(i) Thread loose end of tie down strap (40)


through the universal joint (48) of the disconnected drive line (41).
Pullback of strap (40) until drive line is drawn backwards
(retracted).

2-630
TM 08780B-10

(j) Direct assistant to push drive line (41) as far


up and out of the way as possible. Secure retracted drive line to the
vehicle frame using frame post (49) next to the engine rear mount
(39).

2-631
TM 08780B-10

2-43 FLAT TOWING THE 7-TON TRUCK BY THE LVS

a. General Description. This paragraph provides basic


towing precautions as well as specific instructions and preparation
for flat towing a 7-Ton Truck with a MK48/15 Wrecker. Follow
the same procedures outlined in this manual for the LVS except for
the special procedures that are resident to the 7-Ton Truck only.
Refer to TM 10629-10 and TM 10867A-12&P for additional
information as required.

b. Basic Flat Towing Precautions

WARNING

NEVER FLAT TOW 7-TON TRUCK FROM REAR.


PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT.

NOTE
• Never prepare disabled vehicle for flat towing until the
disabled vehicle has been safely rigged to the towing
vehicle. Refer to section C.

• Except in an extreme emergency, do NOT flat tow a 7-


Ton Truck without first removing prop shaft between
transmission and transfer case of the vehicle being towed.
Refer to TM 10867A-12&P.

2-632
TM 08780B-10

c. Rigging Vehicle For Front Flat Towing

CAUTION

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF THE


FOLLOWING GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT (GCW)
RATINGS ARE EXCEEDED.

GCW RATING

On Highway Off Highway

154,000 lbs. 105,000 lbs.


(69,916 kg) (47,670 kg)

NOTE
For flat towing, the tow bar (3) must be fully extended. Do not
install the brace.

(1) Install 7-Ton Truck adapters (4) on tow eyes


(5) of the disabled vehicle. Secure with pins (6) and retaining pins
(7).

2-633
TM 08780B-10

(2) Attach tow bar (3) to 7-Ton Truck adapters


(4) using pins (8) and retaining pins (9).

WARNING
• DO NOT POSITION HANDS NEAR PINTLE HOOK
WHILE ALIGNING TOW BAR WITH PINTLE HOOK
ON TOWING VEHICLE. PERSONAL INJURY MAY
RESULT.

• ENSURE AIR LINES ARE NOT CROSSED.


PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT.

CAUTION

IF AIR LINES ARE EXCESSIVELY LONG, WHERE THE


SLACK WILL DRAG ON THE GROUND, ROUTE AIR LINES
LOOSELY AROUND TOW BAR TO TAKE UP EXCESS
SLACK. IF WRAPPING AIR LINE AROUND TOW BAR, BE
SURE TO LEAVE ENOUGH SLACK TO ALLOW FOR
CORNERING OF VEHICLE. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
MAY RESULT.

2-634
TM 08780B-10

NOTE
If the disabled vehicle’s braking system is inoperable, the brakes
must be manually released. Refer to TM 10629-10. The LVS
Wrecker is not equipped with the inter-vehicular cable, however,
one can be procured as an additional authorized item for use in
place of the Emergency Tow Lights.

(3) Connect inter-vehicular cable (23) to


connector (24) on front bumper of 7-Ton Truck and connector (25)
on rear of wrecker.

(4) Raise hood of 7-Ton Truck. Refer to TM


10629-10.

(5) Disconnect connector (26) from connector


(27).

(6) Lower hood of 7-Ton Truck.

(7) Inspect brake lights, turn signals, taillights


and emergency flashers on 7-Ton Truck for proper operation.

NOTE
• Perform Steps 8 through 12 only if brake lights, turn
signals, taillights, or emergency flashers do not operate
on 7-Ton Truck when inter-vehicular cable is connected.

• If brake lights, turn signals, taillights and emergency


flashers operate properly on 7-ton Truck when inter-
vehicular cable is connected, continue on with hook up
procedures.

(8) Disconnect inter-vehicular cable (23) from


connector (24) on front bumper of 7-Ton Truck and connector (25)
on rear of wrecker.

2-635
TM 08780B-10

(9) Raise hood of 7-Ton Truck. Refer to TM


10629-10.

(10) Connect connector (26) to connector (27).

(11) Lower hood of 7-Ton Truck.

d. Installation of Emergency Tow Lights

(1) Remove emergency tow lights (30) and two


brackets (31) from stowage.

(2) Install two brackets (31) in center holes of


emergency tow lights (30) with two screws (32), washers (33), and
nuts (34).

2-636
TM 08780B-10

(3) Position emergency tows lights (30) on rear


of disabled vehicle and fasten securely with straps (35).

(4) Remove tow light cable (36) from stowage


and connect to emergency tow lights (30).

(5) Route other end of tow light cable (36)


along disabled vehicle and connect to rear connector on wrecker.

WARNING

PRIOR TO TOWING DISABLED VEHICLE, CHECK THAT


BRAKE LIGHTS, FLASHERS, AND TURN SIGNALS ARE
OPERATING ON EMERGENCY TOW LIGHTS IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THOSE ON TOWING VEHICLE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

2-637
TM 08780B-10

(6) Check brake lights, flashers, and turn signals


for proper operation on emergency tow lights (30).

e. Disconnecting Vehicle After Flat Towing

WARNING

ENSURE THAT VEHICLES ARE ON LEVEL SURFACE


PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING TOW BAR. PERSONAL
INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT MAY
RESULT.

(1) Follow the same procedures outlined in this


manual for the LVS except for the special procedures that are
resident to the 7-Ton Truck only.

NOTE
• If using inter-vehicular cable, perform steps (2) through
(5).

• If using emergency tow lights, perform step (6) only.

(2) Disconnect inter-vehicular cable (23) from


connector (24) on front bumper of 7-Ton Truck and connector (25)
on rear of wrecker.

(3) Raise hood of 7-Ton Truck. Refer to TM


10629-10.

(4) Connect connector (26) to connector (27).

(5) Lower hood of 7-Ton Truck.

2-638
TM 08780B-10

f. Removal of Emergency Tow Lights

(1) Remove tow light cable (36) from wrecker


and emergency tow lights (30).

(2) Stow tow light cable (36).

(3) Remove straps (35) and emergency tow


lights (30) from vehicle.

(4) Remove two nuts (34), washers (33), screws


(32), and brackets (31) from emergency tow lights (30).

(5) Stow emergency tow lights (30), two nuts


(34), washers (33), screws (32), brackets (31), and straps (35).

2-639
TM 08780B-10

g. Propeller Shaft Removal (Transfer Case to


Transmission)

WARNING

PROP SHAFT IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


TWO PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

NOTE
A pry bar may be necessary to hold yokes from turning during
removal.

(1) Remove four screws (37) and two bearing


straps (38) from yoke (39).

2-640
TM 08780B-10

(2) Remove four screws (40) and two bearing straps


(41) from yoke (42).

CAUTION

• WHEN REMOVING PROP SHAFT FROM YOKES,


ENSURE THAT BEARING CAPS REMAIN ON
UNIVERSAL JOINT. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN LOSS OR DAMAGED TO EQUIPMENT.

• DO NOT ALLOW SLIP YOKE TO COME OFF PROP


SHAFT. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
MISALIGNMENT OF PROP SHAFT YOKES AND
COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE
Note position of prop shaft prior to removal to ensure proper
installation.

(3) Compress prop shaft (43) and remove from


two yokes (39 and 42).

2-641/(2-642 blank)
TM 08780B-10

CHAPTER 3

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Lubrication Instructions

3-1. LUBRICATION. For complete information on


lubricating the LVS series vehicles, refer to the lubrication
instructions in LI 2320-12/9. The lube order will show lubrication
points, explain what lubricant to use and provide the lubrication
intervals.

Section II. Troubleshooting Procedures

3-2. INTRODUCTION. Table 3-2 lists the common


malfunctions that you may find during operation or maintenance of
the vehicle or its equipment. You should perform these tests,
inspections and corrective actions in the order listed.

To quickly find the troubleshooting procedure you need, use the


Fault Symptom Index (Table 3-1). Components and symptoms are
listed alphabetically. Common malfunctions are listed
alphabetically under those components or system headings.

This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur. Nor can
it list all tests, inspections and corrective actions. If a malfunction
is not listed, or if listed corrective actions are not adequate, notify
the non-commissioned officer in charge (NCOIC).

Table 3 -1. Symptom Index

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Page

Air System

Warning buzzer and air indicator is on ............................ 3-7


Loses pressure or air indicator lights and buzzer
sounds during operation ................................................... 3-8

3-1
TM 08780B-10

Table 3 -1. Symptom Index (Continued)

Troubleshooting Procedure Page

Trailer brake does not apply when service brake


treadle or parking brake is used ....................................... 3-9

Electrical System

All electrical systems inoperative .................................... 3-6

Engine

Engine fails to crank ......................................... .............. 3-3


Engine cranks, but will not start............................... ....... 3-3
Hard to start, does not run smoothly, lacks power ........... 3-3
Low engine oil pressure ................................................... 3-4
High engine oil consumption ........................................... 3-4
Engine will not stop running ............................................ 3-4
Engine overheats .............................................................. 3-5

Hydraulic System

Cranes, winches, or A-frame operates too slow,


too fast, or with jerky movements.................................. 3-11
One or more hydraulic circuits will not operate ............ 3-12

Steering

Vehicle is hard to steer, shimmies, or wanders .............. 3-10


Vehicle steering is slow to respond or power is
intermittent ..................................................................... 3-11

Transmission

Slow or difficult engagement ........................................... 3-6


Gage indicates overheating during normal operation ...... 3-6
Unusually noisy when operating ...................................... 3-6

3-2
TM 08780B-10

Table 3 -1. Symptom Index

Troubleshooting Procedure Page

Wheels and Tires

Tires worn unevenly or excessively ............................... 3-10


Vehicle wanders or pulls to one side on level surface ..... 3-9
Wheel wobbles ................................................................. 3-9

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE

1. ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK

Step 1. Make sure transmission shifter is in neutral (N)


position.

Move selector in and out of neutral (N)


several times.

Step 2. Check for dirty, loose, or broken battery cables.


If battery connections are dirty or loose, clean and
tighten cables. Refer to paragraph 3-10.

2. ENGINE CRANKS, WILL NOT START

Step 1. Check fuel gauge of fuel level. If gauge shows


enough fuel, but engine still does not start, go to
Step 2.

3-3
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

Step 2. Check for fuel in tank.

Add fuel and prime system as needed. Refer


to paragraph 2-13, section m.

Step 3. Check air cleaner restriction indicator.

If restriction indicator reads red, air cleaner


is restricted and must be serviced. Notify
Organizational Maintenance.

3. HARD TO START, DOES NOT RUN SMOOTHLY,


LACKS POWER

Step 1. Check air cleaner restriction indicator for red


indication.

If red, reset. Start engine and check again.


If still red, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

Step 2. Check water separator for contamination or water.

Drain fuel from sediment bowl until clean


fuel flows out. Notify Organizational
Maintenance.

Step 3. Check secondary fuel filter for damage or leaks.

Notify Organizational Maintenance.

3-4
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

Step 4. Check fuel lines and connections for leaks or


damage.

Tighten leaking connections or report


damage to Organizational Maintenance.

4. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

Check engine oil level on dipstick.

Adjust level as needed.

5. HIGH ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

Check engine for loose oil lines.

Tighten leaking connections, or report


damage to Organizational Maintenance.

6. ENGINE WILL NOT STOP RUNNING

Step 1. Make sure stop switch is held all the way down.

Position thumb over switch and press in a


downward direction. Apply only enough
force as needed to fully engage switch.
Repeat as needed. If engine still continues
to run, go to Step 2.

3-5
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

NOTE
Perform Step (2.1) for LVSA1 series vehicles.

Step 2. Open engine compartment door. Push lever (1)


towards solenoid (2) as far as it will go. Hold
until engine stops. Notify Organizational
Maintenance.

Step 2.1. Pull and hold emergency engine stop lever (1. 1)
until engine stops. Notify Organizational
Maintenance.

3-6
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

7. ENGINE OVERHEATS

WARNING

USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID BEING SCALDED OR


BURNED WHEN REMOVING RADIATOR CAP. USE
HEAVY RAG OR GLOVES TO PROTECT HANDS.

Step 1. Check for coolant in sight glass in radiator.

Remove radiator cap and add coolant as


needed.

Step 2. Check coolant hoses for leaks, damage, or loose


clamps.

Tighten loose clamps if needed. Report


damage to Organizational Maintenance.

Step 3. Check radiator for leaks or damage.

If leaking, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

Step 4. Check radiator cooling fins for dirt or debris


blocking air flow.

Remove any dirt or debris blocking air flow.

3-7
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TRANSMISSION

1. UNUSUALLY NOISY WHEN OPERATING

Notify Organizational Maintenance.

2. TRANS TEMP GAUGE INDICATES


OVERHEATING DURING NORMAL OPERATION

Notify Organizational Maintenance.

3. SLOW OR DIFFICULT ENGAGEMENT

Notify Organizational Maintenance.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1. ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS INOPERATIVE

Check battery cables for looseness or corrosion.

If battery connections are dirty or loose,


clean and tighten cables. Refer to paragraph
3-10.

3-8
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

AIR SYSTEM

1. WARNING BUZZER AND AIR INDICATOR IS ON

Step 1. Check air pressure gauge.

If gauge shows 75 psi or more, but buzzer


and light are still on, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

Step 2. Check to make sure all six air reservoir


draincocks are closed.

Close all draincocks. If buzzer and light are


still on, go to Step 3.

Step 3. Make sure TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve is


pulled out (off position).

Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve.

Step 4. Check for leaks at air reservoirs, hoses, lines,


fittings and connectors.

If leak is found, tighten connections and


notify Organizational Maintenance. If no
leaks are found and problem still exists, go
to Step 5.

3-9
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

AIR SYSTEM (Continued)

Step 5. If vehicle is coupled to a trailer and


troubleshooting of vehicle does not reveal trouble
with vehicle air system, disconnect trailer.

Step 6. Check air pressure gauge again.

If gauge does not increase above 75 psi,


notify Organizational Maintenance.

2. LOSES PRESSURE OR AIR INDICATOR LIGHT


AND BUZZER SOUNDS DURING OPERATION

Step 1. Check to make sure all six air reservoir


draincocks are closed.

Close all draincocks. If problem still exists,


go to Step 2.

Step 2. Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve. If


vehicle is coupled to a trailer, push in TRAILER
AIR SUPPLY valve.

Step 3. Accelerate engine until AIR PRESSURE gauge


indicates 120 psi (828 kPa).

Step 4. Stop engine.

3-10
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

AIR SYSTEM (Continued)

Step 5. Fully depress service brake treadle while a crew


member listens for leaks.

If leak is found, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

If no leak is found, but buzzer and warning


light stay on, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

3. TRAILER BRAKE DOES NOT APPLY WHEN


SERVICE BRAKE TREADLE OR PARKING BRAKE IS
USED

Make sure inter-vehicular air hoses are correctly connected.

Connect hoses.

Push in TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (on


position).

If problems continue, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

3-11
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

WHEELS AND TIRES

1. WHEEL WOBBLES

Step 1. Check wheel for loose, missing, or broken lug


nuts.

Tighten loose nuts and notify Organizational


Maintenance.

Step 2. Check to see if wheel is bent.

If wheel is bent, change wheel and tire


assembly. Refer to paragraph 3-8.

If wheel still wobbles, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

2. VEHICLE WANDERS OR PULLS TO ONE SIDE ON


LEVEL SURFACE

WARNING

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE


PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA
INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

• UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE


TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED
PATH. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER

3-12
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

WHEELS AND TIRES (Continued)

PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH


TO PERSONNEL.

• IF THE TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER


INFLATED, OR THERE IS OBVIOUS OR
SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE OR WHEEL
COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE COMPLETELY
DEFLATED PER PARAGRAPH 3-4 IN THIS
MANUAL. TO DEFLATE THE TIRE, REMOVE THE
VALVE CORE FROM THE VALVE STEM AND
STAND OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AREA BEFORE
THE WHEEL IS REMOVED FROM THE VEHICLE
OR PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.

NOTE
Trajectory area as shown applies to all wheel/tire assemblies.

Step 1. Check tire pressure.

Inflate or deflate tires to proper pressure.


Refer to paragraph 3-4.

3-13
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

WHEELS AND TIRES (Continued)

Step 2. Make sure all tires are of the proper size and type.

If tires are not properly matched and if


more than one tire is involved, notify
Organizational Maintenance.

If only one tire is unmatched and the spare


tire is of the correct size and type, replace
improper wheel and tire assembly with the
spare. Refer to paragraph 3-8.

If vehicle still does not steer properly, notify


Organizational Maintenance.

3. TIRES WORN UNEVENLY OR EXCESSIVELY

WARNING

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE


PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA
INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

• UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE


TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED
PATH. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

3-14
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

WHEELS AND TIRES (Continued)

• IF THE TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER


INFLATED, OR THERE IS OBVIOUS OR
SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE OR WHEEL
COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE COMPLETELY
DEFLATED PER PARAGRAPH 3-4 IN THIS
MANUAL. TO DEFLATE THE TIRE, REMOVE THE
VALVE CORE FROM THE VALVE STEM AND
STAND OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AREA BEFORE
THE WHEEL IS REMOVED FROM THE VEHICLE
OR PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.

NOTE
Trajectory area as shown applies to all wheel/tire assemblies.

Step 1. Check tire for proper inflation.

Inflate or deflate tires to proper pressure.


Refer to paragraph 3-4.

Step 2. Check wheel for loose, missing, or broken lug


nuts.

Tighten loose nuts and notify Organizational


Maintenance.

3-15
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

STEERING

1. VEHICLE IS HARD TO STEER, SHIMMIES, OR


WANDERS

WARNING

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE


PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA
INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

• UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE


TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED
PATH. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

• IF THE TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER


INFLATED, OR THERE IS OBVIOUS OR
SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE OR WHEEL
COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE COMPLETELY
DEFLATED PER PARAGRAPH 3-4 IN THIS
MANUAL. TO DEFLATE THE TIRE, REMOVE THE
VALVE CORE FROM THE VALVE STEM AND
STAND OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AREA BEFORE
THE WHEEL IS REMOVED FROM THE VEHICLE
OR PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.

3-16
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

STEERING (Continued)

NOTE
Trajectory area as shown applies to all wheel/tire assemblies.

Check tires for proper inflation. Refer to Paragraph 3-4.

Inflate or deflate tires to proper pressure.


Refer to paragraph 3-4.

If vehicle still does not steer properly, notify


Organizational Maintenance.

2. VEHICLE STEERING SLOW TO RESPOND OR


POWER IS INTERMITTENT

NOTE
On the MK15/15A1 and the MK17/17A1, the cranes must be in
the stowed position when checking hydraulic fluid level.
Hydraulic fluid must be at operating temperature.

3-17
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

STEERING (Continued)

Step 1. Check hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. It should be between add and full
marks.

Add fluid as required.

Step 2. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic lines.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If lines are damaged, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1. CRANES, WINCHES, OR A-FRAME OPERATES


TOO SLOW, TOO FAST, OR WITH JERKY MOVEMENTS

NOTE
On the MK15/15A1 and the MK17/17A1, the cranes must be in
the stowed position when checking hydraulic fluid level.

Step 1. Check hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. It should be between add and full
marks.

Add fluid as required.

3-18
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (Continued)

Step 2. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic lines.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If lines are damaged, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

2. ONE OR MORE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS WILL


NOT OPERATE

NOTE
On the MK15 and MK17, the cranes must be in the stowed
position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic fluid
must be at operating temperature.

Step 1. Check hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. It should be between add and full
marks.

Add fluid as required.

Step 2. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic lines.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If lines are damaged, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

3-19
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS

1. CRANE DOES NOT OPERATE

Step 1. Check that selector valve is in the AUXILIARY


HYDRAULICS position. Make sure that valve is
fully engaged.

Pull selector valve, mounted on the right


fender of the power unit, to AUXILIARY
HYDRAULICS position.

If selector valve is in correct position, go to


Step 2.

NOTE
On the MK15A1 and MK17A1, the cranes must be in the stowed
position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic fluid
must be at operating temperature.

Step 2. Check the hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. Fluid level should be between add and
full marks.

Add fluid as required.

If fluid level is OK, go to Step 3.

3-20
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 3. Ensure that hydraulic lines are securely connected


to MK48/MK48A1.

Secure hydraulic connections to


MK48/MK48A1.

If hydraulic connections are OK, go to


Step 4.

Step 4. Ensure that the MAIN POWER switch on the


crane junction box is in the ON position. This
switch functions both as a circuit breaker and
switch.

If the switch is in the OFF position, reset. If


the switch trips again, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

If the switch is in the ON position, go to


Step 5.

Step 5. Ensure that the EMERGENCY STOP switch on


the crane remote control unit is in the ON position. This switch
disables all crane functions when in the OFF position.

If the switch is in the OFF position, turn to


ON position.

If the switch is in the ON position, go to


Step 6.

3-21
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 6. Push in hydraulic pressure MANUAL


OVERRIDE button and attempt to extend/lower
outrigger beams/jack cylinders, using crane
controls on main control valve bank.

If outrigger beams/jack cylinders can be


extended/lowered, go to Step 7.

If outrigger beams/jack cylinders cannot be


extended/lowered, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

Step 7. Check that all crane controls on main valve bank


operate with hydraulic pressure MANUAL
OVERRIDE button pressed in.

If all crane controls operate, continue


operations using manual controls only and
notify Organizational Maintenance when
mission is completed.

If all crane controls do not operate, notify


Organizational Maintenance.

3-22
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

2. CRANE DOES NOT OPERATE WITH REMOTE


CONTROLS

Step 1. Ensure that the EMERGENCY STOP switch on


the crane remote control unit is in the ON
position. This switch disables all crane functions
when in the OFF position.

If the switch is in the OFF position, raise


cover and move switch to ON position.

If the switch is in the ON position, go to


Step 2.

Step 2. Check electrical connections at the remote control


unit and at the crane. Inspect connector (both the
crane, remote control unit and harness side) for
damage; bent, corroded and unseated pins and
sockets.

If damaged connections were found, Notify


Organizational Maintenance.

If no damage is found, go to Step 3.

Step 3. Operate the remote control unit and check if the


manual control levers move when the remote
control unit is actuated.

3-23
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

If levers do not move, operate the crane


using manual controls only and notify
Organizational Maintenance when mission
is completed.

3. BOOM OPERATION ABNORMAL OR DOES NOT


TELESCOPE IN OR OUT

NOTE
On the MK15A1 and MK17A1, the crane must be in the stowed
position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic fluid
must be at operating temperature.

Step 1. Check the hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. Fluid level should be between add and
full marks.

Add fluid as required.

If fluid level is OK, go to Step 2.

Step 2. Check that load is not over the load limit shown
on the range diagram (Para 2-16.1 or 3-23.1). The
crane overload shutdown system prevents further
lifting operations when the crane is overloaded.

If load is over maximum weight, lower load


and reduce load to correct weight.

If load is OK, go to Step 3.

3-24
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 3. Visually check boom sections for proper


lubrication, bends, or other damage.

If boom sections require lubrication,


lubricate in accordance with LI 2320-12/9A.
If damage is present, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

If boom sections are OK, go to Step 4.

Step 4. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic tubes or hoses.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If tubes or hoses are damaged or other


problems are evident, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

If no visual leaks are evident, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Abnormal boom operation may be caused by air


in hydraulic cylinders. To remove air, first
remove load from crane. Then raise boom above
horizontal and telescope out. Finally, lower boom
below horizontal and telescope boom in to purge
air from cylinder.

If problem persists, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

3-25
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

4. BOOM DOES NOT RAISE OR LOWER, OR RAISES


AND LOWERS SLOWLY

Step 1. Check outside temperature. If temperature is less


than 0° F (-17° C), hydraulic oil may be thick and
not flow easily. When operating crane in
extremely cold weather, proper warm-up
procedures must be followed.

If operating crane in extremely cold


weather, refer to Para 2-36 for specific
warm-up instructions.

If operating crane in other than extreme cold


conditions, go to Step 2.

Step 2. Check that load is not over the load limit shown
on the range diagram (Para 2-17 or 3-26).

If load is over maximum weight, lower load


and reduce load to correct weight.

If load is OK, go to Step 3.

Step 3. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic tubes or hoses.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

3-26
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

If tubes or hoses are damaged or other


problems are evident, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

5. HOIST OPERATION JERKY, OR DOES NOT LIFT


OR LOWER LOAD

Step 1. Check outside temperature. If temperature is less


than 0° F (-17° C), hydraulic oil may be thick and
not flow easily. When operating crane in
extremely cold weather, proper warm-up
procedures must be followed.

If operating crane in extremely cold


weather, refer to Para 2-36 for specific
warm-up instructions.

If operating crane in other than extreme cold


conditions, go to Step 2.

Step 2. Check that load is not over the load limit shown
on the range diagram (Para 2-17 or 3-26).

If load is over maximum weight, lower load


and reduce load to correct weight.

If load is OK, go to Step 3.

3-27
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 3. Check if hoist cable is tangled or binding on hoist


drum.

If hoist cable is tangled or binding, refer to


Malfunction 6, Hoist Does Not Spool Cable
Properly.

If hoist cable is OK, go to Step 4.

Step 4. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic tubes or hoses.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If tubes or hoses are damaged or other


problems are evident, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

6. HOIST DOES NOT SPOOL CABLE PROPERLY

Step 1. Lower load to the ground as soon as a


mis-spooled condition is observed.

Step 2. Raise the boom to the maximum angle, telescope


out to maximum length and lower the hook to just
above ground level. At this point there should be
approximately five wraps of cable remaining on
the drum.

3-28
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 3. Inspect the entire length of hoist cable and note


any obvious kinks. If kinks are noted, position the
crane as necessary to inspect the hoist cable for
damaged wires. Refer to hoist cable criteria in
PMCS Table.

If cable is still serviceable, return the crane


to the position described in Step 2.

If cable is unserviceable, notify


Organizational Maintenance.

CAUTION

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO HOIST UP CABLE UNTIL TOLD TO


DO SO. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE
TO CABLE OR EQUIPMENT.

Step 4. Inspect the cable remaining on the hoist drum for


any looseness or gaps between wraps. If gaps
exist, lower crane boom to gain access to hoist
drum. Using a hammer, gently tap the cable
wraps back into close contact.

NOTE
If possible, perform Step 5 without changing the boom length or
angle. If necessary, reconfigure the crane as little as possible to
attach the load. The load is attached only for the purpose of
providing weight to straighten the cable while respooling.

3-29
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 5. Attach a load, not exceeding 6,500 lbs. (2,948.4


kg.), to crane. Position the load where crane
boom can be extended to maximum length and
raised to maximum angle. Extend the boom to
maximum length and raise to maximum angle.

CAUTION

DO NOT ALLOW THE HOIST CABLE TO BECOME


COMPLETELY UNLOADED (SLACK). FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN "BIRDNESTING" CABLE AND
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

Step 6. Lift the load slowly to maximum height while


observing the cable spooling.

If mis-spooling occurs, immediately lower


the load and repeat up to 12 times. If the
cable continues to mis-spool badly, notify
Organizational Maintenance.

If cable spools properly, lift the load and


lower it 12 times. Then, repeat the process
with no load attached. If mis-spooling
occurs without a load, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

3-30
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

7. MAST, OUTRIGGERS OR STABILIZERS EXTEND


OR RETRACT SLOW OR ABNORMAL

Step 1. Check outside temperature. If temperature is less


than 0° F (-17° C), hydraulic oil may be thick and
not flow easily. When operating crane in
extremely cold weather, proper warm-up
procedures must be followed.

If operating crane in extremely cold


weather, refer to Para 2-36 for specific
warm-up instructions.

If operating crane in other than extreme cold


conditions, go to Step 2.

Step 2. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic tubes or hoses.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If tubes or hoses are damaged or other


problems are evident, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

NOTE
On the MK15A1 and MK17A1, the crane must be in the stowed
position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic oil must
be at operating temperature.

3-31
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 3. Check the hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. Fluid level should be between add and
full marks.

Add fluid as required.

If fluid level is OK, notify Organizational


Maintenance.

8. SWING OPERATION SLOW OR JERKY IN ONE OR


BOTH DIRECTIONS, OR DOES NOT SWING IN EITHER
DIRECTION

Step 1. Check if truck and crane are level. The tilt alarm
will sound if the truck/crane is more than 4.5° out
of level. Ensure TILT ALARM switch is in the
ON position.

If TILT ALARM sounds, reposition truck


on level surface.

If TILT ALARM is silent, go to Step 2.

NOTE
On the MK15A1 and MK17A1, the crane must be in the stowed
position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic fluid
must be at operating temperature.

3-32
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 2. Check the hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on


reservoir. Fluid level should be between add and full marks.

Add fluid as required.

If fluid level is OK, go to Step 3.

Step 3. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections


and damaged hydraulic tubes or hoses.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not


stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If tubes or hoses are damaged or other


problems are evident, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

9. OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN SYSTEM DOES NOT


OPERATE PROPERLY

NOTE
The following tests and inspections should be performed in the
event of any of the following:

• Boom up and down, telescope out and hoist up functions


are disabled.

• Intermittent cut-out of the above listed functions (with


crane unloaded).

3-33
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

• Cut-out of the above listed functions too early or too late


(with crane loaded).

Step 1. Ensure that the MAIN POWER switch on the


crane junction box is in the ON position. This
switch functions both as a circuit breaker and
switch.

If the switch is in the OFF position, reset. If


the switch trips again, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

If the switch is in the ON position, go to


Step 2.

Step 2. Ensure that the EMERGENCY STOP switch on


the crane remote control unit is in the ON
position. This switch disables all crane functions
when in the OFF position.

If the switch is in the OFF position, raise


cover and move switch to ON position.

If the switch is in the ON position, go to


Step 3.

CAUTION

NEVER ATTEMPT CRANE OPERATIONS OR LIFTING


WITH CRANE MAST NOT FULLY ERECTED. OPERATING
THE CRANE WITH THE CRANE MAST NOT FULLY

3-34
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

ERECTED EVEN SLIGHTLY WILL DISRUPT THE


OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN SYSTEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND INJURY
TO PERSONNEL.

Step 3. Is the crane mast in the fully erected position?

If the mast is not fully erected, raise mast.


Refer to paragraph 2-17 or 2-24 in this
manual.

If the mast is fully erected, go to Step 4.

Step 4. Move the MAIN POWER switch to the OFF


position. Wait approximately 30 seconds and
move the MAIN POWER switch back to the ON
position. This action will reset the Overload
Shutdown System. Wait approximately 30 more
seconds for the system to complete a self test and
then try to operate the crane.

If the crane operates normally, the problem


has been corrected.

If the problem remains, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Check for proper spooling of the hoist cable. It is


essential for the correct operation of the Overload
Shutdown System to have the hoist cable spooled
properly. The Overload Shutdown System cannot

3-35
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

accurately determine the amount of


extended cable if the cable is not spooled
evenly or "birdnested".

If the hoist cable is not spooled properly,


refer to Malfunction 6, Hoist Does Not
Spool Cable Properly.

If the hoist cable is OK, notify


Organizational Maintenance.

CAUTION

NEVER ATTEMPT CRANE OPERATIONS OR LIFTING


WITH CRANE MAST NOT FULLY ERECTED. OPERATING
THE CRANE WITH THE CRANE MAST NOT FULLY
ERECTED EVEN SLIGHTLY WILL DISRUPT THE
OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN SYSTEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND INJURY
TO PERSONNEL.

Step 3. Is the crane mast in the fully erected position?

If the mast is not fully erected, raise mast.


Refer to paragraph 2-17 or 2-24 in this
manual.

If the mast is fully erected, go to Step 4.

3-36
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 4. Move the MAIN POWER switch to the OFF


position. Wait approximately 30 seconds and
move the MAIN POWER switch back to the ON
position. This action will reset the Overload
Shutdown System. Wait approximately 30 more
seconds for the system to complete a self test and
then try to operate the crane.

If the crane operates normally, the problem


has been corrected.

If the problem remains, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Check for proper spooling of the hoist cable. It is


essential for the correct operation of the Overload
Shutdown System to have the hoist cable spooled
properly. The Overload Shutdown System cannot
accurately determine the amount of extended
cable if the cable is not spooled evenly or
“birdnested”.

If the hoist cable is not spooled properly,


refer to Malfunction 6, Hoist Does Not
Spool Cable Properly.

If the hoist cable is OK, notify


Organizational Maintenance.

3-37
TM 08780B-10

3-3. INTRODUCTION. The crew is responsible for the


preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) listed in
tables 2-1 thru 2-5 within this manual. Certain other maintenance
services that the crew is responsible for are covered in this section.

3-4. TIRE INFLATION

WARNING

• FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE PROCEDURES


MAY RESULT IN FAULTY POSITIONING OF THE
TIRE AND/OR RIM PARTS AND CAUSE THE
ASSEMBLY TO BURST WITH EXPLOSIVE FORCE,
SUFFICIENT TO CAUSE SERIOUS PHYSICAL
INJURY OR DEATH.

• NEVER MOUNT OR USE DAMAGED TIRES OR


RIMS.

• BEFORE CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE, PERFORM


STEPS (1 AND 2) TO CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
PROPERLY, OR PRESSURE READINGS WILL BE IN-
ACCURATE AND INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT.

a. Tire Gauging

(1) Remove tire inflation hose and gauge


assembly (1) from stowage compartment.

WARNING

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE


PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA
INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

3-38
TM 08780B-10

• UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE


TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED
PATH. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

• NEVER INFLATE A TIRE WITHOUT CHECKING TO


ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE AND LOCK RING IS
STILL PROPERLY SEATED AND THE LOCK RING IS
PROPERLY SEATED IN THE LOCK RING GROOVE.
ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE, LOCK RING AND
LOCK RING GROOVE ARE NOT DAMAGED. THE
LOCK RING AND FLANGE MAY BLOW OFF
DURING INFLATION/DEFLATION RESULTING IN
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• WHEN INFLATING TIRES MOUNTED ON THE


VEHICLE, ALL PERSONNEL MUST REMAIN OUT
OF THE TRAJECTORY OF THE LOCK RING AND
FLANGE AS SHOWN BY THE AREAS INDICATED.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER PROCEDURES MAY
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

• IF TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER


INFLATED, OR THERE IS OBVIOUS OR
SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE OR WHEEL
COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE COMPLETELY
DEFLATED BY REMOVING THE VALVE CORE
FROM THE VALVE STEM AND STAND OUT OF THE
TRAJECTORY AREA OR PERSONAL INJURY OR
DEATH MAY RESULT.

• IF THE TIRE HAS BEEN RUN FLAT, OR IS OVER


OR UNDER INFLATED WHEN TIRE PRESSURE
MEASURED AND OPERATING TERRAIN IS
COMPARED TO TABLE 3-3, OR IF WHEEL/TIRE
ASSEMBLY HAS OBVIOUS OR SUSPECTED
DAMAGE, IT IS NOT SAFE TO ADJUST TIRE

3-39
TM 08780B-10

PRESSURE. COMPLETELY DEFLATE THE TIRE


AND REMOVE THE TIRE FROM THE AXLE.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES MAY
RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR
DEATH.

NOTE
Tire gauge air chuck (2) must clamp securely with no leaks or air
pressure gauge readings will be inaccurate.

(2) Remove tire valve caps, snap tire gauge air


chuck (2) on to tire valve (3) by pulling back on sleeve (4). Read
tire pressure on gauge dial (5) and compare to Table 3-3.

(3) Inflate tire as needed. Refer to section b.

(4) Reinstall tire valve caps.

(5) Stow inflation hose and gauge assembly (1).

3-40
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-3. Unsafe Inflation Pressures

MK48 Tires MK14,15, 16 MK48 Tires MK14,15,16


Are: and 17 Tires Are: and 17 Tires
Are: Are:
Over inflated. Over inflated. Under inflated. Under inflated.
Tire pressure Tire pressure Tire pressure Tire pressure
measured is measured is measured is measured is
25% or more 25% or more 80% or less 80% or less
above standard above standard than the than the
pressure. pressure. standard tire standard tire
pressure. pressure.

Do not adjust Do not adjust Do not adjust Do not adjust


pressure if pressure if pressure if pressure if
above pressure above pressure below pressure below pressure
shown below. shown below. shown below. shown below.
ON ROAD 75 psi 138 psi 48 psi 88 psi
(517 kPa) (948 kPa) (331 kPa) (607 kPa)
OFF ROAD 56 psi 56 psi 36 psi 36 psi
(386 kPa) (386 kPa) (248 kPa) (248 kPa)
EMERGENCY 38 psi 38 psi 24 psi 24 psi
(Sand, Mud, (262 kPa) (262 kPa) (165 kPa) (165 kPa)
and Snow)

b. Tire Inflation

WARNING

BEFORE CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE, PERFORM STEPS


(1 THRU 3.2) TO CHECK TIRE PRESSURE PROPERLY, OR
PRESSURE READINGS WILL BE INACCURATE AND
INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT.

(1) Start engine and apply parking brake. Make


sure air reservoir pressure is higher than recommended tire
pressure by checking primary and secondary air pressure gauges
on instrument panel.

3-41
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

WHEN WORKING AT ARTICULATION JOINT, MAKE SURE


TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL AND THE PARKING
BRAKE IS APPLIED. THIS WILL PREVENT THE
ARTICULATION JOINT FROM MOVING IF THE
STEERING WHEEL IS ACCIDENTALLY MOVED WHILE
THE ENGINE IS RUNNING.

(2) Pull back on coupling sleeve (6) and insert


hose nipple (7) into coupling. Release sleeve (6).

WARNING

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE


PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA
INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

3-42
TM 08780B-10

• UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE


TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED
PATH. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER
PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

• NEVER INFLATE A TIRE WITHOUT CHECKING TO


ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE AND LOCK RING IS
STILL PROPERLY SEATED AND THE LOCK RING IS
PROPERLY SEATED IN THE LOCK RING GROOVE.
ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE, LOCK RING AND
LOCK RING GROOVE ARE NOT DAMAGED. THE
LOCK RING AND FLANGE MAY BLOW OFF
DURING INFLATION/DEFLATION RESULTING IN
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• WHEN INFLATING TIRES MOUNTED ON THE


VEHICLE, ALL PERSONNEL MUST REMAIN OUT
OF THE TRAJECTORY OF THE LOCK RING AND
FLANGE AS SHOWN BY THE AREAS INDICATED.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER PROCEDURES MAY
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL.

• IF TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER


INFLATED, OR THERE IS OBVIOUS OR
SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE OR WHEEL
COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE COMPLETELY
DEFLATED BY REMOVING THE VALVE CORE
FROM THE VALVE STEM AND STAND OUT OF THE
TRAJECTORY AREA OR PERSONAL INJURY OR
DEATH MAY RESULT.

• IF THE TIRE HAS BEEN RUN FLAT, OR IS OVER


OR UNDER INFLATED WHEN TIRE PRESSURE
MEASURED AND OPERATING TERRAIN IS
COMPARED TO TABLE 3-3, OR IF WHEEL/TIRE
ASSEMBLY HAS OBVIOUS OR SUSPECTED
DAMAGE, IT IS NOT SAFE TO ADJUST TIRE

3-43
TM 08780B-10

PRESSURE. COMPLETELY DEFLATE THE TIRE


AND REMOVE THE TIRE FROM THE AXLE.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES MAY
RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR
DEATH.

(3) Remove tire valve cap. Snap air chuck (2)


onto tire valve (3) by pulling back on sleeve (4). Immediately step
out of the trajectory area, read tire pressure on gauge dial (5) and
compare to Table 3-3.

(3.1) If tire pressure is under inflated or over


inflated or if the wheel or tire has obvious damage or is suspected
of damage, remove valve core (9) from valve stem (3). When tire
is completely deflated, remove from vehicle and take to Unit
Maintenance for disassembly and repair and install spare tire on
vehicle.

(3.2) If tire does not have obvious damage or is


not suspected of damage, stand out of trajectory and inflate or
deflate by depressing lever (8) until proper pressure is attained.
Refer to tire pressure chart in PMCS table.

(4) When tire inflation operation is completed,


grasp end of hose at nipple (7) and pull back on sleeve (6).

(5) Install tire valve caps.

(6) Stow hose and gauge assembly (1).

3-44
TM 08780B-10

3-5. DRAINING AIR RESERVOIRS

a. General. There are seven air reservoirs on all LVS


models that must be drained at the end of each day's operation.
One is located at the front of the cab and two more are located at
the rear of the cab. The two remaining reservoirs are mounted
along the left and right frame rails of each trailer. Each tank is
provided with drain locks.

b. Service

(1) Drain quick-build-up reservoir (1) by first


reaching through grille, then pressing and holding stem (6) up.
Allow all air and moisture to drain, then release stem (6).

3-45
TM 08780B-10

(2) Drain air reservoirs (2 and 3) by opening


drain cock (7), located at the end of each tank. Allow all air and
moisture to drain, then close cock.

(3) Drain remaining air reservoirs (4 and 5) by


opening drain cock (8), located in the center of each tank. Allow
all air and moisture to drain, then close cock.

(4) Make sure all drain cocks are closed tightly.

3-6. CLEANING THE VEHICLE

a. Exterior

CAUTION

DO NOT WIPE DIRT OFF VEHICLE WHEN VEHICLE IS


DRY. DIRT, STONES, OR DEBRIS CAN SCRATCH PAINT
OFF THE VEHICLE.

(1) Wash vehicle often with cool or warm


water. Do not use strong detergent or abrasives.

3-46
TM 08780B-10

(2) While cleaning vehicle, look closely for rust


or corrosion, bare metal, or other damage. Report damage to
Organizational Maintenance.

b. Interior

(1) Wipe loose dust and dirt from cab interior.

(2) Clean seats and seat belts using a mild


solution of warm water and soap. Never use solvents or abrasives.

(3) Wipe seats and seat belts dry.

3-7. PURGING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC JACK

a. Preparation

NOTE
Purging of air from the hydraulic jack should be accomplished
upon first receipt of the vehicle, whenever the jack hose is
replaced with a new hose and whenever jerking motion is
observed during jacking. This jerking motion is caused by air
trapped in the hydraulic fluid.

(1) Pump jack (1) up until cylinder (2) is fully


extended. For jack operating instructions, refer to paragraph 3-8,
section c.

3-47
TM 08780B-10

b. Purging

(1) Turn jack (1) upside down and push on the


base plate with the help of assistant for additional weight.

(2) Purging is completed when hydraulic jack


has been pushed completely down.

3-8. CHANGING WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY

a. General

WARNING

USE CAUTION WHEN LIFTING OR HANDLING WHEEL


AND TIRE ASSEMBLY. IT IS VERY HEAVY AND CAN
CAUSE INJURY IF DROPPED OR IMPROPERLY LIFTED.

(1) In case of flat, stop the truck on level surface


where there is no hazard to other traffic or to crew members
changing tire.

(2) Spare wheel and tire assembly is provided


on the MK48/48A1 Power Unit. A tire hoist is provided to raise
and lower the spare wheel and tire assembly from its stowed
position.

3-48
TM 08780B-10

(3) When changing tires, do not substitute other


types or sizes of tires unless all tires on truck can be converted.
Keep all tires the same.

(4) Tire changing requires two people. One


person must operate the hoist while the other person guides the tire
up or down.

b. Using The Spare Tire Hoist

(1) Assembling tire hoist.

(a) Remove arm assembly (1) and


column (2) from left side of tire carrier.

(b) Remove winch column assembly (3)


from right side of tire carrier.

NOTE
• To provide enough room to lower spare tire, the front
power unit cannot be articulated to the right.

• An extension tube is required to remove sand tires or the


rear extended pintle when mounted on spare tire mount.

3-49
TM 08780B-10

(c) Apply a small amount of grease on


base (4) and insert column (2) into base (4).

(d) Remove extension tube (5) from


compartment (6) if required.

(e) Slide extension tube (5) over column


(2) if required. Secure extension tube with pin (7) and clip (8).

(f) Slide winch column (3) over


extension tube (5) or column (2). Secure winch column with pin
(9) and clip (10).

(g) Slide arm assembly (1) over winch


column (3) as shown. Secure arm assembly with pin (11) and clip
(12).

(h) Remove rear extended pintle if stowed on


top of spare tire. Refer to paragraph 2-26, section d.

(i) Rotate crank handle (13) counterclockwise


several turns to slacken cable.

3-50
TM 08780B-10

(j) Remove hook (14) from crank bolt. Then


guide cable and hook into groove in pulley (15). Attach hook (14)
to tire hoist bracket (16).

(k) Insert pin (17) and clip (18).

(2) Removing spare tire and wheel.

WARNING

DO NOT STAND ON SPARE TIRE WHILE REMOVING LUG


NUTS. TIRE MAY TILT, RESULTING IN PERSONAL
INJURY.

(a) Using lug wrench and bar, remove


three lug nuts (19).

WARNING

• DO NOT GET BETWEEN SPARE TIRE AND


VEHICLE WHILE LIFTING TIRE. THE TIRE IS
HEAVY AND COULD CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.

3-51
TM 08780B-10

• MAKE SURE YOU HAVE GOOD FOOTING WHEN


OPERATING HOIST. THE TIRE MAY SWING FREE
AND KNOCK YOU OFF THE TRUCK.

NOTE
A cargo strap attached to the tire may aid in guiding and
securing the tire assembly during removal.

(b) While turning crank handle (13)


clockwise, carefully raise tire off carrier while helper guides it.

WARNING

ORDER ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE WORK AREA


UNTIL LOWERING OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETED.

(c) Swing tire hoist outward and start


lowering tire. Try to keep the tire tilted so that the tread-will
contact ground first. This will enable you to remove tire hoist
bracket (16) and roll tire away.

(d) Lower tire to ground and remove


hook (14) from hoist bracket (16).

3-52
TM 08780B-10

(e) Remove three lug nuts (20) and tire


hoist bracket (16). Leave the cable payed out to lift flat tire into its
stowed position.

c. Jacking Procedures

(1) Set parking brakes and place two wheel


chocks opposite the tire to be changed.

WARNING

THE HYDRAULIC JACK IS INTENDED ONLY FOR


LIFTING THE TRUCK, NOT FOR SUPPORTING THE
VEHICLE WHILE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE. DO
NOT GET UNDER THE TRUCK AFTER IT IS RAISED
UNLESS IT IS PROPERLY SUPPORTED WITH BLOCKS OR
JACK STANDS. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS WARNING
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

(2) Adjust hydraulic jack (21) for proper lifting


height by rotating finger (22) up or down.

(3) Place extended tube (23) over cylinder (24).


This will give the additional height needed to reach frame rail.

NOTE
The LVS hydraulic jack must be positioned on the leaf spring
nearest the tire being removed. Properly positioned, the jack will
lift the tire completely off the ground.

3-53
TM 08780B-10

(4) Place hydraulic jack (21) on solid level


ground between tires. If necessary, use a jack base plate (25) for
good footing.

CAUTION

MAKE SURE LIP OF HYDRAULIC JACK (21) IS UNDER


LEAF SPRING. TO PREVENT PARTS DAMAGE, DO NOT
USE TOP OF HYDRAULIC JACK (21) TO RAISE TIRE.

(5) Position lip of hydraulic jack (21) under leaf


spring. Hydraulic jack (21) must be as close to axle as possible.
Use the following diagram for proper jacking locations.

NOTE
Two hydraulic jacks can be operated by one pump.

(6) Remove four plugs (26 and 27). Connect


hose (28) to jack (21) and hydraulic pump (29).

3-54
TM 08780B-10

(7) Open valve (30) at hose (28) by turning


handle counterclockwise until it stops.

(8) Close valve (31) by turning handle


clockwise until it stops.

(9) Raise jack (21) by pumping handle (32)


until the tire raises slightly.

d. Tire Removal and Installation

WARNING

• IF THE TIRE HAS BEEN DRIVEN UNDER


INFLATED OR OVER INFLATED, OR THERE IS
OBVIOUS OR SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE
OR WHEEL COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE
COMPLETELY DEFLATED. TO DEFLATE THE
TIRE, REMOVE THE VALVE CORE FROM THE
VALVE STEM AND STAND OUT OF THE
TRAJECTORY AREA OR PERSONAL INJURY OR
DEATH MAY RESULT.

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE


PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF
THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA

3-55
TM 08780B-10

INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER


PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH
TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE
Trajectory as shown applies to all wheel/tire assemblies.

(1) Check replacement tire for proper air


pressure.

NOTE
All lug nuts on the left side of truck have left-hand threads.
Rotate nuts right to loosen, left to tighten. All lug nuts on the
right side of the truck have right-hand threads. Rotate nuts left
to loosen, right to tighten.

(1.1) Take tire pressure reading on tire to be


changed and compare reading to Table 3-4. If tire is under inflated
or over inflated, or there is obvious or suspected damage to the tire
or wheel components, completely deflate tire before removing
from vehicle. Refer to paragraph 3-4 in this manual.

(2) Loosen all lug nuts on the wheel to be


removed. Then raise the axle until the tire clears the ground.

3-56
TM 08780B-10

Table 3-4. Unsafe Inflation Pressures

MK48 MK14, 15, MK48 MK14, 15,


Tires Are: 16 and 17 Tires Are: 16 and 17
Tires Are: Tires Are:
Over Over Under Under
inflated. inflated. inflated. inflated.
Tire Tire Tire Tire
pressure pressure pressure pressure
measured is measured is measured is measured is
25% or 25% or 80% or less 80% or less
more above more above than the than the
standard standard standard standard
pressure. pressure. tire tire
pressure. pressure.

Do not Do not Do not Do not


adjust adjust adjust adjust
pressure if pressure if pressure if pressure if
above above below below
pressure pressure pressure pressure
shown shown shown shown
below. below. below. below.
ON ROAD 75 psi 138 psi 48 psi(331 88 psi
(517 kPa) (948 kPa) kPa) (607 kPa)
OFF ROAD 56 psi 56 psi 36 psi 36 psi
(386 kPa) (386 kPa (248 kPa) (248 kPa)
EMERGENCY 38 psi 38 psi 24 psi 24 psi
(Sand, Mud (262 kPa) (262 kPa) (165 kPa) (165 kPa)
and Snow)

(3) Remove lug nuts from wheel and remove


wheel and tire assembly from hub.

(4) Mount spare wheel and tire assembly on hub


and install lug nuts. Run nuts up snugly, but do not complete
tightening yet.

3-57
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

WHEN RETURNING AXLE TO THE GROUND, ENSURE


PERSONNEL ARE OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN
BY THE AREA INDICATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

(5) Lower truck by slowly rotating valve (31)


counterclockwise until tire just contacts ground, then close valve
(31).

(6) Alternately tighten lug nuts as shown. After


tightening lug nuts, turn valve (31) counterclockwise to lower jack
(21) completely.

NOTE
As soon as possible, take vehicle to Organizational Maintenance
and have lug nuts tightened to 650-750 foot-pounds (881.4-1,017
N*m).

3-58
TM 08780B-10

e. Mounting Tire On Carrier

(1) Install tire hoist bracket (16) on wheel so


that bracket eye is towards deep side of wheel and location arrow
(33) is pointing at valve stem (34) as shown.

(2) Install three lug nuts (20) and tighten


securely.

(3) Attach cable hook (14) to hoist bracket (16).

NOTE
A cargo strap attached to the tire may aid in guiding and
securing the tire assembly during installation.

(4) Rotate crank handle (13) clockwise to raise


tire. Have helper guide tire while lifting it.

3-59
TM 08780B-10

(5) Swing tire into mounting position over


carrier. Position valve stem (35) so that it will fit into notch (36)
when tire is lowered.

(6) Lower tire onto carrier and install three lug


nuts (19). Tighten nuts securely with lug wrench and bar.

(7) Stow extended pintle. Refer to paragraph 2-


32, section d.

f. Disassembly And Stowage Of Tire Hoist

(1) Rotate crank handle (13) counterclockwise


to slacken cable. Remove hook (14) from tire hoist bracket (16).

(2) Remove clip (18) and pin (17). Rotate crank


handle (13) clockwise to wind up cable. Attach hook (14) on
crank bolt and slightly tighten cable.

3-60
TM 08780B-10

(3) Remove clip (12) and pin (11). Slide arm


assembly (1) off column (3).

(4) Remove clips (8 and 10) and pins (7 and 9).


Remove winch column (3) and extension tube (5), if used, from
column (2).

(5) Remove column (2) from base (4).

3-61
TM 08780B-10

(6) Mount winch column assembly (3) to right


side of tire carrier. Secure with clips.

(7) Mount column (2) on left side of the tire


carrier and secure with clips.

(8) Mount arm assembly (1) on column (2) and


secure with clips.

(9) Stow extension tube (5).

3-62
TM 08780B-10

3-9. FUEL TANK STRAINER SERVICE

a. Strainer Removal

NOTE
Perform fuel tank strainer maintenance on both left and right
fuel tanks.

(1) Park vehicle and turn engine off.

3-63
TM 08780B-10

WARNING

FUEL IS FLAMMABLE AND CAN EXPLODE EASILY. TO


AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH, KEEP FUEL AWAY
FROM OPEN FIRE AND KEEP FIRE EXTINGUISHER
WITHIN EASY REACH WHEN WORKING WITH FUEL. DO
NOT WORK ON FUEL WHEN ENGINE IS HOT. FUEL CAN
BE IGNITED BY HOT ENGINE.

(2) Wipe dirt from filler cap (1) and unscrew


from tank.

(3) Pull strainer (2) out of fuel tank.

(4) Reach inside fuel tank and turn retainer (3)


sideways so that strainer (2) may be removed.

(5) Remove chain (4) from retainer (3). Pull


chain (4) through slot in strainer (2).

b. Cleaning And Inspection

(1) Wash strainer (2) in solvent (item 20,


Appendix D) and allow to air dry.

(2) Clean inside of filler cap (1).

(3) Inspect strainer (2) for any damage that


would allow unwanted material to enter tank.

(4) Check to see that gasket in filler cap (1) is in


good condition and will seal fuel tank properly.

c. Strainer Installation

(1) Place chain (4) through slot in strainer (2).


Install chain (4) on retainer (3) so that it is secure in the loop.

3-64
TM 08780B-10

(2) Insert retainer (3) and strainer (2) into fuel


tank.

(3) Screw filler cap (1) on tank and tighten.

3-10. BATTERY SERVICE

a. Disconnecting Batteries

CAUTION

BATTERY BOX COVER